Lunar Prodigy Service Manual

PRODIGY
Service Manual
Part Number: LUN7396
Revision: C
This page left blank intentionally.
ii
Prodigy Service Manual
This document contains confidential or proprietary information of GE-Lunar Corp. neither the
document nor the information is to be reproduced, distributed, used or disclosed, either in whole or
in part, except as specifically authorized by GE-Lunar Corp.
GE-LUNAR Corporation makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this material, and shall not be
held liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection
with the furnishings or use of this manual.
Read through this manual thoroughly before attempting to service any components. Unauthorized
service may void system warranties or service contracts. Consult the GE-LUNAR Customer
Support Department prior to attempting any servicing:
608-828--2663
608-826-7107 (Fax)
is a registered trademark of General Electric Company.
PRODIGY is a trademark of GE-LUNAR Corporation.

Windows NT is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation
Copyright 2000 by GE-LUNAR Corporation.

Madison, Wisconsin. All rights reserved.
iii
iv
READ THIS FIRST

Using This Manual:
A person who will be performing service work on the PRODIGY should use this manual in the
following manner:
Read the Safety and Overview Chapters to familiarize yourself with the scanner as a whole and
with the general function of the circuit boards.
Chapter 3 should be understood completely as it explains the Diagnostics Software (built in
requires a password for access).
The Chapter 4 and Chapter 5 contain common procedures and troubleshooting information and
can be read as needed, but are good sources of information.
When a problem arises, Chapter 4 should be referenced. Check the table of contents for Chapter 4
to see if the problem being experienced is described. If so, refer to the appropriate page. If not, try
to generalize the problem (e.g. the Detector is repeatedly running into the front of the scanner and
reversing and then running back into the front of the scanner. This is a mechanical problem in
general, specifically with Transverse Mechanics, check that subsection of Chapter 4 for the
subsystem experiencing the fault.
This manual commonly references other Sections and pages of the manual as needed, so often
procedures in the Chapter 5 Appendix are referred to as ways to solve problems described in
Chapter 4.
Information Requested By GE-LUNAR:

When requesting assistance from GE-LUNAR, please provide the following information:
System Number (DF+xxxxx)
Institution or Doctor's name
Location
Complete list of symptoms
Names and part numbers of parts needed for service
In addition to the information above, an Error Log printout and QAs and QA history or other failing
diagnostic test printout (Alignment Test etc.) will also help to improve the accuracy of our
diagnosis:
For problems with specific patient scans, it is recommended that you copy the scan files to
diskette, and send it, with a description of the problem, to the Applications Department at GE LUNAR.
vi
1 1
2 Safety
Chapter 1:Safety
This chapter highlights safety devices and features a Service

Engineer should know before servicing a PRODIGY system.
Chapter Contents:
1.0 General Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
1.1 Symbols and labels found on the PRODIGY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
1.1.1 External Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
1.1.2 Internal Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
1.1.3 Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
1.2 Emergency Stop Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
1.3 Laser Exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
1.4 Shutter Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
1.5 Cautions, Warnings, and Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
1.5.1 Caution Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
1.5.2 Warning Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
1.5.3 Note Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
1.6 Safety Concerns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
1.6.1 Pinch points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
1.6.2 Laser safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
1.6.3 Radiation safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
1.6.4 Scatter Radiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
1.7 Controlling Computer and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
1.7.1 Electrical Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
1.7.3 Peripheral Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
1.7.4 Standard room configuration (system no. DF+12000 and greater)126
1.7.5 Small room configuration (system no. DF+12000 and higher) 1-27
1.7.6 Scanner power output configuration (system no. DF+11999 and
lower) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
1.7.7 Wall outlet configuration (system no. DF+11999 and lower) . . 1-27
Figure 1-1. The PRODIGY Display Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Figure 1-2. Laser Warning Label (U.S. systems only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Figure 1-4. Laser Warning Label (International systems only) . . . . . . . . 1-20
Figure 1-5. Source (x-rays) off - Shutter closed (green) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
PRODIGY Service Manual (Rev C - 2000)
Safety113
Figure 1-6. Source (x-rays) on - Shutter open (yellow). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Figure 1-7. Potential Pinch Points on the PRODIGY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Figure 1-8. PRODIGY Iso-Dose Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
This document contains confidential or proprietary information of GE-Lunar Corp. Neither the document nor the information therein is
to be reproduced, distributed, used or disclosed, either in whole or in part, except as specifically authorized by GE-Lunar Corp.
1-14 Safety
1.0
General Safety
DO NOT attempt to service the PRODIGY without first reading this
manual.
DO NOT attempt any repairs without prior instructions from authorized
LUNAR personnel.
In order to maintain electrical safety and electromagnetic compatibility,
the Lunar PRODIGY is only to be connected to a computer, printer, and
peripherals that are certified to be compliant with IEC 950/EN 60950
Safety of information technology equipment, including electrical business
equipment and IEC 601-1-2 Medical electrical equipment, Part 1:
General requirements for safety, 2. Collateral Standard: Electromagnetic
compatibility - Requirements and tests.Emergency Stop Button
1.1
Symbols and labels found on the PRODIGY

1.1.1 External Symbols
The following symbols are found on the PRODIGY, in the Operators
manual, and in the Service Manual.
Attention: contains important safety information such as the

location of a pinch point.
Emergency Stop Button: shows the location of the

emergency stop button.
Power On: shows the location of the Power On indicator and the
switch position for Power On.
Power Off: shows the switch position for Power Off.
Laser On: shows the location of the Laser On indicator. It is found

only on systems delivered internationally.
Safety1-15
Shutter Open: shows the location of the Shutter Open indicator.
X-ray On: shows the location of the X-Ray On indicator.
Type B Equipment: shows that the scanner has Type B

protection against electrical shock.
1.1.2 Internal Symbols

The following symbols are found inside the PRODIGY, and in the Service
Manual.
Protective Earth: shows the location of a Protective Earth

Terminal.
Functional Earth: shows the location of a Functional Earth

Terminal.
1.1.3 Labels
The following labels are found on the PRODIGY Scanner.
Laser Caution Label: Shows that the scanner uses

a Class II laser. This label is not found on systems
shipped to Canada.
Laser Caution Label: Canada only
1-16 Safety
Tube Head Assembly Label (system number

DF+12000 and greater): This label gives tube head
assembly and x-ray source characteristics
information. It is located on the tube head assembly
and the foot panel of the scanner.
Tube Head Assembly Label (system number

DF+11999 and lower): This label gives tube head
assembly and x-ray source characteristics
information. It is located on the tube head assembly
and the foot panel of the scanner.
A definition of each symbol on this label follows:
Inherent Filtration
Tube Insert
X-ray Source
Focal Point
System Label (system number DF+12000 and

greater): This label gives system input power
requirements and compliance information. It is
located on the foot panel of scanners. The CE
mark shows compliance with UL/CSA and the
Medical Device Directive 93/42/EEC.
System Label (system number DF+11999 and

lower): This label gives system input power
requirements and compliance information. It is
located on the foot panel of scanners. The CE
mark shows compliance with UL/CSA and the
Medical Device Directive 93/42/EEC.
Safety1-17
High Voltage Power Supply: This label gives

high voltage power supply (x-ray generator)
information. It is located on the positive and
negative power supplies, and foot panel of the
scanner.
X-ray Controller: This label shows x-ray

controller compliance. It is located on the foot
panel of the scanner.
Collimator Assembly: This label gives

collimator assembly information. It is located on
the collimator and foot panel of the scanner.
Warning Label and Radiation Symbol: The

Warning label shows that the system uses
ionizing radiation. It is found only on systems
delivered in the United States. Always obey
instructions for safe operation.
Radiation Label: This label shows that the system uses
ionizing radiation.
Grounding Reliability Label: This label states that

grounding reliability can only be maintained when using a
Hospital Grade or Hospital Only receptacle. It is only found
on systems delivered in the United States.
1-18 Safety
1.2
Emergency Stop Button

The Emergency Stop Button is a round red button located on the scanner
display panel (see Figure 1-1). When pressed, power is removed from
the X-ray tube head, the laser, and the shutter is closed. Power is also
removed from the scan arm motors, allowing the operator/patient to push
the scan arm out of the way.
Figure 1-1. The PRODIGY Display Panel
Safety1-19
1.3
Laser Exposure
The PRODIGY is equipped with a Class II Laser device. This laser is
used for patient positioning. A Class II rating indicates a low power visible
laser that is not normally hazardous to eyesight but has the potential to
be hazardous if viewed directly for an extended period of time. Because
of this potential hazard, DO NOT stare directly into the beam while the
laser is in operation, and DO NOT allow the beam to shine directly into
the patients' eyes. No specific eye protection is required with a Class II
laser.
A amber laser-on indicator, located on the front of the scan arm, is lit
when the laser is on. The program activates the laser during positioning
for an image acquisition. The program then turns off the laser when you
begin the scan. The emergency stop button will turn off the laser.
There is a caution label (Figure 1.2) on the scan arm near the Display
Panel.
Figure 1-2. Laser Warning Label (U.S. systems only)
Figure 1-3. Laser Warning Label (Canadian Systems only)
Figure 1-4. Laser Warning Label (International systems only)

Note:
DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM while the laser is

operating.
1-20 Safety
1.4
Shutter Indicator
This symbol is used to indicate an open-shutter condition in accordance
with the safety standards established by the International
Electrotechnical Commission (IEC).
Figure 1-5. Source (x-rays) off - Shutter closed (green)
Figure 1-6. Source (x-rays) on - Shutter open (yellow)

This symbol appears near the yellow X-ray shutter-open indicator light.
The X-ray shutter-open indicator light is located on the Display Panel on
the scan arm near the front.
Note:
1.5
When the x-ray on / shutter open symbol appears in literature

associated with the PRODIGY scanner, it will be used to
indicate that the procedure being described results in an openshutter condition. During these times personnel should
exercise caution to avoid excessive exposure to the X-rays.
Cautions, Warnings, and Notes

This manual contains warning and caution statements wherever
appropriate for your safety. The warnings and cautions used throughout
the manual are based on the safety standards established by the
International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC). In addition, the manual
uses notes to attract the reader's attention to important information.
1.5.1 Caution Statements

A caution statement reflects a condition
that, if not avoided, could cause
equipment or property damage.
Safety1-21
1.5.2 Warning Statements

A warning statement reflects a potentially
hazardous condition that, if not avoided, could
result in serious injury.
1.5.3 Note Statements

Note:
1.6
This symbol turns the reader's attention to important

information which may otherwise be overlooked.
Safety Concerns
1.6.1 Pinch points
The Warning label below identifies the location of possible pinch points
Because the PRODIGY Densitometer
contains moving parts, there are places
on the scanner where there is a danger
of pinching. Operators should be aware
of these pinch points to avoid injury to
the patient or themselves. When the scanner arm is in
motion, make sure possible pinch point locations are
clear at all times. Labels applied at the LUNAR factory
indicate the location of the pinch points. The pinch
points and their labels are shown in the figure 1-7.
1-22 Safety
Figure 1-7. Potential Pinch Points on the PRODIGY

Do not touch the AC Surge Suppressor
(located on the AC terminal block) it
may be hot.
Do not electrically connect the isolation
transformer bolt head to ground, doing
this will short out the transformer
Scan table isolated outlet strip must be
appropriately connected.
1.6.2 Laser safety

DO NOT STARE INTO THE LASER BEAM
during patient positioning and Quality
Assurance procedures.
The label that follows is located on the scanner arm and shows the location of
the laser aperture.
Safety1-23
1.6.3 Radiation safety

X-ray exposure: The system makes radiation when electric voltage is
supplied to, and current flows through, the x-ray tube. During a measurement,
the shutter opens to let a beam of radiation pass through the scanner table
and patient. The radiation field at the table top is 19.2 mm x 3.3 mm. Lead
oxide shielding surrounds the x-ray tube insert inside the tube housing
assembly and reduces radiation levels around the scanner table.
Skin entrance dose: Table 1 of the PRODIGY Operators Safety and
Specifications manual shows irradiation times and skin entrance doses.
1.6.4 Scatter Radiation

There is some scatter radiation from the PRODIGY when it is running.
Figure 1-8 shows the radiation dosages while the scanner is running at
3.00 mA at certain distances.
These dosages are relatively insignificant as the allowed yearly dosage
for a person working with radiation emitting equipment is 5000 mRem.
Radiation however should be avoided when possible.
1-24 Safety
Figure 1-8. PRODIGY Iso-Dose Diagram
Safety1-25
1.7
Controlling Computer and Accessories

1.7.1 Electrical Safety
IEC and UL/CSA certification
IEC: To maintain electrical safety, all computer equipment and accessories
connected to the scanner must meet all IEC requirements for safety, such as
IEC 950, "Safety of information technology equipment, including electrical
business equipment," and IEC 801-5, "EMC Surge Immunity Requirements."
The computer and all accessories must have the CE label.
UL/CSA: To maintain electrical safety, all computer equipment and
accessories connected to the scanner must have safety agency approvals for
UL/CSA.
1.7.2 Electromagnetic interference

Although the scanner meets safety standards regarding electromagnetic
interference (EN60601-1-2), you may still experience a loss of performance
under extreme electromagnetic conditions. Maximize the distance between
the scanner and other equipment, and use a dedicated power line, to avoid
interference to and from the scanner.
1.7.3 Peripheral Configurations

The correct connection of the computer and all
peripherals is necessary to maintain electrical
safety. The signal cable of the scanner is
intended only for connection to an approved
computer. Call LUNAR Support or your LUNAR
distributor before adding peripherals.
Note:
The scanner's output power strip can be used to supply the

Host PC with isolated power. If it is to be used the following
conditions must be met. If the conditions cannot be met, the
scanner's output power strip cannot be used.
Note:
See also Peripheral Block Diagrams - Section 2.2.3
1.7.4 Standard room configuration (system no. DF+12000 and

greater)
The computer, peripherals, and all other equipment must be located more
than 1.83 m from the scanner. Use an outlet strip to power the computer and
all peripherals. The outlet strip must be mounted off the floor so that it does
not touch other equipment. If your outlet strip was provided by LUNAR, it has
a maximum output of 15A, 120VAC. Only system-related equipment should
be powered by the outlet strip.
1-26 Safety
A modem and/or network connection can be made at any time if you are using
the standard room configuration.
1.7.5 Small room configuration (system no. DF+12000 and higher)

You must power the computer, peripherals, and all other equipment with an
isolating transformer if the room is too small to maintain at least 1.83 m of
separation between the scanner and all other equipment.
The isolation transformer supplied by LUNAR has a maximum output of 400/
500VA. Only system-related equipment should be powered by the isolation
transformer. Failure to use an isolation transformer can cause leakage
currents in excess of 100 microamperes.
A modem and/or network connection can only be made in the small room
configuration if all exposed metal surfaces of the computer and peripherals
are out of the patient environment.
1.7.6 Scanner power output configuration (system no. DF+11999

and lower)
LUNAR recommends that you use scanner power output to provide isolated
power to the computer and all peripherals. The power strip must be mounted
off the floor such that it does not touch other equipment. The computer and
ALL peripherals must be powered by the scanner. All other equipment must
not be powered by the scanner and must be located more than 1.83 m from
the scanner. Failure to use scanner power output can cause leakage currents
in excess of 100 microamperes.
If a network and/or modem connection is needed, refer to the wall outlet
configuration.
1.7.7 Wall outlet configuration (system no. DF+11999 and lower)

As an option to scanner power output, a wall outlet can be used to power the
computer and peripherals. Isolated power from the scanner must not be used
to power any equipment if a wall outlet is used. All exposed metal surfaces of
the computer, peripherals, and other equipment must be located more than
1.83 m from the scanner.
A network and/or modem connection can be made to the computer if power is
supplied from a wall outlet as described above.
Safety1-27
1-28 Safety
2 1
2 System Overview
Chapter 1:System Overview
This chapter provides an overview of the PRODIGY system.

In addition the chapter contains a brief discussion of major subsystems and illustrations of the PRODIGY power system.
This Chapter contains the PRODIGY Block Diagrams
2.0 PRODIGY System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
2.0.1 PRODIGY Electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
2.1 Electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
2.1.1 Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
2.1.2 Electronics Pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
2.1.3 Scan Arm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
2.1.4 Power specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
2.2 PRODIGY Block Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
2.2.1 PRODIGY I (System numbers DF+11999 and lower) Power
Distribution Block Diagram (AC entrance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
2.2.2 PRODIGY System Block Diagram PRODIGY I System Block
Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
2.2.3 PRODIGY I Peripheral Configuration Block Diagrams . . . 1-40
2.2.4 PRODIGY II System / Power Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . 1-41
2.3 PRODIGY Fusing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
2.4 PRODIGY I (system numbers DF+11999 and lower) Single Board
Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
2.4.1 SBC Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
2.4.2 SBC Reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
2.4.3 SBC / Host PC Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44
2.5 PRODIGY II Combined Single Board Controller (cSBC) (systems
DF+12000 and greater) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45
2.5.1 cSBC System Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45
2.5.2 cSBC Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46
2.5.3 TRANS / LONG MOTOR Control and Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50
2.5.4 AGS ROLL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-51
2.5.5 AGS DAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-51
2.5.6 SCANNER RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52
2.5.7 GE-LUNAR Model 7861 X-ray Generator Errors. . . . . . . . . . . 1-53
2.5.8 DC FAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-54
System Overview229
2.5.9 DCA / AGS / BIAS DAC's . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-54

2.5.10 KV/mA DAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55
2.5.11 ARC/FIL DAC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55
2.5.12 PEAK DAC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55
2.5.13 MAX PLD Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55
2.5.14 Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-56
2.5.15 MASTER RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-56
2.5.16 SUICIDE RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57
2.5.17 MISC OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57
2.5.18 MISC IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57
2.5.19 Stepper Motor Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-58
2.5.20 OMI Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-59
2.5.21 Patient Positioners. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-59
2.5.22 Limit Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-59
2.5.23 X-ray Source Control / Mechanical Interlocks . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-59
2.5.24 Shutter / Collimator Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-60
2.5.25 End of Exposure Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-60
2.5.26 Panel LED's . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-60
2.5.27 HVPS Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-60
2.5.28 ADC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-61
2.5.29 mA Low Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-61
2.5.30 Detector Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-61
2.5.31 Communications Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-62
2.5.32 Debug RS-232 Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-62
2.5.33 Diagnostic LED's . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-62
2.6 Power Distribution (PRODIGY II Systems DF+1200 and greater) . . 1-64
2.7 Tube Head and X-ray Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-65
2.7.1 X-ray generation and Spectrum. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-65
2.8 X-ray Generator (High Voltage Power Supply(ies)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-66
2.9 MAX Board (PRODIGY I systems DF+11999 and lower only) . . . . . 1-67
2.9.1 MAX Board Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-67
2.9.2 Dedicated +28VDC power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-67
2.10 XORB Board (PRODIGY I Systems DF+11999 and lower only). . . 1-68
2.11 Detector Sub System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-69
2.11.1 Detector Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-69
2.11.2 Detector Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-69
2.11.3 Detector Daughter Board Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-70
2.11.4 Detector Daughter Board Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-71
2.11.5 Detector Mother Board Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-72
2.11.6 Detector Mother Board Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-72
2.12 FOINK (PRODIGY I Systems DF+11999 and lower only) . . . . . . . 1-74
2.12.1 FOINK Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-74
2.12.2 Motion Control and Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-74
2.13 Display Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-75
2.14 Audible X-RAY OFF Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-77
2-30 System Overview
2.15 X-Ray Collimator Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-78

2.16 PRODIGY Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-79
2.16.1 Component specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-79
2.16.2 Functional specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-79
2.16.3 Maximum scan area (long x transverse) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-79
2.16.4 Programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-80
2.16.5 Environmental specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-80
2.16.6 Storage and transport environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-81
2.16.7 X-ray generator (system no. DF+12000 and higher). . . . 1-81
2.16.8 X-ray generator (system no. DF+11999 and lower) . . . . 1-83
2.16.9 GE-LUNAR 8022 x-ray tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-85
2.16.10 GE-LUNAR 8743 x-ray tube head assembly (system no.
DF+12000 and higher) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-86
2.16.11 LUNAR 6838 x-ray tube head assembly (system no.
DF+11999 and lower) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-87
2.16.12 Laser specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-88
2.16.13 Compatible components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-89
2.16.14 FDA Certified Components (USA Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-89
2.17 Secondary Calibration / Daily QA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-91
2.17.1 Secondary Calibration overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-91
2.17.2 Starting the Daily QA (secondary calibration) . . . . . . . . . 1-91
Peak Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-92
2.17.3 Tests Performed in the Secondary Calibration . . . . . . . . 1-92
2.17.4 QA Database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-94
Figure 2-9. PRODIGY System Exploded View of External Covers and
associated hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Figure 2-10. PRODIGY I NTC thermistor on the Primary Terminal Block1-35
Figure 2-11. PRODIGY I Power Distribution Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . 1-38
Figure 2-12. PRODIGY I (systems DF+11999 and lower) Block Diagram1-39
Figure 2-13. PRODIGY I (Systems DF+11999 and lower) Peripheral
Configuration Block Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
Figure 2-14. PRODIGY II System / Power Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41
Figure 2-15. Detector Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-69
Figure 2-16. Detector Daughter Board Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-71
Figure 2-17. PRODIGY Detector Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-73
Figure 2-18. PRODIGY display panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-75
Figure 2-19. Reference axis and target angles for tube head assembly 1-85
Figure 2-20. Anode heating/cooling curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-86
Figure 2-21. Cathode emission characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-88
Figure 2-22. X-ray tube assembly heating/cooling curves . . . . . . . . . . . 1-88
Figure 2-23. PRODIGY Daily QA printout with expected values . . . . . . 1-95
Table 2-1. PRODIGY I (Systems DF+11999 and lower) Fuses . . . . . . . 1-42
Table 2-2. PRODIGY II (systems DF+12000 and greater) Fuses. . . . . . 1-42
Table 2-3. PRODIGY Component Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-79
System Overview 2-31
Table 2-4. X-ray generator technical information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-81

Table 2-5. Table 4. X-ray generator technical information. . . . . . . . . . . . 1-83
Table 2-6. LUNAR 8022 X-ray tube technical information. . . . . . . . . . . . 1-85
Table 2-7. LUNAR 8743 x-ray tube assembly technical information. . . . 1-86
Table 2-8. LUNAR 6838 x-ray tube assembly technical information. . . . 1-87
Table 2-9. Laser specifications.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-88
Table 2-10. FDA certified components (system no. DF+12000 and higher).189
Table 2-11. FDA certified components (system no. DF+11999 and lower).1-90
2.0
PRODIGY System
The PRODIGY includes the patient table and frame, X-ray tube, X-ray
generator, detector, and arm. Its physical specifications are summarized in
section 2.15.
The PRODIGY has a mechanical design with two separate motion systems
that are capable of simultaneous operation. These are transverse, and
longitudinal. Both motion systems are driven by stepper motors.
2.0.1 PRODIGY Electronics

The internal components of the scanner are safely secured by a number of
panels, including the scanner's tabletop.
Figure 2-9. PRODIGY System Exploded View of External Covers and

associated hardware
The front and side panels are secured by screws from the inside.
The rear panel is secured by screws from the outside.
The table top is screwed down from the top.
Note:
Primary Service access to the electronics of the scanner is

through the table top.
The Detector electronics (in the scan arm) are secured by an upper and
lower shroud, held in place by screws.
Each metal panel is grounded to the electronics pan.
It is not usually necessary to remove the front and back panels for most
service needs. However, if access is needed to the Front and Rear
Longitudinal Carriages, these can be removed.
The back panel is secured by hex socket head-head screws and must be slid
out of the way, for it is between the Arm Column and the frame.
If access is needed to the detector, Transverse Limit Switches or the other
components mounted above in the arm, the covers of the arm must be
removed.
The upper scan arm shroud can be removed by loosening the two
screws holding it in place (on the back of the arm column) and tipping it
forward.
The lower cover is held in place by four screws, two in the front and two
in the back, be sure to remove the ground wire for the metal portion of
the lower cover as well
2.1
Electronics
2.1.1 Cautions
PRODIGY electronics are static sensitive,
take static control precautions before
servicing scanner circuitry.
PRODIGY I electronics use Negative Temperature Coefficient (NTC)

thermistors to limit the in rush current of the AC isolation transformer and the
Detector Mother Board. These devices have a high resistance when cold and
decrease in resistance when warm.
Figure 2-10. PRODIGY I NTC thermistor on the Primary Terminal Block

A cool down period of 30 seconds is required before power is turned on
on the system.
PRODIGY I ONLY: Failure to allow the
system to cool down may cause the
circuit breaker for the AC line to trip and /
or the + 12VDC for the Detector Mother
Board (DMB) will not come up to +12 VDC.
Note:
The error log entry "DMB Power Cycle observed" is an

indicator that the DC power to the Detector Mother Board has
been interrupted and the system should be powered down for
30 seconds to restore power to the Detector Mother Board.
PRODIGY I ONLY: The NTCs can get hot - they
are located on the AC terminal block and on the
DC terminal block be careful when servicing these
areas of the scanner.
2.1.2 Electronics Pan

The electronic components of the PRODIGY are mounted on the grounded

Electronics Pan which is horizontally fastened inside the frame.
Note:
Appendix 2 A contains a layout drawing of the Electronics Pan

for PRODIGY I and PRODIGY II systems.
PRODIGY I Systems (System numbers DF+11999 and lower):

There are four low-voltage linear DC power supplies (under 30VDC), and
two high-voltage DC power supplies (to supply 76kV to the x-ray tube) on
the pan.
In addition to the power supplies, the electronics mounting chassis holds
four printed circuit boards, a stepper motor controller, the audible alarm,
an AC entrance/line filter/fuse holder, an isolation transformer and a
terminal strip for AC power distribution to the Host PC and peripherals.
PRODIGY II Systems (System numbers DF+12000 and greater):

There is one low-voltage DC switching power supply (under 30VDC), and
one high-voltage DC power supply (x-ray generator - supplies 76kV to
the x-ray tube) on the pan.
In addition to the power supplies, the electronics mounting chassis holds
one printed circuit board, a stepper motor controller, and an AC entrance/
line filter/fuse holder.
2.1.3 Scan Arm

The scan arm contains one high-voltage power supply (1000VDC / +12
VDC input) is located in the upper arm near the X-ray detector and
provides power to the Detector Array.
The scan arm also houses the detector and 5 associated printed circuit
boards, and a stepper motor contoller.
2.1.4 Power specifications

Leakage current
Total System with Isolation Transformer: <100 microamperes.
Scanner Table alone: <100 microamperes.
Scanner input power
PRODIGY I ONLY: The scanner has 12 different nominal inputs: 100,
110, 115, 120, 125, 127, 200, 220, 230, 240, 250, and 254 VAC. During
installation, the scanner is configured for the nominal input which best
matches the voltage on site.
PRODIGY II ONLY: The scanner can accept any AC input between 100
and 254 VAC.
Voltage may fluctuate 10% from the nominal value without a loss of
scanner performance.
The nominal input (range of inputs) can be found on the system label.
The rated power input is 1500 VA.
The input power must meet IEEE 519-1992 for power quality and total
harmonic distortion (THD <5%).
Scanner output power (PRODIGY I system numbers DF+11999 and lower
only)
The scanner has 3 different nominal outputs: 100, 120, 240 VAC.
The nominal voltage output of the scanner is shown on the system label.
The computer and all peripherals which use the scanner output power
must be rated for this voltage.
The maximum power output is 400 VA.
2.2
PRODIGY Block Diagrams

The block diagrams for the PRODIGY system follow:
2.2.1 PRODIGY I (System numbers DF+11999 and lower) Power

Distribution Block Diagram (AC entrance)
Figure 2-11. PRODIGY I Power Distribution Block Diagram
2.2.2 PRODIGY System Block Diagram PRODIGY I System Block

Diagram
Figure 2-12. PRODIGY I (systems DF+11999 and lower) Block Diagram
2.2.3 PRODIGY I Peripheral Configuration Block Diagrams
Figure 2-13. PRODIGY I (Systems DF+11999 and lower) Peripheral

Configuration Block Diagrams
2.2.4 PRODIGY II System / Power Block Diagram
Figure 2-14. PRODIGY II System / Power Block Diagram
2.3
PRODIGY Fusing
PRODIGY I (system numbers DF+11999 and lower) Fuses
Fuse
Rating
Type*
F1 (Computer AC)
T 2.0 AL
5x20MM
F2 (Computer AC)
T 2.0 AL
5x20MM
F3 (+5, +/-12 VDC

PS (1))
T 1.25 AL
5x20MM
F4 (+5, +/-12 VDC

PS (2))
T 1.25 AL
5x20MM
F5 (+26VDC PS)
T 2.5 AL
5x20MM
F6 (+28VDC PS)
T 0.63 AL
5x20MM
F7 (+5, +/-12VDC
PS (1))
T 1.25 AL
5x20MM
F8 (+5, +/-12VDC
PS (2))
T 1.25 AL
5x20MM
F9 (+26 VDC PS)
T 2.5 AL
5x20MM
F10 (+28 VDC PS)
T 0.63 AL
5x20MM
MAX PCB F1
F 0.5 AL
1/4x1 1/4 in.
All fuses are 250V, low breaking capacity (25A minimum)

Table 2-1. PRODIGY I (Systems DF+11999 and lower) Fuses
PRODIGY II (systems DF+12000 and greater) Fuses
Fuse
Rating
Type
Condor PS
F1
F3.15 AH
5x20 mm
Condor PS
F2
F3.15 AH
5x20 mm
COndor PS
F3
F3.15 AH
5x20 mm
All fuses are 250V, low breaking capacity (25A minimum)

Table 2-2. PRODIGY II (systems DF+12000 and greater) Fuses
2.4 PRODIGY I (system numbers DF+11999 and

lower) Single Board Controller
2.4.1 SBC Functions
The microprocessor-based Single Board Controller (SBC) provides overall
operation and control of the scan table.
Control Functions
Control of x-ray source power supplies, and shutter / collimator in a fail
safe manner.
Provides control signals for two external stepper motor drives (Centent)
to scan patient in a fail safe manner and senses limit switch actuation at
the limits of travel (via FOINK see 2.11).
Controls the detector array (communicates with the Detector Mother
Board, section 2.10.2).
Responds to external scanner failure signals (interrupts generated by
SBC, FOINK see 2.11, and Detector Mother Board see 2.10).
Communication
Communicates with PC host via an optically isolated RS-422 interface.
Collects data from the detector array.
2.4.2 SBC Reset

All SBC circuitry resets when the microprocessor resets. This is done during
power up, and can also be done over the communication port (via the host),
through connections to other circuit boards (especially the Detector Mother
Board, as a fail-safe shutdown), the by pressing the reset button on the SBC,
by pressing the Emergency Stop Button on the arm, or when a fault is
detected by the SBC or the FOINK (section 2.11.1).
Error Conditions Sensed by the SBC:
Loss of Communications with the Detector Mother Board (DMB).
Loss of Communications with the Host PC.
Limit Switch tripped when shutter is open.
Limit Switch depressed when commands are being sent.
Failure in x-ray source kV programming
Interrupt sent by FOINK

The DMB will reset the SBC if it detects an error.
Error Conditions of the DMB sensed by the SBC:
PLD programming failure
Loss of +5 or +12 VDC
Loss of Communications with SBC
Corrupt FIRMWARE
FLASH RAM Failure
DTR Reset button on the DMB is pressed
2.4.3 SBC / Host PC Interface

The SBC communicates with the Host PC via an RS-422 interface. This is a
serial connection capable of transmitting more data than a standard RS-232
port. As it is not a standard serial port a RS-485 card must be installed into
one of the Host PCs expansion slots and the port must be configured correctly
for the PRODIGY to operate correctly (see DXPC2000 chapter 5 appendices).
2.5 PRODIGY II Combined Single Board Controller

(cSBC) (systems DF+12000 and greater)
The cSBC printed wiring board (PWB) is an eight layer rectangular board
measuring 7.400" x 8.100". The PWB is mounted in the via four mounting
holes located 1/4" from each corner and 2 additional interior mounting holes.
The components are primarily surface mount, with board connectors, headers
and a few single-style ICs being the only exceptions.
Four layers were dedicated for routing layers. Sensitive signals were noted
and routed manually and isolated from more powerful signals to reduce signal
interference and crosstalk on the same routing layer. The main power and
ground planes were stacked adjacently on the central inner layers to increase
inter-planar capacitance thus reducing ground bounce and power supply
noise. Traces on the top and bottom layers were kept as short as reasonably
possible and tapped down to an internal trace layer through vias.
Component placement is arranged to separate analog from digital circuitry.
Further isolation was achieved by segmenting the power and ground planes
into analog and digital sections and denying analog/digital plane overlap, thus
preventing digital noise from coupling into the analog section. All scanner
control I/O is run via connectors located on the +24V plane section. The +24V
plane is fully optically isolated from both the analog and digital plane areas to
prevent motor noise from coupling into the analog section, to prevent DC
switching noise from radiating on scanner cables, and to prevent ESD
presented at cable inputs from reaching the digital IC's.
2.5.1 cSBC System Architecture

The cSBC employs an Intel 80C251 micro-controller as its processor. This
processor provides 1K of on-board RAM and no on-board ROM. The
controller is clocked at 16 MHz using a crystal.
cSBC Memory Space

The cSBC is designed to support a JEDEC-standard, non-volatile FLASH
memory device up to 512K x 8 bits in size for code and fixed data. The board
supports either 128K or 512K SRAM memory device as needed for program
volatile memory. Complete address decoding is provided via the MAX PLD,
the CBSC bus master, allowing the address space to be arbitrary and
changed via the PLD code. The 80251 can address four 64K segments,
referred to as 0x00, 0x01, 0xFE and 0xFF as per Intel literature. The firmware
has the ability to map any FLASH or SRAM segment to any CPU segment via
SFRs in the MAX PLD.
FLASH RAM
At startup the CPU executes the boots code which programs the FLEX PLD
and then maps in either NT or Prodigy runtime firmware as appropriate based
on the most significant bit of the CCA REV register. To switch from boot code
to run code the firmware jumps to SRAM and executes a code snippet which
pages the boot code out of 0xFF and the desired firmware into 0xFF. The
snippet then jumps from SRAM back to 0xFF to execute the firmware. A boot
jumper, JP4 is provided to optionally force the CPU to remain in the boot
code. When the boot jumper is installed the boot code runs the host port at
115.2KB.
SRAM
The cSBC contains a single 128K x 8 bit SRAM which provides read/write
memory. The SRAM's segments are arbitrarily mapped to any CPU segment
by the CPU mapping registers.
2.5.2 cSBC Functions

The microprocessor-based Single Board Controller (cSBC) provides overall
operation and control of the scan table.
FLEX PLD Peripherals

The majority of scanner related programmable logic functionality is contained
in the FLEX PLD, an Altera EPF6024AQC208-3 device. Device programming
is handled exclusively by the CPU. On each cold boot the CPU reprograms
the FLEX devices from an image stored in it's FLASH. As such a firmware
download of a new FLEX image is required to permanently upgrade the PLD
code.
The functional components of the programmable logic are discussed in the
following subsections. Polarity of operation can be inferred from bit names
and use of preceding slash for inverted logic bits.
Note that ports A-F are reloaded with default values at time of CPU reset and
remain in the default state until SCANNER_RESET has been cleared and
new values are written by the firmware. Defaults for port F and all other
registers are invoked at power up only.
PORT A
Bit
Name
R/
W
Def.
Description
trans_enable
R/W
Transverse motor enable low blocks trans motor pulses and

forces Centent drive to standby current level.
/trans_fwd
R/W
Transverse motor direction control.
/shutter_open_ctrl
R/W
Shutter solenoid control.
trans_lsw_override
R/W
Transverse limit switch override prevent limit switch contact

from blocking step pulses at hardware level.
long_enable
R/W
Longitudinal motor enable low blocks trans motor pulses and

forces Centent drive to standby current level.
/long_fwd
R/W
Longitudinal motor direction control.
long_lsw_override
R/W
Longitudinal limit switch override prevent limit switch contact

from blocking step pulses at hardware level
/collimator_open_ctrl
R/W
Collimator solenoid control.
PORT B
Bit
Name
R/
W
Def.
Description
/trans_front_lsw
N/A
Transverse front limit switch position.
/trans_back_lsw
N/A
Transverse back limit switch position.
/long_foot_lsw
N/A
Longitudinal foot limit switch position.
/long_head_lsw
N/A
Longitudinal head limit switch position.
trans_count_eq[0]
N/A
Set when transverse step counter equals zero.
long_count_eq[0]
N/A
Set when longitudinal step counter equals zero.
/shutter_open_sense
N/A
Shutter limit switch position.
/collimator_open_sense
N/A
Collimator limit switch position.
PORT C
Bit
Name
R/
W
Def.
Description
/long_rev_pos
N/A
Patient positioner (joystick) input.
/long_fwd_pos
N/A
/trans_rev_pos
N/A
/trans_fwd_pos
N/A
/hvps_ac_relay
R/W
Enable AC power to X-ray HVPS.
/motor_fail_enable
R/W
Arm logic to shutdown scanner if OMI inputs not sensed.
ags_enable
R/W
Enable detector automatic gain control feedback circuit.
/motor_power
R/W
Enable 24VDC to the stepper motor drives (a.k.a. Centents).
PORT D
Bit
Name
R/
W
Def.
Description
flex_max_i/o_[0]
R/W
Output signal to MAX PLD (diagnostic use only).
flex_max_i/o_[1]
R/W
flex_max_i/o_[2]
R/W
flex_max_i/o_[3]
R/W
flex_diag_3
R/W
Firmware controlled diagnostic LED.
pit_enable
R/W
Enable Programmable Interval Timer output pulses.
flex_diag_1
R/W
/laser_on
R/W
Patient locator laser control.
PORT E
Bit
Name
R/
W
Def.
Description
low_range_dac
R/W
Switches mA DAC from 2.048V to 0.500V reference.
trans_motor_accel
R/W
Enables motor interrupt on every micro step.
low_range_adc
R/W
Switches ADC from 5.000V to 0.500V reference.
long_motor_accel
R/W
Enables motor interrupt on every micro step.
hvps_vendor_id
N/A
For 7681 supply, 0 = Spellman, 1 = Bertan.
iq_hvps
N/A
Set by resistor placement to indicate 0311/0312 supplies.
/hvps_enable_status
N/A
Enable status monitor from 7681 supply.
/power_up
N/A
Set to indicate cold boot.
PORT F
Bit
Name
R/
W
Def.
Description
/motion_fail_enable
R/W
Arm scanner shutdown if OMI pulses w/o step pulses.
long_motor_fail_axis
R/W
Motor fail circuitry axis control, clear for transverse.
/hvps_enable
R/W
Enable output to 7681 supply.
flex_diag_2
R/W
/arm_estop_sense
N/A
Emergency stop sense bit.
spare_jmp_[1]
N/A
Unused input, resistor or jumper selectable on CCA.
spare_jmp_[0]
N/A
Unused input, resistor or jumper selectable on CCA.
cpu_p1_2
N/A
PORT G
Bit
Name
R/
W
Def.
Description
adc_mux_[0]
R/W
ADC analog MUX input selection control bit.
adc_mux_[1]
R/W
adc_mux_[2]
R/W
adc_mux_[3]
R/W
adc_mux_enable
R/W
ADC MUX output enable control.
8ms_clock
R/W
Clock output provided to MAX PLD.
unused
N/A
N/A
For expansion.
unused
N/A
N/A
For expansion.
2.5.3 TRANS / LONG MOTOR Control and Status

Dual axis stepper motor control is provided entirely by the FLEX PLD. To
make a typical move the firmware loads a starting velocity into the 16 bit
VELOCITY register, the total number of steps for the move into the 16 bit
TARGET register, and step at which to next interrupt the CPU into the 16 bit
STEP register. Velocity is in terms of periods of the 2.0MHz fundamental clock
per micro step pulse to the stepper drive. The drives provide 10 micro steps
per full step. The firmware can track move status by reading the 16 bit READ
register.
As part of the setup for a move the host and/or firmware must enable the
motors via the /motor_power, trans_enable, and long_enable outputs and
setup the trans_lsw_override, long_lsw_override, /motion_fail_enable, /
motor_fail_enable, and long_motor_fail_axis outputs as desired. If the system
is in scanner reset for any reason the FLEX PLD will over-ride the /
motor_power output and prevent 24V power from reaching the motor drives.
Addressing for the motor control interface is provided below.
2.5.4 AGS ROLL

This is a read only 8 bit register which returns the count of AGS roll-over
events since the previous read of the register. The AGS roll counter is reset
on read only - it is not tied to the PIT's sample clock.
2.5.5 AGS DAC

This port provides R/W access to the AGS circuit's 8 bit U/D counter. The
counter is tied via a dedicated 8 bit bus to the AGS DAC. The DAC's analog
voltage is tied to the gain control input of the variable gain amplifier (VGA)
used to control gain of the detector input signal. As such the firmware can
read this counter to determine the current DAC voltage level and hence gain
level. If ags_enable is low this port gives the firmware direct control of the
AGS DAC as a parallel R/W device. If ags_enable is high, the firmware can
write to the port but the DAC will continue to respond to UP/DOWN requests
from the AGS DCA circuitry and hence quickly return to the AGS current
operating voltage.
HE/LE COUNTERS
These read only ports provide access to the 16 bit event counters which are
incremented each time the DCA circuitry detects an input pulse within the HE
or LE windows (as defined by the LEL, LEH, HEL, and HEH DAC settings).
These counters are read in two 8 bit bus cycles, MSB then LSB. The event
counters themselves consist of a counting element and a bus element. On the
rising edge on the PIT output pulse the counting elements are latched to the
bus element. The PIT output is also tied to CPU external INT 1 and as such
the firmware interrupt handler then has until the next rising PIT edge to read
the counters before the bus elements are latched over with the next sample
count and data is lost.
PIT MSB/LSB
The PLD provides a programmable interval timer (PIT) to the CPU. The PLD
prescales it's input clock to generate a PIT base clock of 100KHz. The CPU
writes a 2 byte word to the PIT reload register MSB/LSB. The CPU then raises
the pit_enable bit to start the timer. In response to the rising edge on the
pit_enable, the PIT loads the reload word into it's counting element and
begins counting down. When the count rolls under the PIT asserts /
SAMPLE_INT, reloads the counting element, and begins another count down
sequence. The /SAMPLE_INT line is tied internally to the HE and LE event
counters and causes a synchronous latch of both counting elements. The /
SAMPLE_INT line is also tied to the processor's 2nd external interrupt line, /
INT1. The CPU interrupt handler reads the latched event counters and ships
the data to the host.
2.5.6 SCANNER RESET

The scanner reset register is used to provide failsafe shutdown operation of
the scanner. A falling edge on any of the inputs to this register will latch the
current value of the register and drop the /SCAN_FAIL_ANY output. The MAX
PLD latches the master reset register and raises CPU_RESET in response to
the falling edge on /SCAN_FAIL_ANY. The MAX PLD also provides
SCANNER_RESET as the logical OR of CPU_RESET and!/
SCAN_FAIL_ANY. The FLEX PLD uses it's SCANNER_RESET input as the
enable bit to the tri-state buffers used to drive all safety critical output lines
including shutter control, HVPS relay control, motor relay control, etc. As such
the scanner is locked into a fail-safe mode whenever SCANNER_RESET is
asserted.
The MAX's master reset register will remain latched until the next rising edge
on the HOST_RTS input. When the cSBC is latched into reset by a scanner
error it will remain in CPU reset until the host drops the RTS line and reasserts it. It will remain in scanner reset until the CPU reads the scanner reset
register following the next raising edge of the RTS line at which the condition
causing the /SCAN_FAIL_ANY has been cleared. The firmware passes the
value of the reset registers to the host to allowing the host to display
appropriate error messages to the operator. The host will be unable to
perform any scanner related operations until the SCANNER_RESET has
been cleared. Red diagnostic LED's (see 2.5.33) are provided for both
scanner and CPU reset lines. The CPU reset line is tied to the host CTS
output such that the host sees a CTS event when the cSBC enters CPU reset.
The host code provides a CTS event handler which reads the reset registers
and prompts the user accordingly.
The firmware can also initiate a reset sequence in response to fatal error
conditions by writing a 'death code' to the suicide reset register. Resets can
also be initiated by the manual push button on the cSBC and by a low 5VDC
power condition as sensed by the MAX705 supervisor. The scanner register is
also latched at the end of read cycles such that current status can be
ascertained by a double read. A bit map of the scanner reset register is
provided below
Bit
Name
R/
W
Def.
Description
/
thermostat_open_sense
N/A
Tube head thermostat over temperature.
/external_estop_sense
N/A
Emergency stop input from external options block.
/dc_power_fail
N/A
Loss of one or more of +5VDC,+12VDC,-12VDC, or +24VDC.
/long_motor_fail
N/A
Motor failure detected on longitudinal axis.
/trans_motor_fail
N/A
Motor failure detected on transverse axis.
/dmb_error
N/A
DMB dropped its CTS indicating a DMB reset event.
/motion_fail
N/A
OMI pulses detected without step pulse (manual arm motion).
/watchdog_reset
N/A
Watchdog time-out indicates firmware crash.
2.5.7 GE-LUNAR Model 7861 X-ray Generator Errors

The HVPS error register is used to monitor the status of the 7681 X-ray
source HVPS. If the register value is not equal to 0xF when /hvps_enable is
low, the FLEX will raise the HVPS_ERROR_INT output to the MAX PLD. The
MAX PLD latches this into the IIR register and issues an interrupt to the CPU.
As such status of the HVPS is monitored when the unit is enabled. The
handler for HVPS interrupt reads this register to determine the cause of the
interrupt. The HVPS register is also latched at the end of read cycles such
that current status can be ascertained by a double read. A bit map of the
register is provided below.
Bit
Name
R/
W
Def.
Description
/hvps_error_0
N/A
Error code bit from 7681 supply.
/hvps_error_1
N/A
/hvps_error_2
N/A
hvps_enable_status
N/A
Set when /hvps_enable == /hvps_eanble_status
Unused
N/A
N/A
Expansion room.
Unused
N/A
N/A
Expansion room.
Unused
N/A
N/A
Expansion room.
Unused
N/A
N/A
Expansion room.
2.5.8 DC FAIL
The DC fail error register latches the status of the DC power monitors at the
time of reset. If scanner reset code indicates /dc_power_fail the firmware can
read this register to identify the specific DC source failure. The register is also
latched at the end of read cycles such that current status can be ascertained
by a double read.
Bit
Name
R/
W
Def.
Description
/plus_scanner_fail
N/A
Loss of +24V power input.
/plus_analog_fail
N/A
Loss of +12V power input.
/minus_analog_fail
N/A
Loss of -12V power input.
Unused
N/A
N/A
Expansion room.
Unused
N/A
N/A
Expansion room.
Unused
N/A
N/A
Expansion room.
Unused
N/A
N/A
Expansion room.
Unused
N/A
N/A
Expansion room.
2.5.9 DCA / AGS / BIAS DAC's

The cSBC uses a single 10 bit octal DAC, the Linear Technology LTC1660, to
generate the AGS and DAC window reference voltages and the bias program
voltage. The DAC utilizes a serial interface and as such is not accessed with a
traditional CPU write cycle. To load the device the firmware writes to the DAC
address listed above, in response to which the MAX drops the /CS line to the
device. The firmware then manipulates the local serial bus clock and data
lines to load the DAC setting. The desired DAC channel address in encoded
into the first 4 bits of the output data word. A read is then made to the DAC
address, in response to which the MAX raises the /CS line. See device data
sheet and analog section below for further DAC details.
2.5.10 KV/mA DAC

The cSBC uses a single 12 bit dual DAC, the Linear Technology LTC1454, to
generate the HVPS kV and mA program voltages. The DAC utilizes a serial
interface and as such is not accessed with a traditional CPU write cycle. To
load the device the firmware writes to the DAC address listed above, in
response to which the MAX drops the /CS line to the device. The firmware
then manipulates the local serial bus clock and data lines to load the DAC
setting. Both DAC channels must be written together, CHA (kV) first followed
by CHB (mA) in a 24 bit stream packet. A read is then made to the DAC
address, in response to which the MAX raises the /CS line. See device data
sheet and analog section below for further DAC details.
2.5.11 ARC/FIL DAC

The cSBC uses a single 10 bit dual DAC, the Linear Technology LTC1661, to
generate the HVPS filament limit and arc detect threshold voltages. The DAC
utilizes a serial interface and as such is not accessed with a traditional CPU
write cycle. To load the device the firmware writes to the DAC address listed
above, in response to which the MAX drops the /CS line to the device. The
firmware then manipulates the local serial bus clock and data lines to load the
DAC setting. The desired DAC channel address in encoded into the first 4 bits
of the output data word. A read is then made to the DAC address, in response
to which the MAX raises the /CS line. See device data sheet and analog
section below for further DAC details.
2.5.12 PEAK DAC

The cSBC uses a 12 bit DAC, the Linear Technology LTC8043, to generate
the detector peak gain voltage. The DAC utilizes a serial interface and as
such is not accessed with a traditional CPU write cycle. To load the device the
firmware manipulates the local serial bus clock and data lines to output load
the DAC setting and then performs a write/read cycle to the DAC address
listed above to pulse the DAC's load line low. See device data sheet and
analog section below for further DAC details.
2.5.13 MAX PLD Peripherals

The programmable logic section is based on an Altera MAX
EPM7128STC100-15 device. The configuration pins for this device are taken
to a JTAG style 10 pin header to allow for in-circuit programming of the device
from the Altera Byte-Blaster. The MAX device is FLASH based (non-volatile)
and is programmed at the time of CCA assembly. The functional components
of the programmable logic are discussed in the following subsections.
2.5.14 Interrupts
The CPU's interrupt capacity is effectively increased by running several
interrupt signals to a register in the MAX PLD and tying the register output to
the CPU external INT 0 input. The firmware interrupt handler for INT 0 then
reads this register to identify the source of the interrupt and handles it
accordingly. The firmware then writes a bit masked '1' back to the IIR to clear
the bit of the interrupt it has serviced (the R/C in the table stands for READ/
CLEAR).
Bit
Name
R/
W
Def.
Description
HOST_UART_INT
R/C
N/A
Host UART interrupt.
DEBUG_UART_INT
R/C
N/A
Debug UART interrupt.
DMB_UART_INT
R/C
N/A
DMB UART interrupt.
HVPS_ERROR_INT
R/C
N/A
HVPS error interrupt.
8mS_CLOCK
R/C
N/A
8ms clock tick interrupt from FLEX PLD.
POWER_FAIL_INT
R/C
N/A
Power down pending in 5ms interrupt from DC supply.
Unused
N/A
N/A
Expansion room.
Unused
N/A
N/A
Expansion room.
2.5.15 MASTER RESET

The master reset register will force a CPU and scanner reset condition on the
falling edge of any of its listed inputs. The contents of the register will be
latched at the time of reset such that when the CPU next comes out of reset
the firmware can read the register to determine what caused the preceding
reset and report the appropriate code to the host. If the reset was cause by
the CPU_RST_WR input, the suicide reset register contains the specific error
code. If the reset was cause by the /SCAN_FAIL_ANY input, the scanner
reset register contains the specific error code.
The CPU and scanner resets will remain latched until the next rising edge of
the RTS input. At this time the CPU reset will be cleared if /POWER_RESET
bit is not asserted and the scanner reset will be cleared if /SCAN_FAIL_ANY
is high.
Bit
Name
R/
W
Def.
Description
/POWER_RESET
N/A
MAX705 supervisor detects VCC < 4.65V.
/HOST_RTS
N/A
RTS reset request from host via comm line.
/MANUAL_RESET
N/A
Push button pressed.
Unused
N/A
Expansion room, reads as 1.
Unused
N/A
Unused
N/A
CPU_RST_WR
N/A
Write to the suicide register, read suicide reg for error code.
/SCAN_FAIL_ANY
N/A
Scanner reset register latched, read scanner reg for error code.
2.5.16 SUICIDE RESET

The CPU Reset SFR is a byte register into which the CPU can write a failure
code. In response to the write the MAX PLD will store the failure code and
assert the CPU_RESET line. The CPU_RESET line will be released on the
next rising edge of the host RTS, at which time the CPU will be able to read
the bit code from this SFR to determine the cause of the previous reset.
2.5.17 MISC OUT

The misc. output register is used to control the misc. output functions listed in
the following table.
Bit
Name
R/
W
Def.
Description
Unused
N/A
N/A
Expansion room.
MAX DIAG_2
R/W
DMB HWPT
R/W
Enable direct connect of host and DMB XCVRs, bypassing

UARTs, for maximized scan data bandwidth DMB to host.
RESET OVERRIDE
R/W
Enable override of CPU_RESET signal. Set to 1 on power-up such

that firmware can load the FLEX PLD at power-up regardless of
the host RTS state.
Unused
N/A
N/A
Expansion room.
Unused
N/A
N/A
Expansion room.
Unused
N/A
N/A
Expansion room.
Unused
N/A
N/A
Expansion room.
2.5.18 MISC IN
The misc. output register is used to control the misc input functions listed in
the following table
Bit
Name
R/
W
Def.
Description
BOOT JUMPER
N/A
JP4, placed to force firmware to remain in boot code.
CPU_P1_2
N/A
Input from CPU port 1, pin 2 (diagnostic use only).
Unused
N/A
N/A
Expansion room.
Unused
N/A
N/A
Expansion room.
Unused
N/A
N/A
Expansion room.
Unused
N/A
N/A
Expansion room.
Unused
N/A
N/A
Expansion room.
Unused
N/A
N/A
Expansion room.
2.5.19 Stepper Motor Control

The stepper motors use the same interface design as used on IQ and Prodigy.
The FET exhibits a lower voltage drop and hence provides more available
power at the drives for a given source voltage - essentially recovering the
voltage lost in dropping the DC supply from the 26V used on IQ/Prodigy to the
24V which is readily available in commercial switchers. Diodes are placed in
series on the Centent power lines to prevent back EMF generated when the
arm is moved manually from reaching the 24V planes and damaging the
cSBC. A dual FET circuit is used to minimize the voltage drop on the 24V
plane due to in-rush current when the motors are enabled. A circuit in the
FLEX implements a 2 stage turn on when the firmware lowers /motor_enable.
Q15 is enabled first to provide 24V to the Centents through R381 and R384,
thus limiting the in-rush current. After the current pulse has stabilized Q14 is
enabled to bypass the inrush limiting resistors. Q15 is then disabled and the
motors are at full power. An PTC is provided on the source of Q15 such that
the current limiting resistors will not be smoked if Q15 is inadvertently left
enabled.
2.5.20 OMI Input

The optical motion interrupt (OMI) sub-system connects to the transverse and
longitudinal OMI CCA's. The OMI CCA's are located on the far end (the gear
end farthest from the motor) of each drive axis. When the axis is in motion a
small toothed wheel spins through the OMI opto's beam and pulses are
sensed back on the cSBC. In this manner the system can sense a drive
circuit, motor, or belt failure which might otherwise result is a concentrated
exposure point during a patient scan. The OMI inputs are similar to those
used on the DPX-IQ. 74LS14's are added for hysteresis which provides a
clean direct interface to the PLD. As on Prodigy, logic in the FLEX PLD is
used to qualify the CH A and CH B inputs into a single 'valid motion' output.
Based on the phases of the square wave inputs on CH's A&B, the FLEX is
able to sense a change in direction. The circuit provides hysteresis to reject
false motion inputs resulting from scanner vibration when a wheel edge stops
in the center of the opto beam at the end of a move.
2.5.21 Patient Positioners

Four optically isolated inputs are provided for patient positioning. These are
used by the firmware to implement a joystick mode which is used in
conjunction with the laser to position the X-ray beam as desired over the
patient immediately prior to a scan. 74LS14 inverters are used to provide
hysteresis and isolate the FLEX PLD inputs from the slow rise times of the
opto output signals.
2.5.22 Limit Switches

Four optically isolated inputs are provided for limit switches. These are used
by the firmware to define the transverse and longitudinal table limits. 74LS14
inverters are used to provide hysteresis and isolate the FLEX PLD inputs from
the slow rise times of the opto output signals.
2.5.23 X-ray Source Control / Mechanical Interlocks

The cSBC is designed such that a high on the scanner reset net disables all
scanner functionality and assures a know, fail safe, state. All scanner control
outputs are driven by the FLEX PLD. The FLEX outputs drive the low side of a
PS2501 opto coupler emitter. The far side of all these opto circuits are
configured such that the opto has to be energized for the scanner function to
be active. As such the FLEX has to sink current to energize the opto and
activate the desired scanner function. Internally the FLEX code defines these
outputs as tri-state buffers, each of which has their enable line tied to the
scanner reset net. As such a scanner reset will force all these FLEX scanner
outputs to a high impedance state, de-energizing the opto's and disabling the
scanner.
The FLEX device is SRAM based and hence must be reprogrammed by the
CPU at power up. When the device is not programmed all I/O pins default to
the high impedance state. As such the scanner will also be in a fail safe state
when the FLEX is not programmed. The CPU port 1, pin 2 also runs directly to
the FLEX's ENABLE pin.
The cSBC provide a failsafe mechanism independent of the programmable

logic via the +5V_IO circuit. If one or more of either the E-stop, external Estop, or tube thermostat is open, the FET driving the +5V_IO net from the
+5VDC plane will be disabled. The +5V_IO net provides power to the emitter
anode of all opto's which drive critical scanner functions. As such the scanner
will enter a failsafe state in response to these mechanical interlocks, even in
the event of a PLD device failure. The +5V_IO FET will also be disabled by
either a HOST_RTS or CPU_RESET.
2.5.24 Shutter / Collimator Drive

The shutter and collimator solenoid drive circuits are the same as that used on
Prodigy I. The FLEX drives an isolation opto which in turn switches a pair of
FET's to control solenoid current. The first FET is used for an initial 'hard hit'
on open commands. It presents 24V directly to the solenoid for several
hundred msec's, resulting in a large initial current pulse to the solenoid. The
second FET provides the 'hold' current through a pair of current limiting power
resistors. The hold FET is tied directly to the /shutter_open_ctrl bit. Note that
the collimator drive is populated only for NT-A and IQ upgrades which use the
old style IQ collimator assembly. The nominal values of the power resistors is
changed between the NT and Prodigy II BOM's to support both the traditional
linear solenoid of IQ, and the rotary solenoid of Prodigy. A jumper or DNP'd
resistor is used to drive the IQ_SHUTTER line to the FLEX such that both
mechanical and optical shutter limit switches are supported.
2.5.25 End of Exposure Alarm

An on-board end of exposure alarm is provided. The alarm chosen is the
board mount equivalent of that used on Prodigy I.
2.5.26 Panel LED's

The 4 panel LED's, power on, X-ray on, source exposed, and laser on, are all
driven PS2501-2 opto's through 750R0 / 1W current limiting resistors.
2.5.27 HVPS Control

The HVPS analog control interface is designed to provide maximum
performance at minimum cost. A single, 16 channel multiplexed, 16 bit, high
accuracy, ADC is used in conjunction with several lower cost, lower bit
resolution DAC's. Absolute accuracy of DAC's is poor but errors are calibrated
out by the firmware which monitors the actual DAC output via the ADC. In this
scenario DAC integral non-linearity (INL) specs are not important, sufficient
differential non-linearity (DNL) is all that is required. Serial DAC's and ADC's
are chosen to conserve board space and simplify routing. Serial parts are
typically also lower cost as their maximum bandwidth is limited by the serial
baud rate.
The HVPS AC is enabled via a relay controlled by the cSBC. The line is
primarially used to disable the HVPS by removing the AC to the HVPS via the
relay. AC Power to the HVPS can be left on for up to one hour after
generation of x-rays to prevent AC cycling between concurrent scans.
A jumper and/or DNP'd resistor pad is provide to drive the IQ_HVPS line,
which the firmware reads to determine which HVPS it is intended to operate.
The PWB provides lemo style connector pads for use with the traditional 0311/
0312 HVPS and MAX CCA. For the 7681 HVPS the lemos are DNP'd and a
single DB-25 connector is used to control the HVPS. Tranzorb pads are
provide on the PWB and are expected to be populated only if deemed
necessary by EMC testing. An opto bank is also provided to support the digital
interface to the 7681. See Lunar dwg 7681-SPC for details.
2.5.28 ADC
The Burr Brown ADS8320 16 bit, serial, single channel ADC was chosen for
the cSBC for its high resolution, and excellent accuracy.
An Analog devices AD586 +5V voltage reference is used. The part was
selected for it low noise and high accuracy
Overall the ADC and reference give the cSBC +/-5mV analog accuracy 11.2
DAC's
A single LTC1454 12 bit, serial, dual channel, DAC is used to provide the kV
and mA program voltages. The part was chosen for it low cost, ready
availability at national distributors, and excellent DNL specifications. The DAC
is used in the x2 configuration such that the full scale output is twice the
reference voltage. Voltage outputs feed back to the ADC MUX such that
firmware can calibrate out DAC INL errors.
A single LTC1661 10 bit, serial, dual channel, DAC is used to provide the arc
threshold and filament current limit input voltages to the new 7681 HVPS. The
part was chosen for it low cost, ready availability at national distributors, and
reasonable DNL specifications. Voltage outputs are not fed back to the ADC
MUX as high accuracy is not required on these threshold inputs.
2.5.29 mA Low Range

To support future scan modes, an mA low range circuit is provided. The FLEX
PLD provides a control bit by which the firmware can switch the mA DAC
reference voltage from 2.048V to 0.5V, hence decreasing the LSB size, hence
allowing the firmware to take smaller voltage steps when ramping to low uA
settings. A second control bit is provided to switch the ADC from 5.0 to 0.5V
reference.
2.5.30 Detector Interface

The cSBC provides a RS-422 communications post to the Detector Mother
Board. The CSBC does not participate in any Detector data manipulation, all
analysis and Detector control is performed at the DMB.
2.5.31 Communications Ports

Host RS-422 Port
The host I/O port provides optical isolation per medical leakage requirements
of EN 60601-1-1, Annex BBB, section 7. QT's 6N136 opto's are used to
provide the required 115.2KB operational bandwidth and the required 2500
Vrms standoff at a reasonable price. Opto inputs and outputs are routed
through the MAX PLD to support the hardware pass though mode to the DMB.
A DB-9 female connector is provided on the host side of the isolation barrier.
RS-232 is supported by populating the XCVR U26. RS-422 is supported by
U21 and U37, the RS-422 XCVR's. A simple charge pump circuit is used to
generate +5V_ISO on the host side of the barrier. Prodigy II will populate the
RS-422 section and run at 115.2KB.
2.5.32 Debug RS-232 Port

The debug port is provided such that the firmware can echo status messages
and other information to a dumb terminal to support debugging, development,
testing, and servicing. The port is fully driven by a 16550 compatible UART is
fully connected to a DB-9 header using the standard PC comm port pinout.
The firmware can be configured to accept input from the debug port if
required. The port is expected to be depopulated in the final production BOM
to minimize cost.
2.5.33 Diagnostic LED's

16 diagnostic LED's are provided by the cSBC. Functionality is listed below
LE
D
Color
Function
Description (status indicated when lit)
D13
Green
+24V
+24V DC input from supply present.
D14
Green
+12V
D15
Green
-12V
-12V DC input from supply present.
D7
Green
+5V
D16
Red
FLEX CONFIG
FLEX PLD not programmed.
D20
Red
CPU RESET
CPU in reset mode.
D19
Red
SCANNER RESET
Scanner in reset (failsafe) mode.
D27
Red
AGS ROLL
AGS roll over or under detected.
D29
Amber
FLEX DIAG 1
Diagnostic LED for misc use by firmware, control reg in FLEX.
D31
Amber
FLEX DIAG 2
Diagnostic LED for misc use by firmware, control reg in FLEX.
D22
Amber
MAX DIAG 2
Diagnostic LED for misc use by firmware, control reg in MAX.
D28
Amber
TRANS OMI
Valid transverse motion sensed by OMI circuitry.
D22
Amber
LONG OMI
Valid longitudinal motion sensed by OMI circuitry.
D25
Amber
HE COUNT
Valid high energy photon event sensed by DCA circuitry.
D23
Amber
LE COUNT
Valid low energy photon event sensed by DCA circuitry.
D21
Amber
HVPS ENABLE
7681 HVPS enabled.
2.6 Power Distribution (PRODIGY II Systems

DF+1200 and greater)
The PRODIGY II system reduces scanner cost by using a single switching DC
power supply which provides +5,+/-12, and +24VDC. The supply is connected
directly to the cSBC via J14. J13 is provided as a power out connector to run
power to the DMB for Prodigy II. 0R0 bypass resistor are provided to allow
flexibility in grounding and filtering schemes. The PWB is divided into 4
ground plane regions - DGND for +5V digital returns, AGND for +/-12V analog
returns, SCNGND for +24V returns, and ISO_GND for the host I/O island.
Large zeners and rectifiers are provided for over-voltage and reverse-voltage
protection. Standard capacitor filter banks are provided. For EMC all cable
exits other than host and DMB I/O are located over the 24V planes. The 24V
plane is separated from the 5V plane via optical isolation to prevent 5V noise
from reaching cables (radiated EMC) and to prevent motor noise and ESD
pulses from reaching the digital and analog IC's. The 24V plane contains
primarily power FET switches and power resistors used to control scanner
motors, X-ray source, LED, etc. The +/-12V planes contain analog electronics
used for detector and HVPS control. A +12V regulator is used to produce
12VDC for the Centent drives of off +24VDC, maintaining isolation from the
+12V plane. An additional +5V regulator is used to make 5V for the OMI's of
off +12V motors. 4 opto channels are used to sense the presence of the 4 DC
input voltages. The opto outputs are used to drive 4 green power on indicator
LED's and to allow the CPU to detect power outs.
2.7
Tube Head and X-ray Insert

The Tube Head consists of an oil-filled metal housing which contains a fixedanode X-ray Insert (essentially a vacuum tube diode), lead-type shielding,
collimating devices, a filament transformer, electrical connectors, and a
Cerium (K-edge) filter.
THe X-ray generator provides a constant 76kV potential. mA control circuit
regulates the fialment current via filament temperature to amintain the
programmed current emission. The X-ray generator only provides mA
monitor and mA limiting. PRODIGY I systems (DF+11999 and lower) have
MAX CCA, PRODIGY II systems (DF+12000 and greater have mA control
internal to the x-ray generator.
2.7.1 X-ray generation and Spectrum

The X-ray Insert converts current into x-rays by accelerating the
electrons across a large potential from the cathode into a tungsten target
on the anode.
The x-rays produced by the x-ray insert are filtered by the cerium filter to
produce a dual energy spectrum. The x-ray spectrum has peaks at 62
and 38 kV.
Insert potential is provided by a/the High Voltage Power Supply(ies).
The tube current is set by the (c)SBC at 0.15 mA or 3.00 mA depending
on the acquisition type.
Tube Current is set by the (c)SBC and regulated by the MAX Board
(PRODIGY I) or the Power Supply (PRODIGY II systems).
2.8
X-ray Generator (High Voltage Power Supply(ies))

The PRODIGY X-ray production system combines a constant potential x-ray
generator (consisting of either one or two high voltage power supplies) and an
X-ray tube. The x-rya generator provides a continuous output of 38 kV each
and up to 5 mA (PRODIGY I) or 3.5 mA (PRODIGY II) to the X-ray tube. The
x-ray insert anode is composed of a tungsten alloy. The specifications of the
X-ray generation subsystem is outlined in section 2.16.7.
The High Voltage Power Supply(ies) provide the anode/cathode potential
to the X-ray insert.
PRODIGY I scanners use two high-voltage power supplies (40kVDC).
During normal operation, 76kVp is applied (+38kV at the anode and 38kV at the cathode).
PRODIGY II scanners use a single high-voltage power supply
(40kVDC). During normal operation, 76kVp is applied (+38kV at the
anode and -38kV at the cathode).
The High Voltage Power Supplies are controlled by the (c)SBC.
These power supplies are powered by the AC line voltage and have their
own built in fusing.
The AC power is routed thru the isolation transformer (PRODIGY I Only)
and the supply(ies) are enabled via a relay (see section 2.1.1).
2.9 MAX Board (PRODIGY I systems DF+11999 and

lower only)
2.9.1 MAX Board Function
The Tube Head and MAX Board work with the dedicated +28VDC power
supply to supply tube head current.
The current is set by the SBC (see section 2.4).
MAX board actually regulates current to the filament transformer in the
Tube Head.
2.9.2 Dedicated +28VDC power supply

The +28 VDC dedicated power supply is switched on (for fail-safe
purposes) by a solid-state relay.
When errors are detected by the SBC, (for example, loss of arm motion)
the relay will switch off and prevent production of x-rays.
2.10 XORB Board (PRODIGY I Systems DF+11999 and

lower only)
The XORB printed circuit board provides protection to various circuits (low
voltage) from transients within the HVPS and tube head (see 2.1.1 for
location).
There may be occasional static discharges within the Tube Head. The
transients caused by these static discharges (arcs) are shunted to
ground through the array of transorbs present on the XORB board.
There is no safety hazard to personnel, however, the electronics could be
damaged were no protection provided.
2.11 Detector Sub System

2.11.1 Detector Overview
16 individual CZT (cadmium zinc telluride) crystals which convert X-ray
energy directly to electrical charge
The charge pulse generated by the individual detectors is directly
proportional to the photon energy that generated the charge pulse (see
2.16.9 for spectrum information).
The array of 16 CZT crystals each act as pixel detectors, from which the
data is combined to form the densitometry data set.
The Detector electronics amplify, discriminate and counts x-rays for all 16
detector elements.
The detector communicates with the SBC.
The Detector has 5 PCB associated with it, the Detector Mother Board
(DMB) and 4 identical Detector Daughter Boards (DDBs).
The detector has its own dedicated High Voltage Power Supply, used for
supplying detector bias.
2.11.2 Detector Operation
Figure 2-15. Detector Block Diagram
The Detector is held at 450 VDC bias. When a X-ray strikes the detector an
electron pair is created (small black arrows in the block diagram). This charge
pair induces a small amount of current in the CZT crystal.
A charge sensitive pre-amp then converts the current to voltage and passes
the signal along to the Detector Daughter Board for processing and analysis.
The signal out of the pre-amp is a +5 to +10 millivolt DC signal, each event on
each channel creates a small blip.
2.11.3 Detector Daughter Board Overview

Each DDB processes the data from 4 of the 16 detector elements
simultaneously.
Each detector element is handled as a separate channel.
Each DDB is responsible for:
Pulse Shaping
Gain Adjust
Energy discrimination (high or low energy)
Event counting
Each DDB is electronically identical
Figure 2-16. Detector Daughter Board Operation
2.11.4 Detector Daughter Board Operation

Gain Stage / Pulse Shaping
The Detector Daughter Board takes the +5 to 10 millivolt signal, strips off the
DC offset and shapes the pulse into a bi-polar pulse. This signal is further
amplified to 2.4 VDC and is then fed to a bank of 4 pairs of comparators.
The four fine gain control comparators are set up in two windows around the
High Energy signal. If the signal falls into the lower window a signal is sent to
the programmable logic (PLD). The PLD then sends an amplify signal to a
DAC which in turn increases gain slightly at the pulse shaping amplifier, so
that the High Energy Signal is +2.4 VDC. If the High Energy signal falls into
the upper window, the fine gain is adjusted down slightly by the same
mechanism at the pulse shaping amplifier, again so that the High Energy
Signal is + 2.4 VDC.
The fine gain adjust is applied to the entire signal on a particular channel at
the pulse shaping amplifier, therefore the Low Energy Signals gain is
adjusted along with the High Energy Signal.
The 4 comparators of the Gain Stage are set by digital to analog converters
(DACs) which use reference values stored in the Flash RAM of the Detector
Mother Board.
Energy Discrimination and Pulse Counting
The amplified and gain adjusted pulse is simultaneously fed to a second bank
of 4 comparators which are divided again into two sets of windows. The
windows of the Discrimination stage are centered around the High and Low
Energy pulses. These comparators are also set by DACs which are set by the
DMB Flash RAM.
Each time a pulse falls into the High Energy window, a counter in the
programmable logic (PLD) is ticked, the same happens for the Low Energy
window. These two data signals are then passed to the DMB, which transmits
the data to the SBC.
2.11.5 Detector Mother Board Overview

Contains 4 slots for the DDBs (see figure 2-9)
Contains a slot for the Test Point Board (part of the PRODIGY tool kit see
figure 2-9)
The Detector Mother Board provides +5 V, 12 V plus digital and analog
grounds to the Detector Daughter Boards.
The Detector Mother Board communicates with the SBC via RS-422 link.
The patient positioning laser is controlled by the SBC via the DMB (See
figure 2-9).
2.11.6 Detector Mother Board Operation

The Detector Mother Board (DMB) contains a processor and Flash RAM,
which supplies programming data to the detector subsystem. The data for all
comparator settings is stored here (set values), detector Bias programming
data, firmware to program the PLDs of the 4 DDBs, the Peak value
calculation operation for the detector (see section 2.17 for a discussion of the
Secondary Calibration (QA)).
If the Flash RAM is corrupt, the DMB will read from the Firmware on the SBC.
The Flash RAM can be reprogrammed from the Host / SBC.
The DMB has a processor, which is responsible for performing the Peak
calculation during a Secondary Calibration (QA), programming the 4 DDB
PLDs and handles all communications with the SBC. The DMB processor
sends the SBC status reports and echoes back all commands that are sent to
it.
The DMB will reset the SBC if it detects an error.
Error Conditions of the DMB sensed by the SBC:
PLD programming failure
Loss of +5 or +12 VDC
Loss of Communications with SBC
Corrupt FIRMWARE
FLASH RAM Failure
DTR Reset button on the DMB is pressed
Figure 2-17. PRODIGY Detector Module

1 = Test Point Board, 2 = Detector Daughter Boards (4), 3 = Patient Positioning laser and
Detector Mother Board Interface, The Detector Mother Board is the horizontal circuit board
that the DMBs and Test Point Board are plugged into.
2.12 FOINK (PRODIGY I Systems DF+11999 and lower

only)
2.12.1 FOINK Functions
The FOINK Board optically isolates control circuitry (SBC) from the rest
of the scanners electronics (see pan layout Appendix 2B).
Shutter solenoid
Scanner Motor Controllers
Display Panel indicators and controls
Monitors 5 different interrupts, all of which are capable of resetting the
SBC (shutting down x-ray production)
Emergency Stop Switch - open circuit - (loss of signal - failsafe)
Tube Head Thermocouple - circuit open (loss of signal - failsafe)
Longitudinal Motion Interrupt - source open no movement (OMI)
Transverse Motion Interrupt - source open no movement (OMI)
Failure of the +28 VDC Power Supply
2.12.2 Motion Control and Detection

Motor pulses, RUN/HOLD signals and direction are generated by the
SBC.
The RUN/HOLD signals are optically isolated on the FOINK board before
being sent to the Centent motor drivers. The Centents supply current to
the stepper motor windings.
Both the transverse and longitudinal drive systems have slotted disks
attached which pass through optical interrupters (OMI) for motion
detection. Should motion stop during patient scanning, the FOINK sends
an interrupt to the SBC, which is reset and x-ray production is halted.
Limit switches at each end of the scanner and each end of the arm signal
the SBC whenever motion reaches either end or side of the scanner. If a
limit switch is tripped during a patient scan, the motor associated with the
tripped limit switch is halted, the SBC is reset and the shutter is closed.
There is a dedicated DC power supply for the motion control circuitry,
supplying +26VDC. The +26VDC ground is isolated from the logic
ground to reduce noise (see section 2.1.1 for location)
2.13 Display Panel

The Display Panel of the PRODIGY, located on the front face of the
upper arm, is the main operator interface outside the host computer.
Figure 2-18. PRODIGY display panel

Four indicators display system status.
A green Light Emitting Diode (LED) indicates a power-on condition; it
lights when the +26VDC power supply comes on.
Power on LED is lit whenever scan table power is on.
A yellow LED indicates if the laser is on
The laser on LED is lit when the SBC signals the DMB to turn
the laser on, the LED is switched on by the DMB.
An amber X-ray On LED indicates that x-rays are being produced
(current is flowing through the X-ray Insert), though exposure is not
necessarily taking place.
The X-ray on LED is lit when more than X current is flowing
through the X-ray insert.
The yellow Shutter Open LED comes on is the Shutter open and
exposure possible.
The Shutter open LED is controlled by the SBC, the SBC will
allow the shutter to open even if the lamp is not lit (shutter
open indicator is also on the PC controller screen).
Note:
It is not recommended that scanner operation be continued if

These LED's signal the operator of exposure to x-rays and
must be replaced as soon as possible.
Rocker switches on the panel allow operator control of the beam

position.
The Rocker switches are enabled by the SBC via the FOINK.
Note:
The rocker switches are also referred to as the joystick in the

PRODIGY Service Manual and the PRODIGY Service
Software.
The Emergency stop button (red), is to be used only in emergency

situations; it resets the (c)SBC and halts x-ray production.
The FOINK or cSBC detects if this normally closed circuit is
opened (fail-safe operation).
2.14 Audible X-RAY OFF Signal

An audible signal notifies the operator that there is a safe condition
when the Shutter is closed.
The FOINK or cSBC board senses the closure of the Shutter or the
cessation of current through the X-ray Insert (+28VDC Power Supply or
Model 7861 HVPS) and switches on the audible signal if either of these
occur during an exposure.
2.15 X-Ray Collimator Subsystem

The Shutter is actuated by a rotary solenoid using +26 VDC, the voltage
is reduced to a holding voltage of 12VDC after the shutter is opened.
This solenoid is controlled by signals generated on the SBC, and
optically isolated through the FOINK board on PRODIGY I systems.
An optical interrupter (OMI) detects the shutter open condition and
reports shutter position information back to the (c)SBC.
This assembly is located on top of the X-ray Tube Head.
2.16 PRODIGY Specifications

2.16.1 Component specifications
Table 2-3 gives specifications for standard components shipped with the
PRODIGY system.
Table 2-3. PRODIGY Component Specifications
Component
Specifications
Scanner table*
Dimensions: 262.3 cm x 109.3 cm x 128.3 cm

Weight: approximately 272.16 kg
Maximum patient weight supported: 136 kg
Console table
78.5 cm x 63.3 cm x 48.1 cm
Computer
Greater than 266Mhz Pentium

128 MB RAM
Greater than 1GB hard disk
17 SVGA monitor (800x600x16-bit color)
LS-120 Super drive
CD ROM
Modem
Windows NT version 4.0 operating system with service

pack 6
Internet Explorer version 4.01 with service pack 2
Fast Serial I/O board (LUNAR part number 7151)
Printer
HP DeskJet 930C
W x D x H44.0 x 40.0 x 19.6 cm
*Depth is measured from the front edge of the scanner table to the back edge of the
scanner arm. Height is measured from the top of the scanner arm to the bottom of the
scanner arm.
*Width is measured from the front edge of the scanner table to the back edge of the
scanner arm. Height is measured from the top of the scanner arm to the bottom of the
scanner arm.
#Some languages may require 1024x768x16-bit color to fit the translated software text
on the screen
@GE-LUNAR Recommends Diskeeper Lite (Executive Software - http://
www.execsoft.com - Glendale, California, USA)
2.16.2 Functional specifications

General specifications
Focal spot to image receptor distance is 67 cm. Attenuation equivalence of
patient support table is 0.7 mm Al.
2.16.3 Maximum scan area (long x transverse)

AP Spine Measurements
40.3 cm x 18 cm
Femur Measurements
20.2 cm x 18 cm
Dual Femur Measurements
20.2 cm x 18 cm (each femur - two scan areas)
Total Body Measurements
197.5 cm x 60 cm measurement field
2.16.4 Programs
Note:
Depending on the number of options purchased, not all of the

options listed below may be included with the PRODIGY
system software:
AP spine measurement and analysis

Femur measurement and analysis
Total Body measurement and analysis.
Forearm measurement and analysis
Lateral spine measurement and analysis
Quality Assurance
2.16.5 Environmental specifications

Operational environment
Adhere to the specifications that follow during scanner operation:
Ambient Space (Interior Subcomponents)For scanner operation
and servicing, do not block the area around the scanner table. Make sure
there is a minimum clearance of 30.5 cm at the head and foot ends of the
scanner table, at least 15.2 cm for the arm side, and 45.7 cm for the
operator side.
Ambient Space (Ventilation)Do not block the cooling vents on the
computer and scanner table. Make sure there is 15.2 cm from the
console table to the wall for cable clearance and computer plugs.
Dust, Fumes and DebrisInstall the system in a clean, ventilated area.
Dust and other airborne debris can cause the diskette drive heads and
other sensitive mechanical components to malfunction. GE-LUNAR
recommends that smoking is not permitted in the scanner room.
HumidityMake sure the humidity for the scanner area is 20%80%,

non-condensing.
Static ElectricityInstall and operate the system in a static-free area.
Adhere to minimum humidity requirements to prevent malfunctions
caused by static electricity.
Shock and VibrationMake sure the scanner table does not receive
shock greater than 1 G for more than 1 millisecond. Make sure the
scanner table does not receive vibrations greater than 0.25 G at 5 Hz.
TemperatureMake sure the temperature during system operation is
65F81F (18C27C).
Note:
When the system is turned off, or there is a power failure,

allow the system to be on and let it warm for one hour. After
one hour, complete a Quality Assurance procedure.
2.16.6 Storage and transport environment

Adhere to the specifications that follow for scanner storage and
transportation:
Humidity, 0% to 95% non-condensing.
Atmospheric pressure, 500 to 1060 hPa.
Temperature, -40 to 70 C.
2.16.7 X-ray generator (system no. DF+12000 and higher)

Table 2-4. X-ray generator technical information.
Classification
Class I Equipment
IEC 601-2-7 5.1
Degree of protection against electrical

shock
Type B equipment
IEC 601-2-7 5.2
Protection against ingress of liquids
Ordinary medical electrical equipment
IEC 601-2-7 5.3
Connection to supply mains
Power supply cord
IEC 601-2-7 6.1g)
Mode of operation
Continuous
IEC 601-2-7 6.1m)
Maximum X-ray tube voltage
76 kV
IEC 601-2-7 6.1m)
Maximum X-ray tube current
3 mA
IEC 601-2-7 6.1m)
Rated mains voltage
100-240 VAC
IEC 601-2-7 6.1j)1
Number of phases in mains
IEC 601-2-7 6.1j)2
Mains frequency
50/60 Hertz
IEC 601-2-7 6.1j)3
Required over-current releases
15 Amp dedicated service
IEC 601-2-7 6.1j)5
Heat dissipative components
X-ray tube dissipates 243W max.

into surrounding air through forced
air convection. Flow rate: 36 m3/h
(approx.) Temp. rise of air stream
25 C (approx.)
IEC 601-2-7 6.1t)
Allowable high voltage supplies
Spellman SBD40PN280X2890 or
Bertan 2907.
IEC 601-2-7 6.8.1

and 50.2.101-102
Allowable tube head assemblies
LUNAR model 8743 or equivalent
IEC 601-2-7 6.8.1

and 50.2.101-102
Original language of accompanying documents
English
IEC 601-2-7 6.8.1
Maximum continuous kV, mA at nominal

rated kV
76 kV, 3 mA
IEC 601-2-7 6.8.2

1)
Maximum intermittent kV, mA at nominal

rated kV
76 kV, 3 mA
IEC 601-2-7 6.8.2

1)
Maximum continuous kV, mA at maximum

mA
76 kV, 3 mA
IEC 601-2-7 6.8.2

2)
Maximum intermittent kV, mA at maximum

mA
76 kV, 3 mA
IEC 601-2-7 6.8.2

2)
Continuous kV, mA for maximum electric

output power
76 kV, 3 mA
IEC 601-2-7 6.8.2

3)
Intermittent kV, mA for maximum electric

output power
76 kV, 3 mA
IEC 601-2-7 6.8.2

3)
Nominal electric power
0.243 kW
IEC 601-2-7 6.8.2

4)
Lowest current time product
0.20 mAs. Parameters: 76 kV, 0.10

mA,
2 seconds.
IEC 601-2-7 6.8.2

5)
Nominal shortest irradiation times
2 seconds.
IEC 601-2-7 6.8.2

6)
Method of x-ray tube voltage measurement
Voltage divider in high voltage

power
supply.
IEC 601-2-7
50.106.1
Method of x-ray tube current measurement
Shunt resistor in high voltage supply

return line.
IEC 601-2-7
50.106.2
X-ray tube assembly reference axis
Line normal to the tube port, centered

on tube port as shown in Figure 4.
IEC 601-2-7
6.1j)5) 50.107.1
Reference loading conditions
8.21 x 105 Joules, 3 mA, 76 kV for 1

hour.
IEC 601-1-3
29.204.2
Focal spot to Image Receptor distance
67 cm
IEC 601-1-3
29.203.2
Attenuation equivalence of patient support

table.
0.7 mm Al
IEC 601-1-3
29.206.2
2.16.8 X-ray generator (system no. DF+11999 and lower)

Table 2-5. Table 4. X-ray generator technical information.
Classification
Class I Equipment
IEC 601-2-7 5.1
Degree of protection against electrical

shock
Type B equipment
IEC 601-2-7 5.2
Protection against ingress of liquids
Ordinary medical electrical equipment
IEC 601-2-7 5.3
Connection to supply mains
Power supply cord
IEC 601-2-7 6.1g)
Mode of operation
Continuous
IEC 601-2-7 6.1m)
Maximum X-ray tube voltage
76 kV
IEC 601-2-7 6.1m)
Maximum X-ray tube current
5 mA
IEC 601-2-7 6.1m)
Rated mains voltage
100, 110, 115, 120, 125, 127, 200,

220, 230, 240, 250, and 254 volts
IEC 601-2-7 6.1j)1
Number of phases in mains
IEC 601-2-7 6.1j)2
Mains frequency
50/60 Hertz
IEC 601-2-7 6.1j)3
Required over-current releases
20 Amp dedicated service
IEC 601-2-7 6.1j)5
Heat dissipative components
X-ray tube dissipates 305W max.

into surrounding air through forced
air convection. Flow rate: 36 m3/h
(approx.) Temp. rise of air stream
25 C (approx.)
IEC 601-2-7 6.1t)
Allowable high voltage supplies
Spellman X2112/X2113/ rev. K and

higher. Bertan 2411P and 2411N
rev. A and
IEC 601-2-7 6.8.1

and 50.2.101-102
higher. LUNAR p/n 0311 and 0312.
Allowable tube head assemblies
LUNAR model 6838 or equivalent
IEC 601-2-7 6.8.1

and 50.2.101-102
Original language of accompanying documents
English
IEC 601-2-7 6.8.1
Maximum continuous kV, mA at nominal

rated kV
76 kV, 4 mA
IEC 601-2-7 6.8.2

1)

kV
76 kV, 5 mA
IEC 601-2-7 6.8.2

1)
Maximum continuous kV, mA at maximum

mA
61 kV, 5 mA
IEC 601-2-7 6.8.2

2)

mA
76 kV, 5 mA
IEC 601-2-7 6.8.2

2)
Continuous kV, mA for maximum electric

output power
76 kV, 4 mA
IEC 601-2-7 6.8.2

3)
Intermittent kV, mA for maximum electric

output power
76 kV, 5 mA
IEC 601-2-7 6.8.2

3)
Nominal electric power
0.4 kW
IEC 601-2-7 6.8.2

4)
Reference current time product
7.89 mAs. Parameters: 76 kV, 2.63

mA,
3 seconds.
IEC 601-2-7 6.8.2

5)
Nominal shortest irradiation times
3 seconds.
IEC 601-2-7 6.8.2

8)
Repetition rate for loading during tests
No specific wait period was

imposed.
Time between tests was approximately
20 seconds.
IEC 601-2-7
50.104.4
Method of x-ray tube voltage measurement
Voltage divider in high voltage

power supply.
IEC 601-2-7
50.106.1
Method of x-ray tube current measurement
Shunt resistor in high voltage supply

return line.
IEC 601-2-7
50.106.2
X-ray tube assembly reference axis
Line normal to the tube port, centered

on tube port as shown in Figure 4.
IEC 601-2-7
6.1j)5) 50.107.1
Reference loading conditions
1.09 x 106 Joules, 4 mA, 76 kV for 1

hour.
IEC 601-1-3
Leakage radiation was measured at the

following loading factors.
3mA, 76 kV
IEC 601-1-3
Focal spot to Image Receptor distance
67 cm
IEC 601-1-3
Attenuation equivalence of patient

support table.
0.7 mm Al
IEC 601-1-3
Figure 2-19. Reference axis and target angles for tube head assembly
2.16.9 GE-LUNAR 8022 x-ray tube

Table 2-6. LUNAR 8022 X-ray tube technical information.
Nominal anode input power
361 Watts
IEC 613/1989
Maximum anode heat content
6000 Joules
IEC 613/1989
Anode heating and cooling curves
Refer to figure 5.
IEC 613/1989
Anode target material
Tungsten
IEC 601-2-28
Reference axis
Refer to figure 4.
IEC 601-2-28
Target angle
78 (reference to normal)
IEC 601-2-28
Nominal focal spot values
0.5
IEC 336/1982
Maximum useful voltage
95 kVp
Not Applicable
Maximum filament current
2.2 Amperes
Not Applicable
Figure 2-20. Anode heating/cooling curves
2.16.10 GE-LUNAR 8743 x-ray tube head assembly (system no.

DF+12000 and higher)
Beam filtration is permanently fixed with a minimum 2.9 mm Aluminumequivalent.
Table 2-7. LUNAR 8743 x-ray tube assembly technical information.
Inherent filtration
>2.9 mm Al/70 kV
IEC 522/
1976
Filament characteristics
Refer to Figure 6.
IEC 613/
1989
Nominal x-ray tube voltage
76 kV - Anode to Cathode
38 kV - Anode to Earth
38 kV - Cathode to Earth
IEC 613/
1989
Single load rating
228 W (3 mA, 76 kV) for up to 15 min.
IEC 613/
1989
Serial load rating
228 W (3 mA, 76 kV) for up to 15 min.

with a
5 min. cool down time between measurements.
IEC 613/
1989
Maximum x-ray tube assembly heat content
260 Kjoules
IEC 613/
1989
X-ray tube assembly heating and cooling

curves
Refer to Figure 7.
IEC 613/
1989
Maximum continuous heat dissipation
243 Watts (3mA x 76kV + 15W filament)
IEC 613/
1989
Maximum symmetrical radiation field
3.5 mm/19.4 mm at a distance from

the focal spot of 220 mm.
IEC 806/
1984
Dimensions
17 cm x 19.4 cm x 11 cm
IEC 601-228
Weight
8.6 kg
IEC 601-228
2.16.11 LUNAR 6838 x-ray tube head assembly (system no.

DF+11999 and lower)
Beam filtration is permanently fixed with a minimum 2.9 mm Aluminumequivalent.
Note:
Beam quality has a minimum first half-value layer of 3.2 mm of

Al at 76 kV.
Table 2-8. LUNAR 6838 x-ray tube assembly technical information.

Inherent filtration
>2.9 mm Al/70 kV
IEC 522/1976
Filament characteristics
Refer to Figure 6.
IEC 613/1989
Nominal x-ray tube voltage
76 kV - Anode to Cathode
38 kV - Anode to Earth
38 kV - Cathode to Earth
IEC 613/1989
Single load rating
361 W (4.75 mA, 76 kV) for up to 4

min.,
59 sec.
IEC 613/1989
Serial load rating
361 W (4.75 mA, 76 kV) for up to 4

min.,
59 sec. with a 10 min. cool down
time between measurements.
IEC 613/1989
Maximum x-ray tube assembly heat content
260 kJoules
IEC 613/1989
X-ray tube assembly heating and cooling

curves
Refer to Figure 7.
IEC 613/1989
Maximum continuous heat dissipation
361 Watts
IEC 613/1989
Maximum symmetrical radiation field
3.5 mm/19.4 mm at a distance from

the focal spot of 220 mm.
IEC 806/1984
Dimensions
17 cm x 19.4 cm x 11 cm
IEC 601-2-28
Weight
8.6 kg
IEC 601-2-28
Figure 2-21. Cathode emission characteristics
Figure 2-22. X-ray tube assembly heating/cooling curves
2.16.12 Laser specifications

Table 3-9 gives the specifications for the GE-LUNAR laser.
Table 2-9. Laser specifications.
Output Power
<1mW
Wavelength
635nm
Beam Diameter at
aperture
4x1mm
Aspect Ratio
4.0 to 1
Divergence
24 degrees
Table 2-9. Laser specifications. (continued)

Radiant Exposure
0.0001 W
Integrated Radiance
46 W
Current Draw
105 mA
Voltage Input
4-6 VDC
Safety Rating
Class II
2.16.13 Compatible components

For customers located internationally, make sure the computer is certified to
local requirements. The computer must meet the minimum requirements that
follow:
Greater than 266MHz Pentium
128 MB RAM
Greater than 1GB Hard Disk
8X CD ROM
14 SVGA monitor with at least 800x600x16-bit color
Windows NT version 4.0 operating system with service pack
Internet Explorer version 4.01 with service pack 2
2.16.14 FDA Certified Components (USA Only)

Tables 2-9 and 2-10 list components certified to the FDA for use with
PRODIGY scanners and is updated periodically. Contact GE-LUNAR for a
current listing of compatible components.
Table 2-10. FDA certified components (system no. DF+12000 and higher).
1
2
Component
Description
LUNAR Model
#
X-ray Controller
LUNAR single board controller
7635
High Voltage Power

Supplies
Bertan1 Model: 2907

Spellman2 Model:
SBD40PN280X2890
7681
7681
Tube Head Assembly
LUNAR X-Ray Tube Head Assembly
8743
Collimator
LUNAR PRODIGY Collimator Assembly
8915
Bertan High Voltage Corp., 121 New South Road, Hicksville, NY

Spellman High Voltage Electronics Corp., 475 Wireless Boulevard, Hauppauge, NY
Table 2-11. FDA certified components (system no. DF+11999 and lower).
Component
Description
LUNAR Model #
X-ray Controller
LUNAR PRODIGY single board controller
5447
High Voltage Power

Supplies
Spellman1 Models:
PTV40N200X2113
PTV40P200X2112
0311
0312
Bertan2 Models:
2411 N
2411 P
0311
0312
Tube Head Assembly
LUNAR X-Ray Tube Head Assembly
6838
Collimator
LUNAR PRODIGY Collimator Assembly
6893
1
2
Spellman High Voltage Electronics Corporation Hauppauge, NY

Bertan Associates, 121 New South Road, Hicksville, NY
2.17 Secondary Calibration / Daily QA

2.17.1 Secondary Calibration overview
Daily QA (Quality Assurance) tests the integrity of the scanner so
operator knows it is operating within specifications.
Daily QA (Secondary Calibration) adjusts the calibration of the scanner to
offset any changes due to the tube aging, temperature varying, or when
certain components are changed.
A third type of function, QC Phantom, is another method for testing
system performance. A QC phantom is scanned using standard software
and results are stored (aluminum spine in lucite).
Daily QA ensures the system is operating properly by running 3 types of
tests:
A peak test to adjust photon counting electronics.
A functional test that checks the indicator lights, motion system,
shutter, tube output, and detector performance.
A test that measures a secondary calibration object with different
bone chambers and tissue plugs which correct for system aging and
prevents long-term drifts.
On many tests, the results must be calculated for all 16 detectors
separately. The display for the test will consist of the mean value.
All tests are run all of the time. The tests are executed and test results
reported as each test completes. Test results include pass/fail and any
quantitative information when appropriate.
2.17.2 Starting the Daily QA (secondary calibration)

Operator presses [F5] to start [Daily QA] which presents a plot of the last used
parameter from the last Daily QA run. (Default display is the medium bone
chamber.) At this point operator can interactively manipulate the data in QA
database to create tables and graphs that can be printed.
Tech presses [Start] to start running Daily QA tests.
Software displays instructions to position calibration block on the table. Tech
places block on tabletop silk screen and click [OK] to start.
The UI locks out all other operations except Stop button.
Scan arm moves to the "Home" position. In this case, Home is always at head
of scanner for QA independent of user setting for Home.
2.17.3 Tests Performed in the Secondary Calibration

Detector Mother Board Self Test
The DACs and Flash RAM of the Detector Mother Board are tested.
Find Block
The scanner performs a scout scan to find the block. If block is not properly
positioned, the scanner will prompt the user to Reposition standard more
accurately.
The software automatically finds landmarks within the secondary phantom.
This reduces the need for exact positioning on the table top.
Peak Test
During this test, the shutter opens with the x-rays on.
This test adjusts the sensitivity of the photon counting electronics. The test
determines the optimal voltage setting for the detector amplifier so the
maximum number of photons are detected. With the shutter open the software
adjusts the voltage setting for the detector amplifier, acquiring counts at the
different amplifier settings.
The detector peak test then determines the optimal voltage setting for the
detector amplifiers based on the results. The actual peak setting is taken from
the high energy count rates, the low energy channel is essentially blocked by
the brass spillover piece in the QA standard.
Beam Stop test

Measures the movement of the source shutter. A functional test checks the
shutter LSW and ensures the shutter stops all photons.
Motor motion and limit switches

OMI Interrupt function - the OMI signal is tested by verifying the OMI Interpol
signal is present when the scan arm is stationary.
Each motor (transverse, longitudinal) will be run between hard limits and back
to home position. If the hard limits do not engage, this is a failure. Also
compare steps against predetermined scan window size.
If a failure occurs the number of steps taken, the expected value and the
direction the arm was traveling is noted in the error log.
Spillover test
Measures the effect of high energy photons registering as low energy

photons in the detector system. The beam passes through a brass piece that
stops all low energy photons. The detector then measures the number of low
energy photons detected as a measure of spillover. Spillover should be less
than 13%. Spillover with the CZT detector will degrade about 0.2% per year.
Spillover Stability test

As part of the secondary calibration, the change in spillover must be
calculated on a per element basis and smoothed over the last 3 passing QA's.
Daily QA measures actual spillover and stores it in QA database. As part of
primary calibration, the spillover value used during that calibration is stored.
The delta spillover calculation using the spillover from primary calibration and
the running average of the last five spillover measurements. This information
is in the scan file.
Reference Value Test

The output of the x-ray tube is measured as part of a Reference Value (old
term was air) measurement. This is measured at various currents between
3mA and 0.150mA.
Note:
Not all currents that are ramped to / tested are used to perform
patient scans.
Reference Value measurement

The HE/LE counts are measured as the number of photons counted by
detector. This value is used in all bone density calculations. It must be stored
in the systems data file. Limits for low/high counts Reference value measurements will be performed at various currents.
These reference values are stored separately for all detector elements.
Reference Value measurements for all current settings are actually made
through lucite sections of the secondary calibration block.
Reference value ratio test

The HE/LE ratio for each reference value is calculated for each tube current
tested in reference value measurement.
Detector Pre-AMP test

The detector Pre-amplifiers are tested by removing detector bias and verifying
that the signal out lines of the detector are not noisy.
Tissue Value Test

Tissue secondary calibration
The system measures two tissue eqivilent materials (lucite and Acetron).
Store measured values for each chamber per element in QA database.

The system determines the%fat for two different materials with different
compositions.
Three%fat values are displayed - lean, mid and fat
These calculated%fat values are compared against expected values and
checked against limits for the mean, standard deviation.
BM Chamber Measurements
The system acquires point measurements on the 3 bone chambers (approx
12 seconds / measurement) using the 3ma medium scan mode. The system
determines the bone mineral content for the three chambers of different sizes
and densities.
Measured values for each chamber are stored on a per element basis in
the QA database.
These calculated BM values are compared against expected values and
checked against limits for the mean, standard deviation.
A slope is calculated and this adjustment is used as a secondary BMD
calibration to offset long term drifts in system performance.
Daily QA Results
At the end of Daily QA, a report is automatically printed. If printer is not on line
or fails, post an error to screen.
If Daily QA fails, post an error message that says "Unsuccessful QA Recommend repeating procedure."
If a QA fails the error log will contain detailed information on the
failure.
Test results are saved automatically to a database.
Appropriate secondary calibration and Reference Value information is
recalculated from QA database using an average of the 3 previous passing
test results. This information is stored in each scan file.
A view with plot of medium bone chamber is generated, and user the user is
allowed to manipulate data interactively.
2.17.4 QA Database
A historical record of system performance is maintained by storing key QA
parameters in a database.
3mA Results - fat is hidden - only bone results are viewable
Lunar Corporation
726 Heartland Trail
Madison, WI 53717
1.051
1.007
Daily QA Measurement
Date
Time
3/20/00
9:07:32 AM
BMD Medium (High mA)
0.971g/cm
Deviation
-0.82%
0.971g/cm
Trend Summary
Mean BMD Medium (High 0.971g/cm
CV
Total Sessions
3
0.957
0.907
1/17/00
2/8/00
3/1/00
3/23/00
_____________________________________________________________________________
Functional Tests
Secondary Calibration
Test
Value
Status
Test
Mean
%CV Status
Block Position
Pass
BMD
Peaking
1400-3300
Pass
Large
Beam Stop
<=15
Pass
Medium
<=2% Pass
Small
<=3% Pass
Mechanical Test
Transverse
620mm min
Batch1 or 2
<=1%
Pass
Pass
Tissue
Longitudinal 1980mm min Pass
Lean
<=50% Pass
Mean % Spillover 5% to 13%
Pass
Mid
<=20% Pass
Spillover Stability -1% to 1%
Pass
Fat
<=10% Pass
Reference Counts
High mA
Calibration Status
15% from Primary Cal
Ratio at High mA Ratio
Detector Status
Pass
Pass
System Status
Pass
Pass
*The BMD & Tissue values are Batch dependent and can be found in service options
*Transverse *Longitudinal -
Total counts/20 with the result in millimeters

Total counts/10 with the result in millimeters
*Spillover Stability is spillover with respect to time.
Prodigy
LUNAR (2.10)
Figure 2-23. PRODIGY Daily QA printout with expected values
3 1 Service Software
Chapter 1:Service Software
This chapter contains a discussion of the Service Software and

the Error Log.
3.0 Diagnostic Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-103
3.0.1 To Access the Service Software:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-103
3.1 The Tools Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-104
3.1.1 Spectrum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-104
3.1.2 Stability Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-104
3.1.3 Signal Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-104
3.1.4 Primary Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-104
3.1.5 Secondary Verification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-104
3.1.6 Pileup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-104
3.1.7 Set Download Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-104
3.1.8 enCORE Composer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-105
3.1.9 Error Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-105
3.1.10 Copy Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-105
3.1.11 User Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-105
3.1.12 Service Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-105
3.1.13 Outbox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-105
3.1.14 System File Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-105
3.2 Tools / Diagnostics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-105
3.2.1 Pileup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-105
3.2.2 Calibration Pileup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-105
3.2.3 Spillover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-105
3.2.4 Count Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-105
3.2.5 Scanner Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-105
3.2.6 Scanner Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-106
3.2.7 Scanner X-ray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-107
3.2.8 Lin/Rep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-108
3.2.9 Limit Switch Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-108
3.2.10 Scanner Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-108
3.3 Diagnostic Scan Modes - . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-108
3.3.1 Table Top Scan - . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-108
3.3.2 Alignment Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-108
3.3.3 Beam Wobble scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-108
3.3.4 Hacksaw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-108
Service Software3101
3.4 Error Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-108

3.4.1 Printing the Error Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-109
3.4.2 Troubleshooting Help software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-110
3.4.3 Reading the Error Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-112
3.5 Service Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-114
3.5.1 Measure Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-114
3.5.2 Analyze Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-114
3.5.3 QA Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-114
3.5.4 Serial Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-114
Figure 3-1. The Tools/Diagnostics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-104
Figure 3-2. The Error Log Dialogue Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-109
Figure 3-3. Error log entry details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-110
Figure 3-4. enCORE Troubleshooting help screen capture. . . . . . . . . . 1-111
Figure 3-5. Sample PRODIGY Error Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-112
3-102Service Software
3.0
Diagnostic Software
Note:
GE-LUNAR Diagnostic software options are not available to

the customer. This software is available to GE-LUNAR
authorized representatives only.
When the software is used in the
diagnostic / service mode, the Engineer
performing service must verify that the
scanner is taken out of service mode
before returning control of the scanner to
the customer. The software will return to operators
mode as soon as the software is exited and restarted.
The operator mode may also be changed under the
Tools/User Options menu.
The Service software gives the Technician
access to all areas of the
PRODIGYSoftware, DO NOT adjust AGS
subsystem settings.
The Diagnostic Software is available through the User Options Tab
3.0.1 To Access the Service Software:

Start the PRODIGYSoftware by double clicking the PRODIGY Icon on
the desk top
Double click the Tools option on the menu bar
When the drop down menu appears double click on User Options
Double click on the Systems Tab on the dialogue box
Click on Service under Display Mode
When prompted enter the password Award (versions 2.05 and greater)
Smile versions lower than 2.05)
Note:
the password is case sensitive
The Tools option on the menu bar will now contain Service Options, and
Service scanning options will also be available under the F2 Measure
Option
Service Software3-103
Figure 3-1. The Tools/Diagnostics Menu
3.1
The Tools Menu

3.1.1 Spectrum
Allows the service engineer to view and print the raw energy spectrum for the
detector. The detector can also be repeaked from Spectrum.
3.1.2 Stability Run

Used for the detection of arcing and testing the detectors performance
3.1.3 Signal Monitor

View count rates for low and high-energy channels for the detector.
3.1.4 Primary Calibration

Used to calibrate the PRODIGY scanner See DXAP@002 PRODIGY Primary
Calibration Procedure Chapter 5 Appendix C.
3.1.5 Secondary Verification

Used in the manufacturing process
3.1.6 Pileup
Used in the manufacturing process
3.1.7 Set Download Parameters

Download and verify the Firmware versions for the (c)SBC.
3.1.8 enCORE Composer

This is not a service tool - (Physical and Business Report Generator - see the
enCORE Operators Manual for information).
3.1.9 Error Log

Ability to view and print the contents of the diagnostic error log (see section
3.4)
3.1.10 Copy Configuration

Ability to copy the scanners Error log, Configuration Files and / or QA
Database to a drive on the host PC - useful when a host PC is replaced or
when diagnostic information needs to be sent to GE-LUNAR.
3.1.11 User Options

Set up user configured options for the scanner.
3.1.12 Service Options

Service Mode scanner configurations (see section 3.5).
3.1.13 Outbox
Configure Printing, E-mail and Faxing options.
3.1.14 System File Editor

Edit system settings for the enCORE software - do not alter these settings
without GE-LUNAR Customer Support authorization.
3.2
Tools / Diagnostics Menu

3.2.1 Pileup
Determines Detector parameters for multiple events occurring simultaneously
- not used for service.
3.2.2 Calibration Pileup

Not used for service.
3.2.3 Spillover
Perform and Acquire a Spillover Measurement (test of source spectrum and/
or detector resolution).
3.2.4 Count Rate

Acquire and print Reference Counts (count rate of detector must be
performed through lucite).
3.2.5 Scanner Motion

Control manually and perform scanner motion diagnostics and motion

configuration.
Motion Tests Tab
Limit Switch Monitor - used to verify limit switch status
Limit to Limit Test - used to verify limit switch positions
Configure check box- this box must be checked when limit to limit is
run to establish the scanners range of motion (scan window).
Cable Stress Test - used to cycle Transverse and Longitudinal
Mechanics - can be used to check new cables / check for binding
Home scanner - moves mechanics to Home position
Motion Commands Tab
Home Position - change Arm Parking position from head to foot does not effect where the daily QA (Secondary calibration) is
performed - Move to Home - sends scan arm to home position.
Note:
When the Home position is changed from the head end of the
table to the foot or vice versa, the Limit to Limit test (see
Motion Tests tab above) must be run with the Configure box
selected.
Move Steps - move the scan arm to a specific location on the table move Absolute moves an absolute distance from home, Move
Relative - move relative to last position
Joystick and Laser - Enable and Control Scanner Motion manually,
change motor speeds, toggle laser on and off
Lower portion of the screen displays the status of limit switches, scan
arm position, and positioning switch (joystick) status.
Find Block Tab
Secondary Calibration - can be used to find / verify that the scanner is
able to find the different chambers on the secondary calibration (daily
QA) block. THis tool can be useful for troubleshooting cannot find
Block errors and for Transverse binding issues.
3.2.6 Scanner Detector

Detector Tests Tab
Gain Control - adjusts the gain on the AGS amplifier used in the
detector peak setting - peak adjusts only the AGS amplifier.
Bias Control - adjusts the bias of the detector. PRODIGY Systems

run with detector bias on demand (when x-rays are present) of
450VDC.
DCA window settings - view DCA window settings - these settings
should not be edited.
Detector status - allows the service engineer to view the detector
status real time - information displayed includes Peak setting Bias
setting, and DCA window settings.
Detector AGS Tab
AGS DAC control (verify AGS DAC settings), check on detector
rollover, and check on channel count rates.
DO NOT adjust the detector Bias, DCA
windows or AGS DAC settings changes in the Detector bias, DCA
windows or AGS DACs can change the
scanners results.
AGS Mode - the operate / calibrate signal (disables the AGS systems
so that the detector can be peaked correctly) can be toggled.
3.2.7 Scanner X-ray

X-ray Tests TabManual Test - Control Manually the Shutter, X-ray on Indicator and
patient Positioning laser
Automatic test - automatically toggle the Shutter, Laser and X-Ray
Relay
X-Ray Source - Turn on source (ramp and make x-rays), warm up a
tube head at install or replacement.
X-ray cycle test - cyclically ramp the source - (can be used to test
ramping failures or for arcing)
X-rays Tab
Ramp the kV and / or the mA of the x-ray generation system and view
feedback real-time. Faults are displayed and polled real-time in the
window on the right.
Ports Tab - view status of and send commands to (c)SBC ports (see
section 2.4 for (c)SBC port definitions).
Download Tab - identical to Set Download Parameters (section
3.1.7)
Misc. Tab- not used for service.
3.2.8 Lin/Rep
Not Used for Service
3.2.9 Limit Switch Adjustment

Verify and Adjust Limit switch positions.
Note:
When using Limit Switch Adjustment, DO NOT alter the

default settings.
3.2.10 Scanner Disconnect

Disconnect the scanner from the PRODIGY software (reset the (c)SBC).
3.3
Diagnostic Scan Modes Performed under F2 Measure - only visible when the scanner is in service
mode.
3.3.1 Table Top Scan Not used in Service
3.3.2 Alignment Scan

Verify that the Source and Detector maintain a constant count rate in all areas
of the scan table. Also useful for testing cables.
3.3.3 Beam Wobble scan

Quantifies beam movement relative to the detector when the scanners
mechanics are moving (see DXAP2010 Chapter 5 Appendices).
3.3.4 Hacksaw
Calculates and sets correcton factors to align bone edges in scans (see
DXAP 2007 Chapter 5 Appendices).
3.4
Error Log
The PRODIGYwill maintain an error log file whenever the scan table is in
operation. All errors, fatal or nonfatal will be logged here. The Error log
gives a brief description of the error and if possible the origin of the fault.
The error log is one of the best troubleshooting tools for scanner
malfunction.
Note:
To aid in a quick and accurate response when requesting

assistance from GE-LUNAR, please have an error log
available for review by GE-LUNAR Customer Support.
The error log file is named errorlog.bin, this file is the current error log session.
Older sessions are named errorlog.1, errorlog.2 and so on up to errorlog.4.
When requesting help from GE-LUNAR, E-mailing the current error log file
and a description of the symptoms will aid in a rapid diagnosis (see Copy
Configuration in section 3.1.10 for information on copying the error log to an
E-mailable file).
3.4.1 Printing the Error Log.

Note:
The scanner does not have to be in Service mode to view or

print the Error Log.
The Error Log is located under the Tools dropdown menu. Left click on
Tools / and then on Error Log.
Figure 3-2. The Error Log Dialogue Box

Session - The PRODIGYsoftware will maintain up to 10 sessions each session is up to 100 errors.
A new session is created by shutting down and restarting the
enCORE software. A new session may also be started by clicking on
the button
To view a session, left click on it, all errors (if present) will be shown in
the box below.
The Errors list may be printed (click on print errors) or it may be
searched with the Find Error button.
The details of the failure are shown when the error is highlighted and
then right clicked on.
Figure 3-3. Error log entry details
3.4.2 Troubleshooting Help software

This feature is found in software versions 2.26 and greater. When an error is
highlighted and the Troubleshoot button is clicked on, it opens an online
enCORE troubleshooting guide to assist the service engineer in
troubleshooting the system by error code.
Figure 3-4. enCORE Troubleshooting help screen capture.

How to use the Troubleshooting Help software:
This Help software is based on Fault Tree Analysis or FTA. The fault trees are
in an outline form. Each heading in the outline represents an or choice. For
example, the basic fault below Shutter will not close has three possible
causes: Shutter stuck, Solenoid Return Spring not working, or Solenoid
powered when it should not be. Each of these in turn lists their possible
causes.
Sample Fault Tree (from Prodigy Collimator):
Shutter will not close
I.Shutter stuck move by hand to test
A.Slotted Wheel scraping OMI board
B.Shutter scraping Shutter Plate
II.Solenoid Return Spring not working move by hand to test
A.Spring broken
B.Spring no longer anchored
III.Solenoid powered when it should not be
A.FOINK (PRODIGY I) problem Test by disconnecting J1. If the shutter
closes, swap the SBC. If the shutter stays open, swap the FOINK.
B.(c)SBC problem Test as above.
Note:
This type of analysis is meant to identify all possible causes,

giving the user a complete list to work from when ruling out
possibilities. If a cause is not listed in the appropriate fault tree
analysis, please e-mail GE-LUNAR about the discrepancy.
3.4.3 Reading the Error Log
Figure 3-5. Sample PRODIGY Error Log

4 1
2 Troubleshooting
Chapter 1:Troubleshooting
This chapter contains troubleshooting techniques for diagnostic

failures, failing quality assurance tests, mechanical failures and
imaging problems.
4.0 Diagnostic Failure Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119
4.1 Transverse Motion failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119
4.1.1 Operator Induced - switch closed during scan . . . . . . . . 4-119
4.1.2 Mechanical Failures - Unusual noise or irregular motion 4-119
4.1.3 Loss of OMI signal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121
4.2 Longitudinal Motion failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122
4.2.1 Limit Switch Tripped During a Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122
4.2.2 Longitudinal Binding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
4.2.3 Loss of OMI Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125
4.3 Failure of the 28V power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-126
4.4 Emergency Stop Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127
4.5 Tube Head Thermostat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127
4.6 Communication Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127
4.7 Other Diagnostic Failure Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127
4.7.1 Reasons For Invalid Diagnostic Failures. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
4.8 Failing Quality Assurance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
4.8.1 Block Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
4.8.2 Beam Stop Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
4.8.3 Mean% Spillover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
4.8.4 Reference Counts and Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129
4.8.5 Ratio Fluctuations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129
4.8.6 Transverse or Longitudinal Mechanics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129
4.8.7 Tissue Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130
4.8.8 Bone Mineral of the Standard Chambers . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130
4.8.9 Symptoms of High and Low KV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131
4.9 Reference Counts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131
4.10 Arcing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134
4.10.1 Limit Switch Tripped During Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-135
4.11 Imaging Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136
4.11.1 White, or Grey in the first or second scan line: . . . . . . . 4-136
4.11.2 Femur Scan Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136
4.11.3 AP-Spine Image Problems: Probable causes . . . . . . . . 4-137
DPX-NT Service Manual (Rev A- 1999)
Troubleshooting4117
4.11.4 Broken Signal Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-137

4.11.5 Loss of tube head current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-137
4.11.6 X-Ray Relay Failure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-137
4.11.7 Unstable AC Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138
4.11.8 Arcing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138
4.12 Failing Alignment Test Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138
4.12.1 Image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138
4.13 Indicator Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-140
4.13.1 X-ray On LED Blinking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-140
4.13.2 Shutter Open LED Blinking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-140
4.13.3 Shutter Not Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-141
4.13.4 End of Exposure Alarm During Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-141
4.14 Communications Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-142
4.15 Viewing Quality Assurance Trends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-142
4.15.1 What to Look for in the QA History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143
4.16 MAX Board Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143
4.17 FOINK Board Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-144
4.18 OMI Board Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-145
4.19 SBC Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-145
4.20 XORB Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147
4.21 Detector Motherboard Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-148
4.22 Detector Daughter Board Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-149
4-118Troubleshooting
4.0
Diagnostic Failure Codes

The following conditions halt the operations of the scanner, and generate a
diagnostic failure message which is displayed on the monitor screen:
All of these interrupts are detected by the cSBC
Transverse Mechanics Failure (4.1)
Longitudinal Mechanics Failure (4.2)
Emergency Stop Button activated (4.3)
X-ray source over temperature (4.4)
DC power supply failure (4.5)
4.1
Transverse Motion failure

Motion Detection
cSBC / OMI fail to see transverse motion during a patient scan, an
interrupt signal is generated and the cSBC resets and closes the shutter.
A slotted disk at the end of the arm rotates through an infrared beam
(OMI), and pulses are sent to the cSBC board when there is
transverse motion.
The transverse and longitudinal motion detection system (on cSBC) is
operational during patient scans and the find block test of the daily
QA. If the problem occurs during a quality assurance, it may be high
voltage arcing or a problem with the OMI.
4.1.1 Operator Induced - switch closed during scan

Cause: When scanning, a defect in the transverse mechanics or a mispositioned patient may cause one of the transverse limit switches to
close when the scanner is acquiring data. Closure of a limit switch
prevents further operation of the motor. The shutter will close, the shutter
open lamp will go out and the end of exposure alarm will sound. Seconds
later the error message will appear on the screen.
Solution: If the patient is not centered on the table top or if the region
being scanned is too close to a limit in transverse travel, the limit switch
switch may be close while scanning. Re position the patient on the table,
further away from the limit.
4.1.2 Mechanical Failures - Unusual noise or irregular motion
Troubleshooting 4-119
If the Detector / Tube Head motion is irregular, or scraping noises are heard,
the Transverse Mechanics may be binding. This symptom will typically be
detected as a failure by the daily QA Mechanics Test.
Symptom: If the Detector Array / Tube Head is not moving when
scanning check:
Mechanics are free to move
Centent
Stepper Motor
Troubleshooting Binding
Turn off the power to the scanner and move the affected parts by hand. Feel
the motion for spots where the carriages are more difficult to move. Listen for
unusual noises.
The following are common causes for Transverse Binding
High Voltage Cable Routing
One of the most common problems is a failure of the Source and Detector to
reach the rear Limit Switch due to the Tube Head running into its own high
voltage cables. These cables must have a hump formed at the Rear
Longitudinal Carriage that allows the lower portion of the Tube Head to pass
under the cables.
The High Voltage Cables can also impede transverse motion toward the front
Limit Switch. This is caused when the cables have been tied down without
enough play for the Tube Head and Detector to move all the way forward.
These problems should be investigated by manually tripping both Limit
Switches while inspecting for cable conflicts, binding, or tension problems.
Check to see that the bottom of the Tube Head is not hitting the
Transverse Centent
Wiring
In rare instances, the wires from the Shutter Solenoid and/or Fans can snag
on the bolts that protrude through the frame on the foot end of the scanner.
This is solved by properly tying down these wires.
Transverse Belt
The Transverse Belt should not be excessively tightened or this will cause
excessive binding in the transverse mechanism. It should be possible to
deflect the belt by 4 cm when it is properly tightened. Sometimes the spare
belt material near the clamp on the Tube Head Carriage comes into contact
with the forward gear and prevents the scanner from going all the way to
Home position.
Drive Wheels
The wheels that support the Tube Head and Detector Carriages must be
adjusted so that they come into perfect contact with the Transverse Rails.
These wheel are best inspected with the table top, front panel and arm covers
off so one can sight down the extrusions. However, it is possible to test the
wheels by preventing any wheel from turning and seeing if the carriage will
still move. By preventing any wheel from turning, you should be able to tell
that it slides along the extrusion while the others roll. This indicates that the
wheel has not been excessively tightened down. This is least likely to be the
source of transverse motion problems, as it is unlikely that the adjustment of
the wheels would have become any tighter over time. They would be more
likely to loosen over time and fail alignment tests (see Alignment Test, section
4.12). Adjustments can be made by loosening and rotating the eccentric
bearings of any of the lower wheels.
Gear And Pulley Positioning
Check all appropriate gears and pulleys. Verify that the set screws are
tightened and the gears and pulleys are not out of position.
Limit Switch Positioning
If the transverse motion seems to be acceptable, but the number of steps in
the Quality Assurance Test is failing, check the position of the Limit Switches.
On Total Body scans, a limit switch out of position could allow the Source/
Detector Carriages to hit the frame or panels before the Limit Switch is
actuated.
Transverse Motor
Check the Transverse Motor for a broken wire in one of the internal coils, or a
bad electrical connection to its Centent Motor Controller.
Transverse Centent
The Centent Motor Controller, if defective, will cause transverse motion
problems. Sometimes the controller works well enough to acquire some
scans, but it will not provide enough torque to complete every fast scan. The
CURRENT SET voltage at terminal 11 on a properly operating controller
should be 14 to 16 VDC (transverse motor wired in parallel).
The longitudinal and transverse Centents are identical, and can be
exchanged. If the problem remains, the Transverse Motor should be
replaced.
4.1.3 Loss of OMI signal

If the error occurs consistently on the first line of a patient scan or during the
find block portion of the daily QA, and the scanner is moving in the transverse
direction, then check the following:
Cause: The Interrupt signal is being lost.
Solution 1: The pulses that normally enter the cSBC board at J14 (the
black wire at the center of the connector) may have stopped. These
pulses are necessary to keep the cSBC from resetting. These pulses can
be seen on a cSBC board LED.
Use the DPX-NT service software (Tools/Diagnostics/Scanner Motion /
Motion Commands Tab) to set the joystick speed to 50 steps, enable the
joystick and watch the LED. If the OMI is working the LIght will flash
when the Transverse Motor is run. If the LED flashes when the
mechanics are engaged, but the error still occurs, the interrupt was
invalid. Check for arcing in the high voltage system or replace the cSBC.
If the LED D9 (B in figure 4-1) does not flash,

Verify that the slotted disk at the front of the lower arm rail is in the
middle of the slot between the photo diode and photo transistor.
The slotted disk must be completely flat and remain in the center of
the sensor slot during its entire rotation.
If the slotted disk has been in physical contact with the optical sensor,
the sensor may have debris on it, disassemble this mechanism, and
clean the sensor and the slots of the disk.
Check the Cable running from the cSBC to the OMI for a cable break
by checking the individual wires for continuity.
4.2
Longitudinal Motion failure

cSBC/ OMI fail to see longitudinal motion during a patient scan, an
interrupt signal is generated by the cSBC which resets and closes the
shutter.
A slotted disk at the foot end of the table on the pulley for the
Longitudinal Drive Belt rotates through an infrared beam (OMI), and
pulses are sent to the cboard when there is transverse motion.
The transverse and longitudinal motion detection system (on FOINK) is
operational during patient scans and the find block portion of the daily
QA. If the problem occurs during a quality assurance, for instance, it may
be the high voltage system is arcing or the OMI may be malfunctioning.
4.2.1 Limit Switch Tripped During a Scan
Cause: When scanning, a defect in the longitudinal mechanics (binding)

or a mis-positioned patient may cause one of the longitudinal limit
switches to close when the scanner is acquiring data. Closure of a limit
switch prevents further operation of the motor. The shutter will close, the
shutter open lamp will go out and the end of exposure alarm will sound.
Seconds later the error message will appear on the screen.
Solution: If the patient is not centered on the table top (length wise) or if
the region being scanned is too close to a limit in longitudinal travel, the
limit switch may be close while scanning. Re position the patient on the
table, further away from the limit.
4.2.2 Longitudinal Binding

If the scan arm fails to move when scanning check the stepper motor,
and Centent, if arm motion is irregular, check for binding.
Turn off the power to the scanner and move the affected parts by hand. Feel
the motion for spots where the arm is more difficult to move. Listen for unusual
noises.
When moving the arm longitudinally, only
push on the arm column. Pushing on the
forward parts of the arm can ruin Tube
Head/Detector alignment.
Cable Track
The major impediment to longitudinal motion is the plastic Cable Track that
runs through the trough at the rear of the scanner.
This track is attached at two points: at the Rear Longitudinal Carriage and to
the scanner frame (low, rear and center) each spot by 4 bolts. Also, adequate
slack must be left in the cables inside the Cable Track or they will stop the arm
from moving fully to the foot end.
Should the Cable Track detach from the scanner frame, it will slide freely in
the trough and will eventually cause trouble. This can allow the Cable Track to
get in between the Rear Longitudinal Carriage and the scanner frame on the
foot end preventing the tripping of the limit switch.
Front Longitudinal Carriage Dragging
Check the distance between the front longitudinal carriage and the
longitudinal rail with a go/nogo gauge (See installation Procedure DXAP2000
Chapter 5 appendices). The carriage should not rub the front rail, if necessary
insert shims behind the front longitudinal carriage.
Tube Head Cable Routing
Problems at the head end of the scanner can be caused by a limit switch
being out of position (thus the arm runs into the frame before the Limit Switch)
or because the High Voltage Cables are tied down incorrectly where they
snake around from the Rear Longitudinal Carriage to the panel under the
Tube Head (High Voltage Cable Trough). If the cables are tied down too far
toward the head end (at the point where the three tie downs are), they can run
into the Longitudinal Motor Assembly and hold the arm away from the head
end Limit Switch.
Slip Clutch
A slip clutch is part of the longitudinal motion system to limit torque. This is a
feature to protect the patient should he/she pinch an arm or leg between the
back side of the scanner and the Arm Column. If the Slip Clutch is set too
loose, it will fail to move the belt and will just "slip" as the motor turns. This
may produce the following symptoms:
failure of Quality Assurance scan Mechanics test
compressed image in limited areas of the image
a Longitudinal Mechanics diagnostic failure
Gear and Pulley Positioning
Check all appropriate gears and pulleys. Verify that the set screws are
tightened and the gears and pulleys are not out of position.
Limit Switch Positioning
If the longitudinal motion seems to be acceptable, but the number of steps in
the Quality Assurance Test is failing, check the position of the Limit Switches.
On Total Body scans, a limit switch out of position could allow the Source/
Detector Carriages to hit the frame or panels of the scanner before the Limit
Switch.
If the mechanical stop is reached before the Limit Switch is actuated, check
carefully to see which part of the Arm Assembly is in contact with the Table
Assembly. The front part of the Lower Transverse Extrusion is clamped to the
Longitudinal Drive Cable at the front of the scanner. If the Lower Transverse
Extrusion is not clamped in such a way that it forms a 90 degree angle with
the length of the table, the rollers at the front end of the Lower Transverse
Extrusion may strike the end of the scan table before the Limit Switch is
actuated.
Longitudinal Motor
Check the motor for a broken wire in one of the internal coils, or a bad
electrical connection to the Centent Motor Controller.
Longitudinal Centent
The longitudinal Centent Motor Controller may be the cause of a failure. The
current set voltage should be roughly 9-11 volts at terminal 11 on a properly
operating controller. If this voltage is not correct, replace the Centent
Controller.
The longitudinal and transverse Centents are identical, and can be
exchanged. If the problem remains, the Longitudinal Motor should be
replaced.
Longitudinal Belt
The Longitudinal Belt should not be tightened too much or this will cause the
brackets holding the gears to deform at either end of the scanner. When the
belt is properly tightened, it should be possible to deflect the upper and lower
sides of the belt so that they touch within 8 cm of the gears at either end.
Drive Wheels
The rollers in front and the wheels in back that support the Arm must be
adjusted so that they come into perfect contact with the Longitudinal Rails.
Test them by preventing any wheel from turning and see if the carriage will still
move. By preventing any wheel from turning, it should be possible to slide the
carriage along the rail with one wheel dragging while the others roll. This
indicates that the wheel has not been excessively tightened down.
Adjustments can be made by loosening and rotating the eccentric bearings of
any of the lower wheels.
4.2.3 Loss of OMI Signal

If the Scan Arm motion is irregular, or scraping noises are heard, the
Longitudinal Mechanics may be binding. This symptom will typically be
detected as a failure by the daily QA Mechanics Test.
If the error occurs consistently after the first line of a patient scan, and the
scanner is moving in the longitudinal direction, then check the following:
Cause: The Interrupt signal is being lost.
Solution 1: The pulses that normally enter the FOINK board at J (the
black wire at the center of the connector) may have stopped. These
pulses are necessary to keep the FOINK board from sending an interrupt
to the SBC. These pulses can be seen on a FOINK board LED.
For LED location see figure 4-1. Use the DPX-NT service software
(Tools/Diagnostics/Scanner Motion / Motion Commands Tab) to set the
joystick speed to 50 steps, enable the joystick and watch the LED. If the
OMI / FOINK is working the LIght will flash when the Longitudinal Motor
is run. If the LED flashes when the mechanics are engaged, but the error
still occurs, the interrupt was invalid. Check for arcing in the high voltage
system or replace the FOINK and SBC.
If the LED does not flash,
Verify that the slotted disk at the foot end of the scan table is in the
middle of the slot between the photo diode and photo transistor.
The slotted disk must be completely flat and remain in the center of
the sensor slot during its entire rotation.
If the slotted disk has been in physical contact with the optical sensor,
the sensor may have debris on it, disassemble this mechanism, and
clean the sensor and the slots of the disk.
Check the Cable running from the FOINK to the OMI for a cable
break by checking the individual wires for continuity.
4.3
Failure of the 28V power supply

The 28 VDC power supply is only enabled when the X-ray tube is ramped,
use the service software (Tools/Diagnostics/ Scanner X-ray) to attempt to
ramp the Tube Head.
When the Supply is ramping the Red and Green LEDs on the MAX board will
light.
If the LEDs illuminate and the go out:
Measure the output of the 28VDC power supply, and verify that it remains
constant during the voltage ramping and scanning operations.
Check the High voltage power supplies, insure they are not arcing (Error
Log - see section 3.2) and are ramping.
If the LEDs fail to light:
This supply is turned on by the X-ray Relay, so verify that the Relay is
closing. If not, then either the Relay is bad or it is not receiving the signal
from the SBC via the FOINK.
Check the continuity of the cathode, the filament may have broken, MAX
board TP 4, TP 5 and TP 13 should be continuous with the Tube Head
control cable connected.
The Tube Head Thermostat is wired in series with the Relay, so if it has
opened, the Relay will not be able to close.
The 28VDC should also be measured at the Terminal Block. If not, check
the continuity of the wiring and refasten all connections. Also, check the
wire tie-downs for excess tension they may be putting on the wires.
It may be necessary to check the wiring from the Terminal Block to the
MAX board and to the High Voltage Power Supplies.
4.4
Emergency Stop Button

The Emergency Stop button is a normally closed circuit, if it opens the
Emergency Stop interrupt will be sent from the FOINK to the SBC.
Verify that the emergency stop button is out. If it has been pressed in,
press it again to release it.
If 26VDC can be measured on both pins of FOINK connector J17, the
Emergency Stop Switch and the wires connecting it to the FOINK board
are good and the FOINK board should be replaced.
If 26 VDC is missing, the Circuit is open between the FOINK and the
Switch.
Insure the switch is functional
Check the continuity of the wires from the switch to the FOINK board.
4.5
Tube Head Thermostat

There is a thermostat inside the Tube Head. This thermostat is normally
closed, but opens when the Tube Head temperature is too high.
The thermostat will close again automatically after a cool down period of
usually less than 30 minutes. If 0 VDC is measured on both pins of
FOINK connector J15, the Thermostat and the wires connecting it to the
FOINK board are good and the FOINK board should be replaced.
4.6
Communication Error
The computer is not communicating with the SBC board.
Verify communications with the SBC in the service software (Tools/Service
Options Comm tab - Test Communications).
If this is unsuccessful, verify that the I/O cable from the computer to the SBC
Board is secure. Also, verify that the comm port is configured correctly (see
DXPC 2000 Chapter 5 appendices) and that all required drivers are present. If
all fails, the SBC or computer serial port is defective.
4.7
Other Diagnostic Failure Codes
Multiple error codes are possible. These will be displayed one after the other,
but the first one displayed is probably the problem. The Error Log will always
show the failures in the correct order, the others are generated as a result of
the first failure.
4.7.1 Reasons For Invalid Diagnostic Failures

Arcing of the x-ray high voltage system releases a large amount of
electromagnetic energy. This energy creates noise in the electronic circuits
and may cause the SBC to do unpredictable things, such as give invalid
diagnostic errors. Arcing is usually accompanied by white, blue or black lines
across patient scans (See Arcing, section 4.10).
4.8
Failing Quality Assurance Test

See chapter 2 section 12, for explanations of the various tests that are
performed during the running of the Daily Quality Assurance.
If any of the QA test results fail, none of the results are considered valid. The
results will be stored in the Quality Assurance History file, but these values will
not be averaged with the other results for calibration purposes. In addition, the
software will prevent patient scans until a passing daily QA has been
completed. Recent valid QA's are necessary for accurate results.
4.8.1 Block Position

After starting a QA, the operator is prompted to place the QA standard n the
table, if the DPX-NT fails to detect the Block in the correct orientation the QA
will not progress.
Check Block position and orientation
The scanner may not be finding the correct "Home" position. The correct
"Home" position aligns the center of the x-ray beam with the center of the
Brass Piece when the Standard is correctly positioned. The Air Counts must
be obtained outside of the QA standard, next to the Brass Piece. If the
Reference Counts are obtained with the x-ray beam passing through the
Brass Piece, the Quality Assurance Scan will fail.
Verify that the scanner limit switches are set correctly with the DPX-NT
home position jig (see DXAP2000 - DPX-NT Installation Procedure
Chapter 5 appendices).
4.8.2 Beam Stop Action

The Beam Stop Action test verifies the ability of the lead shutter to attenuate
x-rays from the tube head by verifying that the Background counts when the
shutter is closed are lower than counts taken through the brass piece with the
shutter open.
4.8.3 Mean% Spillover
An increase in the Spillover percentage over time is an indication that the

detector is losing resolution, even if the Spillover test does not fail. A large
change in the Spillover can be explained in some cases by standard
positioning (or a small change in the home position of the scanner). If the
beam is not fully eclipsed by the brass piece during the Spillover test, the
Spillover value increases dramatically.
Spillover stability is a test of detector bias drift. if the detector bias is drifting,
the mean spillover value will also drift.
4.8.4 Reference Counts and Ratio

During this test the baseline is established which will later be used for
comparing with the values obtained during the scan of the standard. Care
should be taken that the x-ray beam is not missing the standard, nor being
obstructed by the brass piece on the standard during the High and Low Air
Count test.
The Ratio value should remain fairly constant over time.
4.8.5 Ratio Fluctuations

The ratio of High to Low Channel Air Counts is the way the bone density
measurement is calculated by the changes in the ratio of High to Low Channel
counts. The Ratio should remain constant as long as the x-ray beam quality
and the resolution of the detector remain constant.
It is possible to view the Ratio trends in the Quality Assurance History. Check
both the 3mA Ratio and the 150 Ratio to determine if the either Ratio has
changed significantly.
The problems which could cause a change in air ratio are:
deterioration of the resolution of the detector
current leakage through the transorbs on the XORB board
a faulty High Voltage Power Supply (kV unstable over time)
changes to the x-ray tube insert
These are very difficult to diagnose by a method other than substitution of new
components until the Reference Counts Ratio returns to normal.
Detector deterioration or unstable High Voltage Power Supply, will usually
cause the Alignment Test Scan to fail.
The specification for XORB Board transorbs is that they must allow less than
0.5 micro amperes reverse bias current. At LUNAR, each transorb is
measured by applying a 5 Volt reverse bias to the transorb and a 100 kW 1%
resistor connected in series. The voltage measured across the 100 kW
resistor must then be less than 50 mV.
4.8.6 Transverse or Longitudinal Mechanics

Failure of this test is caused by one or more of the following:
Incorrect Limit Switch positioning

Defective Limit Switch
A mechanical constraint
A defective Motor
A defective Centent Motor Controller
The values recorded for these tests should remain fairly constant over time.
Variations between QA's of under 25 steps should not be a cause for concern
as 1 transverse step = 0.05 mm and 1 longitudinal step = 0.1 mm, so the
actual variation is only a few millimeters.
If the number of steps continually increases from QA to QA, this could indicate
an impediment to the scanner's motion and should be rectified (see 4.1
(Transverse) or 4.2 (Longitudinal)).
4.8.7 Tissue Value

The tissue value should not be the sole failing parameter. The failure of this
test is usually accompanied by problems with Bone Mineral values (see
below) or Reference Counts Ratio trends (see above). If this is failing alone it
is probably a problem with the counting system or high or low kV (4.8.9).
4.8.8 Bone Mineral of the Standard Chambers

The software contains values which it expects the scanner to measure for the
scan of each chamber. If the mean of the BM measurements made for the
chamber does not fall within the predefined software limits the QA will fail. If
the percent coefficient of variance is over 3%, the QA will fail.
These failures will always occur if the Reference Counts or Reference Ratio
test have deviated severely from normal results. However if the Reference
Count results look normal, and the values are approximately equal to the
numbers obtained during the scanner installation, then the counts may be
unstable.
Another cause of failing on the bone chamber measuremnts can be arcing
during the QA. This can be detected by examining the QA History graphically
and looking for variation of the Large BM values. Note the few data points that
vary. These are the early signs of arcing.
This will also be apparent (but not obvious) on the QA Results printout. The
arc occurred in the third standard scan and elevated the BM values. If a
customer reports a failing QA because of a bone chmaber measurement
being too high, be aware that this could be an early warning of arcing. Obtain
from the site the QA history file and error log for analysis. Look for variation of
the Large BM values.
It is very important to notice these early warning signs of arcing so that the
system can be re-greased before any damage is done to the high voltage
cable connectors or the tube head.
4.8.9 Symptoms of High and Low KV

It has been noted in a small number of cases that defective high voltage
power supplies, or an arcing tube head may produce a voltage other than 76
kV. The DPX-NT monitors kV once per scan sweep.
Note:
4.9
:It would be prudent in both of these cases to take a positive

and negative power supply, AND a tube head. Also, the XORB
test points may look normal (indicating 76 KV) in each case as
well. This usually occurs where the power supplies are
defective and so the monitor voltages returned to the XORB
may not show the true voltage. When the tube head arcs
causing the voltage to go too high, then the XORB test points
may indeed show the actual voltages.
Reference Counts
4.9.1 Unstable Counts
To examine the scanner's ability to count detector pulses consistently over
longer periods of time, run the Alignment Test option from the service software
program.
If the "End of Exposure Alarm" rings during the time the Alignment Test
scan is running, see "Alarm Pings During Scan" in section 4.13.4. If the
Shutter Open or the X-ray On lamps on the front panel blink, during the
test, see section 4.13 also.
While the Alignment Test scan is running, measure the voltage at test
points 1, 2, 5 and 6 of the XORB board. They should have approximately
the following values respectively: -0.150VDC, 3.8VDC, 0.150VDC, and
3.8VDC.
A pure DC voltage on an oscilloscope at test point 1 and 5 of the XORB
will verify that there is constant current through the filament of the X-ray
Insert.
If there is AC ripple in excess of 0.2 Vpp, the power supplies should be
replaced.
Start and stop the x-rays several times while observing the voltage at
TP3 and TP7 of the XORB board. This is the programming voltage from
the SBC, and although this voltage is dependent on the feedback
information returned to the SBC, the voltages at the XORB board test
points should be approximately the same each time the x-rays are
produced. The AC ripple on this signal must be less than 0.2 Vpp.
Replace the SBC board if the proper control signal is not present.
When the x-rays are off between scans, verify that the shutter aperture
lines up with the aperture to the Tube Head beneath. Take some
alignment pictures and verify that the image is a bright, rectangular
image and the entire alignment box is visible. If the alignment box is not
visible, the shutter Tube Head and detector apertures are not aligned.
Open and close the shutter to make sure that it returns to the same
position each time. Turn the x-rays back on, and make sure that you
obtain nearly the same count rate each time the shutter is opened.
4.9.2 No Counts
When the table to the right of the peak graph on the Quality Assurance
Results printout is entirely filled with zeros, use the Signal monitor program in
the Diagnostics (see section 5.1) to create x-rays at 76 kV and 150 uA and
open the Shutter for sampling. Then check the following items:
I.Is the amber X-ray On LED illuminated?
A.If it is, skip to part II.
B.If not, the voltage or current ramping has probably failed. Are both the red
and green LED's on the MAX Board illuminated?
1.Voltage or Current Ramping Failures
If not, is the red LED illuminated?
a.X-ray Relay or FOINK
If not, measure the output of the 28 Volt Power Supply. Check the operation of
the X-ray Relay or the FOINK Board which controls its operation. If all of the
above are working, the red LED may be defective.
b.MAX Board Fuse
If so, the fuse is blown on the MAX Board (see section 4.16).
2.If the red and green MAX Board LED's are illuminated, verify the following
test point voltages:
a.Current Ramping Failure
XORB TP1 is approximately 0.150 VDC. If incorrect, go to step d. If this
test point is correct, verify that XORB TP5 is also approximately 0.150
VDC. If this voltage is incorrect, substitute a new Positive High Voltage
Power Supply.
b.Voltage Ramping Failure
XORB TP2 and XORB TP6 are approximately 3.8 VDC. If these voltages
are incorrect, verify that the voltages on XORB TP3 and XORB TP7 are
approximately 3.8 VDC. If TP3 and TP7 are not equal the XORB jumper
at J26 is set in the wrong position. If they are equal but incorrect, test the
cable from the SBC to XORB, or substitute a new SBC Board.
c.X-ray On LED
Test the X-Ray On LED by inserting it into the Power On receptacle. Replace
if defective.
d.High Voltage System
Current ramping has failed. If TP1 and TP5 are zero and do not change,
check the polarity of the High Voltage Cables. The X-ray Insert is
essentially a diode, and will not conduct current from the anode to the
cathode.
If either of the test points is at 1.0 VDC, the High Voltage Power Supply is
delivering as much current as it possibly can, and has automatically
limited the voltage.
Check TP2 and TP6. If the voltage is approximately 3.8 VDC, the voltage
has been set properly.
Feel the heat sinks on the back of the High Voltage Power Supplies. If one of
the power supplies is cold, this is usually the defective one. If one is warm and
the other is hot, replace the hot one. The best troubleshooting technique may
be to substitute power supplies.
If either TP2 or TP6 are incorrect, the possibility exists that one of the
High Voltage Cables or the Tube Head is shorted. The short may be
possible to find with an ohm meter, but often it takes several kV to break
down the defective component. It will be difficult to troubleshoot this
problem by any method other than part substitution.
Do not attempt to ramp the power supply above 50
kv without a cable connected, or arcing will occur
near the connector.
Ramping between 40 and 50 kV is a good way to determine whether the
power supplies are able to increase voltage from 0 to 50 kV.
4.9.3 Decreasing Reference Counts

A long term, continuous decrease in the Reference Counts unaccompanied
by a change in Reference Ratio is a serious problem. A count rate of at least
500,000 Low Channel Reference Counts is necessary to maintain precision of
results when scanning thick patients. Reference Count values should change
by less than 10% from the day of installation. The possible causes are:
I.Lead Filings - Shutter Wear
A rough edge around the shutter aperture may be wearing away on the tube
head below. The lead filings fall off the shutter aperture and gather on the filter
below, causing a reduction in x-rays over time. Any wear should be easily
visible on the underside of the shutter paddle. If there is visible wear, the lead
dust must be removed from the top of the filter. The Collimator assembly must
be removed, the filter cleaned, and then the Collimator assembly reinstalled
and realigned.
II.A Change in Current Control Settings
Use the Signal monitor option of the service software program to produce xrays (Tools/Diagnostics? Scanner X-Ray). Select 76 kV and 750 A operation.
Verify that the SBC is properly controlling the current. TP11 of the MAX
board should be approximately 0.75 volts. This voltage is dependent on
feedback information from the power supplies, which makes it difficult to
troubleshoot by any means other than SBC substitution.
Check the current through the X-ray Insert. The absolute value of the
voltage at test points 1 and 5 on the XORB board is proportional to the
current through the X-ray Insert. 1 millivolt is equal to 1 micro-ampere of
current. A current setting of 750 A should give a reading of 0.750 VDC
at test points 1 and 5. If either of these voltages vary from the expected
by more than 10 millivolts, the MAX board could be at fault. If TP1 and
TP5 are more than 15 millivolts apart, substitute new high voltage power
supplies.
4.10 Arcing
The X-ray Tube Head Insert is an evacuated glass enclosure. An AC current
is applied to the filament inside the insert. It glows like the filament in a light
bulb, and electrons are boiled off into the evacuated space. A high voltage is
applied between the anode and the cathode causing electrons to rush toward
the anode, striking it and creating x-rays. As long as the insert is properly
evacuated, there can be no internal arc. However, no insert can be totally
evacuated and impurities can be ionized creating a lightning like effect; arcing.
During the arc the resistance of the insert is dramatically decreased and a
large amount of current flows.
The significant amounts of electromagnetic energy released inside the
scanner can cause problems with the electronics of the scanner system
and may result in abnormal operations of the scanner. An arcing scanner
will have one or more of the following symptoms:
complete lock up of the system
a diagnostic error code message which is undefined or inappropriate
a vertical stripe or artifact in the image of the patient's scan (effects all 16
detectors at once)
Transverse Motion Failure message.

To specifically locate the source of an arc, it is necessary to find out which
high voltage power supply provides the excessive current. This may be done
by recording the power supply current monitors at TP1 and TP5 of the XORB
board with a storage oscilloscope. An arc typically draws 1.5 mA from the
power supply for about 1 ms. The trigger voltage should therefore be set at
1.5V for TP1 and for TP5.
Arcing can also occur inside the high voltage connectors. This will
usually result in a plainly visible black or brown carbon track through the
grease on the connector. In any case, once the high voltage connectors
have been removed from the Tube Head and the power supplies, they
should not be re-connected without first being cleaned and regreased
(see procedure DXSE0002 in the chapter 5 appendices).
After cleaning the old grease off of the connectors, they should be
carefully inspected for carbon tracks. Look for these tracks on both the
rubber cable connectors and on the phenolic sockets of the Tube Head.
If such tracks are found after cleaning, the following are the options for
returning the scanner to service:
If carbon tracks are found on the rubber cable connectors, they can be
removed by excising the damaged section with a sharp blade. Severe
tracks can burn quite deep into the rubber, so care must taken to remove
all the damaged rubber. After the carbon tracks have been removed,
additional grease must be used when repacking the connection to fill in
the volume of the removed rubber.
If the above procedure requires too much rubber to be removed, or the
carbon track looks very severe, another option is to replace the high
voltage cable.
Arc tracks will be impossible to see on the sockets in the Tube Head.
Therefore, if arc tracks are seen on the rubber cable connectors, the
sockets should be sanded with emory cloth as a precaution. After
sanding the socket, remember to flush the socket with cleaning solution
to remove any particles.
If the tracking inside the socket is too severe or the carbon track cannot
be removed, another option is to replace the Tube Head.
Note:
IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO REMOVE ANY CARBON

TRACKS ON THESE SURFACES! Carbon tracks that are
simply covered by grease or not completely removed will still
provide a path for arcs to follow.
4.10.1 Limit Switch Tripped During Scan

If a Limit Switch is tripped during an install test, verify the Limit Switches'
location with the Service Software (Tools/Diagnostics/Scanner Motion). If this
problem occurs any time after install, see the problem description below.
If the transverse mechanics of the scanner become imprecise, it may cause a

Limit Switch to be tripped during a scan. This will usually only happen during a
total body scan or during an Alignment Test test since both of these scans
involve full-width scanning. Once the switch is closed, the motors stop, the
End-of-Exposure Alarm sounds, the amber SHUTTER OPEN lamp turns off
and after a few seconds a Diagnostic Failure appears on the screen.
During full-width scanning, the Detector Carriage comes very close to the
Limit Switches, so any imprecision will cause a Limit Switch to be tripped
and the scan will be aborted with a Diagnostic Failure message for
Transverse Motion Failure.
A cause of this problem is a loosening of the first drive Reduction Belt which
connects the Transverse Motor to the first Reduction Pulley. This loosening
causes the belt to "walk" on the pulleys causing enough imprecision in the
motion to trip a switch. To tighten the belt, first remove the Pulley Shroud and
loosen all four nuts that hold the motor in place. Then, while holding the motor
such that the belt is pulled taught, tighten the nuts to secure the motor in
place. Replace the shroud and test the scanner (an Alignment Test test works
well).
If the Tube Head cables come into contact with the cable bundle entering the
cable track, it may be impossible for the scanner to complete all of the
necessary transverse steps away from the operator. Consequently, on each
scan line the detector will move closer to the front transverse limit switch, and
the switch may be eventually closed. Form the cable bundle exiting from the
cable track into an arch such that the Tube Head cables will move under the
arch rather than running into the bundle. This arch must not be too high. If it is,
there will not be sufficient slack in the Tube Head cable bundle to allow the
Tube Head to move to the front transverse limit switch. Also, if the arch is too
small, it may cause too much slack when the Tube Head is at the forward side
of the table. This causes the Tube Head cable bundle to rub against the inside
of the front panel causing a scraping noise to be heard. If the above does not
solve the problem then check the other mechanical components. Electrical
components that could cause such a failure are the Centent Motor Controller,
the Transverse Motor, the FOINK board or the SBC board.
4.11 Imaging Problems

4.11.1 White, or Grey in the first or second scan line:
The software is not perfect in its ability to determine the correct grey level of
the entire scan based on the first line of data. Sometimes the grey levels will
be set incorrectly during acquisition. During analysis the grey level is easily
adjusted to give a good image, and the results are not affected by this imaging
problem. This problem is most often found on very thin patients. Adding extra
tissue equivalent material (rice bag or saline solution) to a very thin patient
may be all that is necessary to cure the symptom.
4.11.2 Femur Scan Problems
Most image discontinuity problems occur in femur images performed at 3 mA

on thin or osteoporotic subjects. These lines usually occur in the trochanter
area where the x-ray beam is least attenuated by tissue.
These lines are caused by Automatic Gain Stabilizer (AGS) trying to adjust
the input signal which is at an excessively high count rate. However, the AGS
is not at fault, and the correct action is for the customer to attenuate the x-ray
beam. Lunar normally recommends placing a rice bag (on its side to create 12
cm of patient thickness in the x-ray beam) along the side of the patient's thigh
for thin or osteoporotic patients.
4.11.3 AP-Spine Image Problems: Probable causes

the shutter closes (causes the shutter open lamp to go out, and the End
of Exposure Alarm to sound).
increase or reduction of high voltage to the detector (causes horizontal
artifacts in the image).
loss of the signal from the detector (this effects all 16 detectors at once)
loss of current to the x-ray insert filament (28 volt power supply error
message, the orange lamp to go out, and the End of Exposure Alarm to
sound).
bad x-ray relay contacts (providing power to tube head power supplies)
reduction in AC Line voltage
loss of proper high voltage on the x-ray tube
faulty operation of the AGS system (white lines are short and found only
where scan lines move from air into tissue).
arcing (may cause vertical artifacts in the image)
4.11.4 Broken Signal Cable

The cables which carry the voltage to the detector and return the signal from
the detector array are part of the upper and lower cable bundle assemblies.
Any break or significant pinch of the cable can cause reduction in counts in
either or both channels. This could result in horizontal artifacts which effect all
16 detectors at once.
4.11.5 Loss of tube head current

The tube head control cable contains the wires which provide power to the
filament transformer. If the wire to the transformer center tap breaks, the xrays will stop, the orange lamp will go off, and the end-of-exposure alarm will
sound. If either of the other two wires break, the MAX board fuse will blow.
Always ask the operator if a "ping" sound (the end of exposure alarm) is
heard, and whether the Shutter Open or X-Ray On lamp turns off. In the case
of a tube head current problem, the X-Ray On light will turn off.
4.11.6 X-Ray Relay Failure
See section 4.16.
4.11.7 Unstable AC Line

If the customer's AC line conditions are unstable, voltages 11% below the
scaners AC input configuration will begin to drop the high voltage on the x-ray
tube. The counts will drop significantly with only a change of a few kV.
However, this normally causes black or dark grey lines in the scan image.
4.11.8 Arcing
If the tube head is arcing, the arcs will be more likely to occur at the higher
current settings. Arcing generally also causes other strange symptoms such
as:
Scanner stops in the middle of a patient or QA scan with no error
message or with transverse mechanics fail
The QA scan fails intermittently on bone chamber measurements
The scanner periodically leaves the message on the screen "Starting Xrays Please Wait" for a longer than normal period of time (more than 10
seconds)
If you see arcing symptoms, try the following service action:
1.View the Quality Assurance History (see section 4.15). In particular note the
trend in BM Values as discussed in the Failing QA's section of this chapter.
If there is evidence of failures in the mean BM value:
2.Repack the high voltage connections as described in the chapter 5
appendices. Note if an arc track is visible in the insulation compound.
3.Replacement of the tube head if no arc tracks are discovered, or if the
repacking of the connectors does not eliminate all arcing symptoms.
Summary
Except for the x-ray relay, the cause of the problem will be difficult to find. Try
to obtain some additional information. If the customer is hearing the end-ofexposure alarm, or seeing the yellow x-ray on lamp flickering, you can deduce
the tube head control cable is bad. Likewise, it is possible to decide on the
shutter/collimator/fan cable. In the case of no alarm or lamp indications, or in
the case where large deviations occur in the peak, the upper and lower cable
bundles should be replaced, as problems with the coaxial cable will be too
expensive to troubleshoot.
4.12 Failing Alignment Test Results

4.12.1 Image
The Image is a graphic illustration of the counts recorded during the

Alignment Test. A good image has a black field with evenly distributed grey
dots and perhaps a few randomly distributed dots of various colors (green or
blue usually).
Figure 4-6. Failing Ailigment Test

A poor Deviation Image will have lines, streaks or spots (indicating counts
higher or lower than expected). When the image is analized, click first on
points and then back to results, this will typically point type failing points (they
will have a yellow box around them).
The information tab (see figure 4-2) will show the test outcome (pass /
fail).
Lines or streaks going longitudinally in the image indicate an alignment
problem. Recheck the alignment of the scanner including the levelness of
the scanner. Also, check the scanner frame for any bending that may
have occurred at the site or during shipment.
Lines or streaks going transversely across the Alignment Test image

indicate a problem with the AGS, on the Detector Daughter Board in the
detector array. Again, replace parts until a passing Alignment Test is
obtained.
Troubleshooting tip: if the Alignment test can be run with the Alignment
Aperture on, this will make the test more sensitive as the beam will be
further collimated to the exact size of the detector. Any failures (beam
straying off the detector) will be exaggerated.
4.13 Indicator Failures

4.13.1 X-ray On LED Blinking
The amber X-RAY ON LED should glow steadily once it is illuminated, until
the x-rays are turned off. If the X-RAY ON LED blinks while the shutter is open
for a patient scan, the End of Exposure Alarm should sound.
The amber LED is controlled by a comparator on the FOINK Board. This LED
illuminates when approximately 40A (or greater) of current is passing
through the X-ray Insert. On Spellman system scanners the amber light may
appear to fade out slowly when x-rays are ramped down. This due to the
Spellman power supplies bleeding off current and is not a problem.
If the voltage ramping fails, the High Voltage Power Supplies must be shut
completely off before a second ramping attempt is made. If the amber X-RAY
ON LED turns on momentarily, then turns off for a few seconds before coming
on steadily, the system is having difficulty ramping the high voltage. One of the
High Voltage Power Supplies may be defective.
The SBC does not monitor the Insert current once the proper level has been
reached. Therefore, if the current to the Insert is interrupted, the SBC will not
recognize the problem and will not alert the computer, or terminate the
exposure.
If the X-RAY ON LED blinks once the x-ray high voltage has been set, there
must be a problem in one of the following areas:
Tube Head Control Cable-The most likely cause of an intermittent
problem in this circuit is a broken wire in the Tube Head Control Cable.
The Red wire is most likely the broken one, as a broken blue or black
wire should blow the MAX Board Fuse. Turn the scanner off and test for
continuity between MAX Board test points TP4, TP5, and TP13.
MAX Board-The MAX Board may be operating intermittently. Substitute a
replacement MAX Board.
4.13.2 Shutter Open LED Blinking
The amber Shutter Open LED is controlled by the Limit Switch on the Shutter/
Collimator Assembly. If the Limit Switch is defective or improperly adjusted,
the Shutter Open LED may be switched on and off. This will usually be
accompanied by the sound of the End of Exposure Alarm if an exposure is
underway.
If the Shutter is actually opening and closing intermittently and uncontrollably,
the problem is either on the FOINK, or a broken wire between the FOINK and
the Shutter/Collimator Assembly. Remove connector J11 from the FOINK
Board and measure the resistance between pin 5 and pin 6. This will be a
measurement of the resistance of the Shutter Solenoid and the cable through
the Cable Track. If the problem occurs on every scan, run a scan while
making this continuity check. If the cable and solenoid seem to be working
properly, substitute a new FOINK Board.
4.13.3 Shutter Not Operating

If the Shutter Solenoid will not open, the problem may be caused by one of the
following:
The Shutter Open LED-If the Shutter Open LED fails, a properly
operating FOINK board will prevent operation of the Shutter Solenoid.
Check the LED for continuity, replace it, or substitute a working amber
LED temporarily.
Solenoid Cable-Remove J11 from the FOINK Board and check continuity
between pin 5 and 6 (see Shutter Open LED Blinking above).
FOINK Board-Replace the FOINK Board.
4.13.4 End of Exposure Alarm During Scan

If the sharp "Ping" sound of the End of Exposure Alarm is heard during a
scan, look at the computer display to see if a Diagnostic Failure Code is being
reported. If so, see section 4.1.
If no Diagnostic Failure Code is reported, the scanner may still be in motion
continuing with the scan. Abort the scan and remove the patient from the
table. In any case, note the status of the SHUTTER OPEN light and the XRAY ON light.
Both the SHUTTER OPEN light and the X-RAY ON light are on and
steady. This would indicate a faulty FOINK board. Replace it
The SHUTTER OPEN light is off. This could indicate the following:
The LED becomes defective during the scan and since the shutter
solenoid and this light are wired in series, the Shutter closed and the
Alarm sounded.
The cable to the amber Shutter Open light broke during the scan with the
same result as above.
The shutter solenoid failed and the Shutter closed followed by the Alarm
sounding.
The FOINK is faulty.

The SBC is faulty.
The X-RAY ON light is off. This could indicate the following:
X-ray production has halted. This turns off the X-ray On light and sounds
the Alarm.
4.14 Communications Failures

Should the scanner, host computer and or Detector Mother Board lose
communications with each other, there are a number of things to check:
A good troubleshooting tool is the COMM test in Tools/Service Options COMM tab.
Check
the I/O cable connections at the serial port on the back of the Host
computer and at the SBC. Be sure both connections are tight and that
the thumb screws are used to hold the connectors firmly together.
inspect the connector on the SBC. This connector is very fragile and may
have been damaged. Be very careful when connecting the I/O cables to
the SBC.
Check and inspect the Signal Cable input at the SBC
Check the Connection at the Detector Mother Board and the Bulkhead,
where the two halves of the signal cable meet.
Verify the power LEDs on the SBC are lit (See section 4.19)
Verify that the Power LEDs and PLD programming LEDs are lit on the
DMB (see section 4.21)
If the ports are properly configured and all power is present, and
communication still fails, then the probable causes are:
A faulty I/O cable.
A faulty SBC.
A faulty serial port / serial port card.
Replacement of these parts is the best troubleshooting method.
4.15 Viewing Quality Assurance Trends

DPX-NT software includes the capability to view, print or graph data contained
in the Quality Assurance database. View and print display selected results of
many of the tests run during the Daily Quality Assurance in tabular form. The
graph feature will graph the results of only one of the Quality Assurance
parameters. All features allow for the user to select the time period to be
examined.
4.15.1 What to Look for in the QA History

All categories should remain steady over time. Check the PASSED column for
failed QAs. If a failing QA is found, try to determine the cause, including
operator error.
The limit for % Spillover is 13%.
If any sudden jumps are noticed in the values of any of the categories,
determine first if these are due to service work such as a Tube Head
replacement. If service work causes a shift in the QA values, then compare
present values to those obtained only after the service.
4.16 MAX Board Troubleshooting

The MAX board controls the current through the X-ray Insert in the Tube
Head. DPX-NT scanners use MAX version 02B currently.
The current at a given kV across the insert is a function of insert filament
temperature. The MAX board adjusts the current by regulating the filament
temperature to provide the proper current as set by the SBC. The relationship
is Insert A X 1000 = SBC input (in volts DC), so for an SBC input of 5VDC,
Insert A = 5000.
The Positive High Voltage Power Supply has a current monitor output (mA
MONITOR); the voltage at this output is proportional to the current passing
through the X-ray Insert. This monitor voltage is connected to the MAX board
as feedback (mA FEEDBACK).
What to look for
Make sure that all connectors are fully seated.
Check Lemo connectors for loose parts.
Check for loose wires on the insulation displacement connectors.
Check the position of the shorting jumpers on pin headers JB1, JB2, and
JB3 for: Be sure pins 1 and 2 are connected as indicated by silk screen.
When the X-ray Relay is on, both the red and green LED's on the MAX board
should be illuminated. If both are out, no power is getting to the MAX board. If
only the red LED is lit, then the MAX board fuse is burned out or missing.
Electrical tests
When the board is powered up, and x-rays are being generated, the following
measurements may be performed:
With a VOM set on 200 VDC, you should measure about 18 to 21 VDC on
TP's 4, 13 and 5 referenced to TP3 (GND).
Note:
If an oscilloscope is available, you should see about 18 to 21

VDC on TP13. However, TP 4 & 5 should have a 36 to 42 volt
peak square wave. A VOM will show the average value of the
square wave, i.e. 18 to 21 VDC.
4.17 FOINK Board Troubleshooting

The FOINK is a multipurpose interface board designed for use with the DPXNT. Operation is both analog and digital.
Optical isolation is used to isolate the +26VDC supply from the +5VDC and
+12VDC (logic) supplies, and eliminate interference between the motor
circuits and the event (detector) signals.
What to look for
Figure 4-7. FOINK Diagnostic LEDs

FOINK LEDs:
A - (D10) Longitudinal OMI, when this LED flashes, the Longitudinal OMI
infrared beam is
B - (D9) Transverse OMI, when this LED flashes, the Longitudinal OMI
infrared beam is
C- (D8) X-ray on (28 VDC supply), when this LED is lit when the +28
VDC power supply is on
D - (D7) Mechanics engage, when LED is out the motor(s) are enabled
E - (D6) - Errors Clear, must be lit - out when FOINK detects an error
(failsafe)
F - (D5) Reset when this LED is lit the SBC is in Reset
4.18 OMI Board Troubleshooting

The OMI board, being a rather uncomplicated device, has little in the way of
things to watch for in installation and use. There are three such boards, one
on the Front Longitudinal Carriage (transverse), at the foot of the scanner on
the longitudinal idler shaft (longitudinal), and on the collimator (shutter open
detect).
What to look for
Check the connector to each board for proper seating.
Examine the area where the wires attach to the board itself; it is possible
the may fray or break.
Insure that the interrupter disk does not rub against the plastic detector
housing. If it does, adjust by loosening the two machine screws that
attach the plastic detector, reposition the detector and re-tighten the
screws.
Electrical tests
The signal from the OMI board is nominally rectangular in shape. The signal is
generated when the Interrupter Disk alternately passes and occludes a light
beam between the two posts on the photo-transducer. With the beam
occluded by the disk, the output signal should be about 5 VDC (close counts).
When the beam is allowed to pass through a slot in the disk, the signal output
is near ground potential (see FOINK troubleshooting 4.17).
Symptoms of possible OMI failure
Scanner shuts down at the beginning of a patient scan.
Scanner shuts down unexpectedly during a scan.
Either condition above should be accompanied by a Diagnostic Failure
Transverse or Longitudinal (see section 4.0).
4.19 SBC Troubleshooting

The SBC consists of a single circuit board that uses the 8032 microprocessor
with a RS-422 interface to the Host PC and a RS-422 interface to the Detector
Motherboard (DMB)
The SBC is located on the electronics pan in the front center.
Figure 4-8. DPX-NT SBC highlight indicates the location of the diagnostic
LEDs
Figure 4-9. DPX-NT SBC Diagnostic LEDs

What to look for
Green LED (C in figure 4-5) is on then you have +5VDC to the board.
Red LED (A in figure 4-5) is on then you have +12VDC to the board.
Amber LED (B in figure 4-5) is on then you have -12VDC to the board.
Red LED (E in figure 4-5) is the DTR reset line, when this LED is lit, the
Detector, FOINK, or SBC are detecting an error.
When the DTR Reset Line is lit:
Check the LEDs on the DMB (see section 4.21)
Check the FOINK LEDs
Check the Signal Cable
The Service Software can be used to verify communications between the
Host / SBC and the DMB.
Go to Tools - Service Options - Communications Tab - test
communications
Red LED (D in figure 4-5) the scanner Reset, when this LED is lit, the
communications with the Host PC are in Reset.
Verify port settings on the Host PC (See DXPC 2000, chapter 5
Appendices)
Verify communications cable
Green LEDs (G and H in figure 4-5) flash when data is being received by
the SBC
Green LED (F in figure 4-5) is not assigned a function at this time.
The reset button near the communications cable connector causes a reset
signal at the SBC microprocessor. Also, disconnecting the serial cable will
cause a reset state until the cable is re-attached and communications
reinstated.
4.20 XORB Troubleshooting

The XORB board routes a number of important signals to the rest of the
system and protects the system from transients by shunting them to ground
with transorbs.
What to look for
All connectors firmly seated.
Check to see that all wires and cables are firmly affixed to their
respective connectors. Pay particular attention to Lemo connectors,
since the jam nuts on the connectors are prone to be loose.
Check and tighten, if necessary, all mounting screws for the XORB
board.
Electrical Tests
Measure impedance between XORB ground plane and the electrical
pan. It should be less than an ohm.
There should be no low impedance (less than 10 ohms) reading between
any signal or signal ground and chassis ground on the XORB when the
as-associated signal connectors are disconnected.
The following test points should have the following readings:
Table 4-12. XORB Test Points
Test Point
kV
mA
Limits
TP 1
76
.750
0.74 - 0.76
TP 5
76
.750
0.74 - 0.76
TP 1
76
3.00
2.97 - 3.03
TP 5
76
3.00
2.97 - 3.03
TP 2
76
.750
3.76 - 3.84
TP 6
76
.750
3.76 - 3.84
4.21 Detector Motherboard Troubleshooting
Figure 4-10. DMB Diagnostic LEDs
Diagnostic LEDs in figure 4-6

A - (Green) Power +12 VDC Present
B - (Green) Power - 12 VDC Present
If the 12 VDC power LEDs are not illuminated power down the
scanner, wait 30 seconds and power back up (see section Chapter
2.1.2)
Check +5, +/-12 VDC Power Supply 1
C - (Green) DMB PLD Programmed and ready
If the DMB PLD LED is not lit verify FIRMWARE version with the
Service Software (Tools/Set Download Parameters / Query), if
necessary download to the DMB.
D - (Green) DDB 1 PLD Programmed
Verify the DDB card is seated in its socket
E - (Green) DDB 2 PLD Programmed
F - (Green) DDB 3 PLD Programmed
G - (Green) DDB 4 PLD Programmed
H - (Red) Data Sent to SBC (should flash when acquiring data)
I - (Red) Data Sent to SBC (should flash when acquiring data)
J - (Green) Detector Reset
Verify Communications with the SBC
Verify All DC voltages are Present on the DMB
K - (Green) +5 VDC present
Check +5, +/-12 VDC Power Supply 1
L - Detector Mother Board Reset Button
4.22 Detector Daughter Board Troubleshooting
Figure 4-11. Test Point Board

The Test point board gives the service engineer access to all of the signals for
the individual Detector Daughter Boards
The Test Point Board is broken into 2 areas:
Analog Signals
DMB Controlled Programming Information (same data to all DDB PLDs
FIRMWARE from DMB Flash RAM)
DCA REF - DCA Reference Levels - High and Low Energy Reference
Levels for event counting windows
LEL = 1.19 VDC
LEH = 1.66 VDC
HEL = 1.96 VDC
HEH = 2.79 VDC
AGS REF AGS Reference Levels - High and low Energy
CENTER = 2.35 VDC
LOWER = 2.00 VDC
Detector Bias Setting (BIAS =.450VDC)
+5 VDC Ref (+5.00 VDC)
- 5 VDC Ref (-5.00 VDC)
Individual Detector Signals (Stored in DMB Flash RAM)

GAIN - combination of Peak and AGS signal gain - setting for Shaping
Amplifier - visible only with Oscilloscope
AGS - AGS amplify or Attenuate signal - visible only with Oscilloscope
BiPolar - Bipolar signal out of the shaping Amplifier
Digital Signals
AGS ROLL - logic signal for AGS rollover - this signal is not currently
utilized by the software
LE - Low Energy Event detected and counted
HE - High Energy Event detected and counted
SAMPLE - Sample clock signal
AGS ENABLE - Operate Calibrate signal - locks out AGS for Peaking
operation
5 1 Service Procedures
Chapter 1:Service Procedures
This chapter contains procedures for testing and replacing parts.

The appendices are all uncontrolled copies of GMP documents
and as such are subject to change without notice.
5.0 Reloading LUNAR Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-155
5.1 Peaking the Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-155
5.1.1 Peaking Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-155
5.2 Tube Head Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-156
5.2.1 Shelf Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-157
5.2.2 Mounting The Tube Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-157
5.3 Lower Cable Bundle Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-157
5.3.1 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-157
5.4 Upper Cable Bundle Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-160
5.4.1 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-160
5.5 Tube Head Control Cable Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-162
5.5.1 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-162
5.6 Tests to Perform after Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-165
5.7 Returning Parts To LUNAR (For International Distributors) . . . . . . 5-166
PRODIGY Service Manual (Rev B - 1998)
Service Procedures5153
5-154Service Procedures
5.0
Reloading LUNAR Software

It is sometimes recommended in answer to a particular problem that the
software be reloaded. This can be accomplished by locating the latest version
of the Lunar Software. Please note, it may also be necessary to have the
customers system ID number and feature code.
Note:
BE SURE OF WHICH VERSION OF SOFTWARE IS

PRESENTLY BEING USED! RELOADING OLDER
SOFTWARE CAN DESTROY IMPORTANT DATA.
The about tab under the help menu of the Lunar Prodigy Software shows
which version is presently on the system.
Insert the Lunar System CDROM into the CDROM: drive
Double click on the My Computer icon on the Windows NT desktop
Double click on the CD ROM Drive with the LUNAR Prodigy CDROM in
the drive
Double click the Software Installation ICON
Follow the instructions on the screen until a message is displayed
confirming a successful software load.
Note:
5.1
When new versions of software are released they may not be

loaded in the above manner. BE SURE TO FOLLOW THE
LOADING INSTRUCTIONS THAT ACCOMPANY ALL
SOFTWARE UPDATES.
Peaking the Detector

The Prodigy Detector may need to be repeaked, this is a good diagnostic tool
to use when a detector is suspect.
The actual peak setting of each of the detector elements is done in the
software - on the Detector Mother Board with the data from the Detector
Daughter Board.
5.1.1 Peaking Procedure

1) Go to the Service Mode of the Prodigy Software, open the Spectrum Option
(Tools/Spectrum)
2) Place the brass spillover piece on top of the collimator aperture.
3) Click on the Peak button in the Prodigy Software toolbar.
4) Verify that all values are 2000 +/- 600.
Service Procedures 5-155
5.2
Tube Head Replacement

When a replacement Tube Head is sent to a site in the field for replacement, it
is not ready for immediate installation into the scanner. Some parts from the
old Tube Head must be transferred to the new Tube Head (see list below and
figure 5-1).
These parts are: 1) tilt bar
2) lead ring (around filter area)
3) lead wrap
4) fan bracket
5) nuts, bolts and washers
6) collimator positioning hardware
7) the collimator assembly.
Figure 5-12. DPX Series Tube Head components

Verify that all necessary parts have been transferred to the new Tube Head
before shipping the defective. LUNAR has received defectives with the lead
ring, for example, still in them.
5.2.1 Shelf Life

Many distributors have asked about the shelf life on the Tube Heads in their
stock. The shelf life of the Tube Head is not accurately known, but we feel at
this time that it is over two years. Perform the following Tube Head
inspections on all replacements before mounting them:
1.Check the shelf for oil spots which would indicate that the Tube Head has a
leak. If oil is discovered, return the Tube Head for warranty replacement.
2.Shake the Tube Head and listen for the sound of an air pocket or bubble
inside. If a bubble is discovered, return the Tube Head for warranty
replacement.
Note:
If a Tube Head has been on the shelf for three weeks or more,
perform the warm up procedure described in Procedure
DXAP2001 Prodigy Source Detector Alignment.
5.2.2 Mounting The Tube Head

Use procedure DXSE0000 in this chapter's appendix for repacking the new
Tube Head's high voltage connections, and refer to the installation
procedures, DXAP2001 and DXAP2002 (also in this chapter's appendix), for
tube head mounting and alignment procedures.
5.3
Lower Cable Bundle Replacement

Necessary tools:
1/8" and 5/32" Hex Wrench,
Small Screwdriver
Diagonal Cutters
3/8" Wrench
Large and small wire ties.
5.3.1 Procedure
1.Shut off the power to the scanner.
2.Take off the table top by removing four screws (two at each end).
3.Remove the head and foot end panels. At the foot end of the scan table
unplug the A/C power cable to the scanner.
4.Move the scan arm to the head end of the table.
5. On your new lower cable bundle, use a diagonal cutters to cut the wire ties
holding the cable together, also unfold and read the LUNAR SERVICE
NOTES attached to the new cable bundle.
6.Lay the new cable bundle flat out on the floor. Locate the end with the (2) 16
pin connectors and the yellow and orange Lemo connectors, this is the end
that connects to the bulkhead, this is the end to start the install action from.
7.Locate the bulkhead on the scanner. There are (3) wire ties that hold the
cable bundle in place between the bulkhead and the cable track. Before
cutting any wire ties note the way the cable bundle is tied down and the way
the cable lays before it enters the cable track. The new cable must be
fastened in the same position and lay the same way.
8.Carefully cut the (3) wire ties between the bulkhead and the cable track with
your diagonal cutters. Disconnect the large RS232 connector (Detector Signal
Cable) by unscrewing the two screws on the connector.
9.Next disconnect the two white 16 pin molex connectors. These connectors
have a catch lock located in the center of the housing which must be
depressed to disconnect them from the bulkhead.
10.If you try to remove the cable bundle by pulling it back towards the cable
track you will notice a 3 conductor gray wire cable tied to the high voltage
cable bundle. This wire carries the transverse optical interrupt signal from the
front carriage (we will refer to this wire as the OMI cable). To find the location
of the OMI board and the front carriage follow the OMI cable. On your new
Cable bundle the OMI wire is connected through the bulkhead.
11.To remove the OMI cable push the x-ray tube head all the way to the
outside of the scanner (patients left side), then notice the clearance between
the front panel and the high voltage cable bundle connecting to the x-ray tube
head and the way the cables are tied down as you will need to wire tie them
back the same way.
12.Now you can cut the (4) large wire ties and the (2) small wire ties that hold
down the high voltage cable bundle and OMI cable. Then you can pull the
lower cable bundle back to where it enters the cable track.
13.Next take your small screw driver and pry open (20) of the cable track
plastic retaining clips that hold the cables into the track. These clips pivot at
the back of the cable track and can either be removed or left in the open
position so the cables can be removed.
14.Pull the old cable bundle out of the cable track towards the foot end of the
table.
15.Now install the (3) conductor OMI cable from the bulkhead to the OMI
BOARD. To do this you must remove the white 16 pin connector from the
bulkhead labeled bulkhead 2, this connector is a part of the upper cable
bundle and the new OMI cable will connect into this housing. Note the position
of the wire tie that holds the upper cable bundle in place and then cut it in
order to pull the connector out to install the OMI cable. Note the orientation of
the existing terminals in this bulkhead connector as they slide and lock into
the connector in one direction only. Where the wires enter the connector each
hole is numerically labeled. Put the green wire into hole # 11, and the black
wire into hole # 9, and the red wire into hole # 1.
16.Slide the connector back into the bulkhead bracket the way it came out and
fasten the upper cable bundle with a large wire tie the way it was before the
original wire tie was cut.
17.Route the new OMI cable in the same position as the previous cable and
connect it to the OMI board. Then tie the high voltage cable bundle and the
OMI cable down to the high voltage cable trough,(there are three large wire
ties near the bulkhead, two large wire ties put together to tie the high voltage
cables down at the center of the high voltage cable trough, and two small wire
ties to anchor the OMI cable down to the Bracket before it connects to the
OMI board). Before tightening the wire ties assure that the proper clearances
and no stress is applied at any of the connectors or wires. Tighten the center
cable ties first (two large wire ties put together and located at the center of the
high voltage cable trough). Be sure the high voltage cable bundle does not hit
the front panel when the tube head is all the way toward the outside of the
scanner (patients left). Then tighten the three wire ties near the bulkhead
making sure that the high voltage cables do not hang over into the cut out
space on the high voltage cable trough as they may hit the longitudinal motor
bracket and cause positioning problems.
18.Take the new cable bundle and connect it to the bulkhead by routing the
cable bundle the same way as the replace cable bundle, (note the connectors
are labeled bulkhead 1 and bulkhead 2) and fasten the cable bundle down in
the three spots between the cable track and the bulkhead with wire ties. Lay
the new bundle down into the cable track making sure all the cables lay
parallel to each other. Start replacing the clips to the cable track as far as you
can. Continue the process: remove a few clips, extract the old cable bundle,
add in the new cable bundle, and replace the clips.
19.To finish removing the old and installing the new cable bundle in the lower
portion of the cable track you must remove a screw located at the end of the
cable track. To do this use a 1/8" hex wrench and a 3/8" wrench. Once you
remove the screw you can lift the cable track out of the channel it rides in and
finish prying open the remaining clips. Remove the old cable bundle until it
reaches the cable entrance hole, where all the cables enter the electrical pan
area. Then finish installing the new cable bundle until you reach the cable
entrance hole, finish clipping all the clips and then replace the cable track hold
down screw (do not tighten the screw at this time).
20.Locate where all the wires from the old cable bundle terminate on the
electronics pan. All of the wires are labeled except for the wires that go to the
terminal block. Here is a list of wires that must be disconnected before
removing the cable bundle from the pan area. SBC(J-5), FOINK(J-17),
FOINK(J-12), FOINK(J-14), FOINK(J-5), FOINK(J-8), PMT/AGS(J-11)(J-11 is
the yellow Lemo connector), the orange Lemo connector (connected to the
H.V. Lemo box), then the last three wires connect to the Terminal block. Write
down the number where the orange, blue and yellow wires go to on the
terminal block and disconnect them with your small screwdriver. Carefully pull
the old cable bundle through the cable entrance hole from the pan area. The
old cable bundle may now be discarded.
21.Carefully feed (one connector at a time) the new cable bundle wires
through the cable entrance hole into the pan area. Connect the wires to their
proper locations.
22.Then move the arm all the way down to the foot end of the scan table. At
this time make sure that the Lower cable bundle and the high voltage cable
bundle have some slack where the cables enter the cable track near the
bulkhead area. Then make sure the cable track has at least 1/8" of clearance
from hitting the frame. To adjust this slide the cable track in the trough it rides
in to get the proper clearance, then tighten the screw that holds the cable
track in place with a 1/8" hex wrench and a 3/8" wrench. Move the arm up and
down the scan table to be sure there is nothing wrong with the cable track
motion. Leave the arm at the foot end of the table.
23.Leave a little slack in the cables from the cable track to the pan area to
allow all of the cables to be routed and wire tied exactly like the original
cables.
24.Reconnect the A/C power cord, put the table top, pad, and end panels
back on the scanner.
25.Turn on the scan table, computer, monitor and printer. Perform required
tests per section 6.9 of the Prodigy Service Manual.
5.4
Upper Cable Bundle Replacement

Tools Necessary:
Small Phillips Screwdriver
Small Slot Screwdriver
Diagonal Cutters
Hex Wrench Set
Mini Molex Pin Extractor
Large and Small Wire Ties.
5.4.1 Procedure
1. Turn off the power to the scan table.
2. Remove the table top by removing the two screws at each end.
3. Remove the front panel of the scan table
4. Lastly, remove the column cover of the arm held in place by screws.
5. Remove the upper and lower arm covers by removing the (8) screws that
hold it in place.
6.Open the cable track and cut the wire ties at the end of it. Disconnect all the
cables coming from the cable track and remove the cable bundle as far as the
top of the column (through the hole).
7.Place the new cable bundle in the cable track and connect all cables to their
appropriate positions. Close the cable track and wire tie the cables at the end
of it. Route the cable bundle through the hole in the top of the column.
8.Next locate the Laser On light and disconnect it. Remove this cable to the
top of the column cutting any necessary wire ties.
9.Route the new cable to the Laser On light and connect. Replace any wire
ties removed in step 5.
10.From the back of the arm column follow the cables vertically down and cut
all the wire ties holding the upper cable bundle to the other cable assemblies.
11.Carefully pull the upper cable bundle out towards the back of the arm and
down through the holes in the column.
12.Next cut the wire ties that hold the cables down near the bulkhead, these
are located in the lower rear portion of the arm.
13.Make sure the bulkhead connectors are labeled on both sides of the
bulkhead bracket and then disconnect them.
14.Next remove the two (16) pin Molex housing connectors that are attached
to the upper cable assemblies from the bulkhead bracket. Also disconnect the
large RS 232 connector from the bulkhead bracket. Pull the housings and the
Signal cable connectors out to work on them.
15.Use the mini Molex pin extractor tool and remove from bulkhead 1 pin16
and pin8. From bulkhead 2 (the lower connector) remove pin15, pin16, pin6,
pin7, and pin8.
16.Now remove the old cable bundle by pulling the cable out through the back
of the column. The old cable may now be discarded.
17.Next route the new cable bundle through the column wire tieing as you go.
18.Route the taped end of the cable through the hole at the bottom of the
column to the bulkhead area (follow the other cables that go to the bulkhead).
19.Carefully remove the masking tape from the cable exposing the mini Molex
pins and the Lemo connector. Note the orientation of the existing terminals in
the bulkhead connectors and the numeric labels at each hole of the
connector.
20.Replace the wires one at a time removing the wires from the old cable and
replace them with the wires from the new cable.
21.Insert the connectors into the bulkhead bracket the same way they were
removed and fasten the upper cable bundle with wire ties as original.
22.From the wire tie just fastened, the cables going into the arm column must
not have any slack in the cables (pull the cables from the column area to
remove any slack). Make sure that none of the cables hit any of the moving
parts in the narrow area where the cables come from the back of the column
out to the bulkhead.
23.Mount the column cover back in place and replace the top and bottom arm
covers. Replace the table top, table pad and the head and foot end panels
back on to the scanner.
24.Turn on the power to the scan table. Run Required tests as prescribed in
section 6.9 of the Prodigy service manual.
5.5
Tube Head Control Cable Replacement

Required Tools:
5.5.1 Procedure
1.Switch off the power to the scanner.
2. Remove the tabletop, head and foot end panels. At the foot end of the scan
table unplug the A/C power plug to the scanner.
3.Move the scan arm to the head end of the table.
4.Take the black tape off the high voltage cable bundle at each end of the
sleeving (open any cable track clips that are in the way as in step 8) as well as
any wire ties holding the bundle in place. Next, slide the sleeving away from
the tube head and remove the tape beneath the sleeving. Note the positions
of each cable before removing the tape. The cables must be returned to these
positions.
5.Disconnect the military-style connector and the ground wire (if one exists)
from the tube head and slide the cable out of the black sleeving toward the
cable track.
6.Unplug J3 and J5 on the XORB board. Also, trace the ground wire (if one
exists) from the control cable and disconnect it from the power supply. Cut the
wire ties holding the control cable to the pan.
7.Pry open the plastic retaining clips that hold the cables into the cable track.
These clips pivot at the back of the cable track and can either be removed or
left in the open position to remove the cables. The screw located at the end of
the cable track near the pan must also be removed. Once this screw is
removed the cable track can be lifted out of the channel it rides in and the
remaining clips can be opened. Mark the position of the cable track screw on
the frame to return the track to its original position.
8.Remove the old control cable. Note the position of all the cables in the cable
track. They will need to be returned to the same position during this
procedure.
If the cables are not returned to their
original positions, cable damage will
result.
9.Feed the new cable, military connector first, through the black sleeving on
the high voltage cable bundle starting near the bulkhead. The sleeving can be
expanded by pushing two parts of it together to better fit the connector
through.
10.Once the cable is through the sleeving, connect it to the tube head and
connect the ground wire (see figures 1 and 2). Position the cables next to the
high voltage cable bracket as in figure 1. The collimator control cable should
come out of the cable bundle between the two high voltage cables toward the
back of the scanner. Tape the cables together for several inches with three
layers of electrical tape starting as close to the bracket as possible. Continue
to spiral the tape around the cables as it was originally and finish by taping
three layers for several inches near the bulkhead. Tape the sleeving near the
bulkhead as it was originally. Pull the sleeving tight along the bundle and tape
near the tube head. Wire tie the cables to the tube head high voltage cable
bracket.
Figure 5-13. Profile Cable Routing Diagram
Figure 5-14. Top Down Cable Routing Diagram

11.Lay the control cable in the cable track in the same position as the original
one. Start replacing wire ties between the bulkhead and the tube head. Before
tightening the wire ties assure that there is proper clearance and no stress is
applied at any of the connectors or wires through the entire range of motion.
Tighten the center cable ties first (two large wire ties put together and located
at the center of the high voltage cable trough). Be sure the high voltage cable
bundle does not hit the front panel when the tube head is all the way toward
the front of the scanner. Make sure the high voltage cables do not hang into
the cut out space on the high voltage cable trough. Tighten the three wire ties
near the bulkhead.
12.Replace the clips to the cable track and reattach the track to the scanner
frame.
13.Move the arm to the foot end of the scan table. Check that the lower cable
bundle and the high voltage cable bundle have some slack where the cables
enter the cable track near the bulkhead. Check that the cable track has at
least 1/8" clearance of the frame. To adjust this, slide the track in its trough,
then tighten the screw that holds the track in place. Move the arm up and
down the table to verify that the cable track moves properly.
14.Reconnect the A/C power cord, and replace the table top and end panels.
15.Perform required tests as prescribed in section 6.9 of the Prodigy Service
Manual.
5.6
Tests to Perform after Service
Table 5-13. Tests to Be Performed after Service

Part Replaced or
Procedure
Performed
Primary
Calibration
Secondary
Calibration /
QA
Phantom
Scans
Alignment
Test
+5, +/- 12 VDC

Power Supply
26 VDC Power Supply
28 VDC Power Supply
Detector Mother
Board or Daughter
Board
Detector
Centent
Collimator
Laser
Lower Cable Bundle
MAX, FOINK, or
XORB Board
Motor, Belt, Pulley

or Gears
High Voltage Power

Supply
Tube Head
SBC
Tube Head Control

Cable
Upper Cable Bundle
System Move or
Installation
10
5.7 Returning Parts To LUNAR (For International

Distributors)
Return parts prepaid to Lunar. Please list our customs broker as intermediate
consignee:
Burlington Air Express
6023 S. Howell Ave.
Milwaukee, WI 53237-0140
Shipments of defective parts being returned to LUNAR from international
distributors should add the following instructions to the air bill and proforma
invoice:
DEFECTIVE EXCHANGE SERVICE PART, RETURN TO VENDOR.
NO DUTIES SHOULD APPLY. ALL PARTS ARE MANUFACTURED IN THE
UNITED STATES. FOR CUSTOMS CLEARANCE PLEASE NOTIFY THE
BURLINGTON AIR EXPRESS IMPORT DEPARTMENT:
BURLINGTON AIR EXPRESS IMPORT DEPARTMENT

PHONE:414-482-0700
FAX:414-482-0965
WATS:800-242-3821
Note:
All parts must have a completed RMA tag with them.

Necessary information includes: which system they are from,
and the symptoms each part exhibited in failure should be
described.
NO WARRANTY OR EXCHANGE CREDITS WILL BE GIVEN UNTIL THESE

CONDITIONS ARE MET!
Parts must also be returned within 90 days of LUNAR opening a service
report for them (usually the day they are shipped). All parts not returned within
90 days (warranty or not) will be invoiced for at the distributor price.
Note:
If it is the intention of a distributor to keep a part for their spare

parts stock, they should notify the LUNAR Customer Service
Department. This way, LUNAR may immediately invoice for
such parts and close service reports in a more timely manner.
DOC. ID: DXSE3004

MANUFACTURING PROCEDURES
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
REVISION: A
DATE: 03/06/03
WRITTEN BY: Jeff Allen
APPROVED ON CO: L10597
TITLE: Encore Computer Swap Procedure
PURPOSE
This document provides instructions for replacing and transferring customer data for
Encore computers.
APPLICATION
This document applies toward Encore computers.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
None.
ASSOCIATED MATERIALS
None.
DEFINITIONS
None.
PROCEDURES
1. Computer Swap - Preparation.
The service engineer should contact the customer and determine the following
information:
a. Determine the required software version.
i. Billable customers
1. Bill to upgrade to newest version.
2. No charge and use their current version.
ii. Contract/Warranty
1. A customer in a research study may require a specific
version of software.
2. Would upgrade to the latest available software version
b. Determine the required printer drivers.
i. Ask the customer what kind of printer they are currently using.
QUALITY SYSTEM DOCUMENT
Page 1 of 26
It is the responsibility of the user to verify this document originated from the controlled master and is the active revision prior to use.
This document contains confidential or proprietary information of GE Lunar. Neither the document nor the information therein is to be reproduced, distributed,
used or disclosed, either in whole or in part, except as specifically authorized by GE Lunar.
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXSE3004
REV: A
DATE: 03/06/03
CO: L10597
c. Determine the required archive media.
START
Computer Uses Ls120 or
Zip250?
Ls120
Billible?
No
Zip250
Order a computer
with a LS120
No
Yes
Will customer pay for

media conversion?
More than 10
disks to convert?
No
Order a computer
with a Zip250 drive
Yes
2. Computer Swap - Order Material

a. If the customer does not have required Encore software on site, then order
the customers current software version or the latest revision as required.
i. This is ordered from Kevin Jones in the software department.
Make sure to fill out a shipping form with pertinent information
(system ID, version number, shipping address, and date/time
needed), and email it to Kevin.
ii. As a side note, there could be a charge for replacement or upgrade
software. Contract and Warranty customers do not pay software
replacement or upgrade fees (an upgrade would be anything up to
6.7). Billable customers must pay a $390.00 replacement fee (Rcat
number RF209YJ) or a $1200.00 upgrade fee (Rcat number
RF209SB).
b. Order the appropriate printer drivers if necessary.

i. If the computer that will be installed is Windows XP, then no driver
CD is required. Computers with the Windows NT operating system
and an HP940c or 930c, will require the HP 4.3 CD. The 4.3 HP
Page 2 of 26
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXSE3004
REV: A
DATE: 03/06/03
CO: L10597
driver version is made specifically for the HP930c printer. This

driver will work with the HP940c printer as well. In fact, there are
problems with the HP940c printer driver. This is why the 4.3
printer driver is used for the HP940c printer. This can be ordered
the same way software is from Kevin Jones.
c. Order the appropriate computer via GPO.
i. Below is a list of current computer part numbers. Never order a
computer part number that is older than part number being
replaced.
NT Computers
d. LNR8627
e. LNR40004
LNR40227
LNR40315
LNR40324
LNR40591
LNR40739
MD+ Computers
LNR40010
LNR40229
LNR40317
LNR40326
LNR40593
LNR40741
Prodigy Comp
LNR8683
LNR40228
LNR40316
LNR40325
LNR40592
LNR40740
Description
Omnitech 500 MHz W/ LS-120
Omnitech 566MHz w/ LS-120
Omnitech 776MHz w/ Zip 250
Omnitech 766MHz w/ Zip250
OT 1.2 GHz, 512 Meg RAM, 40 Gig HD,
ZIP250
Descrption
Omnitech 667Mhz w/ Zip 250
ZIP250
Description
Omnitech 500 MHz w/ LS120
ZIP250
3. Computer Swap Procedure

a. Unpack new computer.
b. Connect monitor, mouse and keyboard to new computer.
c. Power on computer.
d. Remove current printer driver.
i. In Windows XP highlight and delete the printer driver.
1. Click on Start/Printers and Faxes.
2. Highlight the installed printer driver.
Page 3 of 26
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXSE3004
REV: A
DATE: 03/06/03
CO: L10597
3. Press the <Delete> key.

4. The computer will ask, Are you sure you want to delete the
printer?. Click YES.
5. A message will appear, Warning: The default printer has
been deleted. Click OK.
ii. In Windows NT you need to use the HP uninstall feature. This is
found by clicking on Start/Programs/Hewlett-Packard/HP Deskjet
xxx series/uninstall. The prompt may vary slightly printer to
printer. Follow the on screen prompts to uninstall the printer. If it
makes you restart the computer you can skip to step 6.
e. Power off computer and connect printer.
f. Power on computer and load appropriate printer driver. If using Windows
XP, the printer driver will load on its own.
g. Enter Encore software and check current software version loaded, system
ID and feature code. Click on: Help/About at the top of the screen to see
this information. *See figure 1 and 2.
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Page 4 of 26
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXSE3004
REV: A
DATE: 03/06/03
CO: L10597
If the System ID and/or the feature code are incorrect, click on: Tools/User
Options/Systems Tab to change them. *See figure 3
Fig. 3
Page 5 of 26
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXSE3004
REV: A
DATE: 03/06/03
CO: L10597
If the software version loaded is older than required, then load the correct
version. If it is too new, then it must be removed from the system and the
correct version must be loaded. Do the following to load older software:
i. Exit Encore.
ii. Go to the Control Panel and click Add/remove programs.
iii. Highlight the appropriate Lunar Program (Prodigy, DpxNT or
DpxMD), and click REMOVE.
iv. In Windows Explorer, delete the C:\Program Files\Lunar or
D:\Program Files\Lunar depending where it was loaded.
v. Delete any directories called C:\Data or D:\data.
vi. Load the appropriate version of Encore software.
vii. When loading make sure to enter the customers System ID and
Feature Code.
h. Verify QA Block Batch Number
The batch number in the Encore software must match, the number on the
QA block. The batch number can be found in Service Options, on the
lower right hand corner of the Calibration tab. It will either be bath 1 or
batch 2. If this number does not match the one on the QA block then
change it appropriately and press Select Batch. Click OK.
i. Database Transfer
**At this point the procedure will vary depending on whether or not archive
media conversion is being performed or not. If the old and new computers
both use the same archive media then use procedure A. If converting
from LS120 to Zip250 use procedure B.
i. Procedure A: New Computer Uses the Same Archive Media As
Old Computer
Page 6 of 26
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXSE3004
REV: A
DATE: 03/06/03
CO: L10597
1. Enter Encore software.

2. Go to the Directory Screen.
3. Create a database for each database being transferred to
the new computer, by clicking on New Database, on the left
hand side of the screen.
*See figure 4 for an example of the New Database window.
a. Name This will normally be Patients, by default.

b. Working Drive - If the new computer has Windows
XP, then the Working Drive, should be D. If Windows
NT, then it should be C.
c. Working Directory - Use Windows Explorer to
examine the last archive disk for the database in
question. Double click on the last archive disk. There
should be an Archive folder. Double click on the
Archive folder to see what folder is located in it. The
working directory should match this folder name.
Always make sure their main database is done first.
d. Allow Archive/Restore from this workstation
This would normally be checked.
e. Archive Drive - will be set to what the drive letter for
the Zip or LS120 drive is in Windows Explorer. This is
usually A for LS120 ands E for Zip drive.
f. Days between Backup Prompt The default value
for this is 7.
g. Click OK, and the New Database window will
disappear.
Fig. 4
Page 7 of 26
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXSE3004
REV: A
DATE: 03/06/03
CO: L10597
4. Click on Edit Database. An Edit Database window will

appear.
a. Set Archive Number to whatever the customers last
disk number was for that database.
b. Click OK. The Edit Database window will disappear.
*See figure 5 for an example of the Edit Database window.
Fig. 5
Page 8 of 26
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXSE3004
REV: A
DATE: 03/06/03
CO: L10597
5. Now the customers main database can be restored onto the

new computer. To do this, click on Directory at the top of
the screen. A drop down menu will appear. Choose
Database Utilities and Restore Backup. *See figure 6
Fig. 6
Page 9 of 26
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXSE3004
REV: A
DATE: 03/06/03
CO: L10597
a. A Restore Backup window will appear. Insert the

customers current archive disk. *See figure 7
Fig. 7
b. There is a file on the Archive disk called

ProdigyBackup.zip. This file must be browsed to, by
clicking on the Browse button. A Browse for Folder
window will appear. *See figure 8
Page 10 of 26
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXSE3004
REV: A
DATE: 03/06/03
CO: L10597
Fig. 8
c. ProdigyBackup.zip is usually located in

A:\Archive\Data. If it is a Zip disk, then it will probably
be E:\Archive\Data. The Data portion of the path
must match the working path of the directory. If the
archive disk is for a database with a working path of
Data2, then it will be Data2 rather than Data.
d. Click OK. The Browse for Folder window will
disappear, revealing the Restore Backup window
again.
e. Under the Backup File Contents section, a list of files
will appear. Click the Select All button. All of the
files will become highlighted. . Only click Select All,
when restoring the customers main database. If
restoring a different database, then just highlight the
Lunar.mdb file. Click OK. *See figure 9
Page 11 of 26
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXSE3004
REV: A
DATE: 03/06/03
CO: L10597
Fig. 9
6. A warning message will appear. Click OK. *See figure 10
Fig. 10
7. A status bar will appear in the lower left hand corner of the
Directory screen. Once it reaches 100%, a window should
appear stating, Backup files have been successfully
restored. Click OK. *See figure 11
Page 12 of 26
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXSE3004
REV: A
DATE: 03/06/03
CO: L10597
Fig. 11
The patient database and all the calibration information should

now be on the new computer.
8. ****If the Restore backup procedure does not work, then repeat
the Restore procedure. If it still does not work, then call Customer
support for help.
9. After the Restore Backup procedure is completed successfully,
perform a database rebuild from the last archive disk. Insert the
last archive disk. This is done in case the last time they archived
they did not perform an Archive All.
10. Click Rebuild Database. Make sure Working Directory is
selected under Source Options. *See figure 12
Fig. 12
11. The Exam List on the left hand side of the window should show all
the scans that are stored on the archive disk. Click Select All. All
of the scans will highlight indicating they are selected.
12. Click OK. The rebuild process will begin indicated by a status bar
at the bottom.
Page 13 of 26
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXSE3004
REV: A
DATE: 03/06/03
CO: L10597
13. When finished a window will appear, Rebuild session completed

successfully. Click OK. This window will disappear and the
rebuild session will be complete. *See figure 13
Fig. 13
ii. Procedure B: New Computer Uses Different Archive Media Than

Old Computer
1. Shut the computer down.
2. Disconnect the power cable to the new computer.
3. Open the computer case of the old computer.
4. Disconnect and remove the LS120 drive from the old
computer.
5. Open the computer case of the new computer.
6. Disconnect the IDE cable from the Zip 250 drive.
7. Disconnect the floppy cable from the motherboard.
8. Disconnect the power cable from the floppy drive.
9. Connect the Zip 250s IDE cable to the LS120 drive.
10. Connect the floppy drives power cable to the LS120.
11. Boot the computer.
12. Press <F2> to go into the BIOS Setup screen as the
computer is booting up. Not all computers will use F2 to
enter BIOS Setup.
13. In the BIOS Setup, disable the floppy controller. How this is
done will vary depending on the BIOS that is on the
computer in question.
14. Save the changes and exit.
15. Let the computer boot into Windows.
16. Run Windows Explorer, and verify the LS120 drive is being
recognized as the A: drive. Try to read an LS120 disk to
verify this.
17. Enter Encore software.
18. Go to the Directory Screen.
19. Create a database for each database being transferred to
the new computer, by clicking on New Database, on the left
hand side of the screen. A New Database window will
appear. *See figure 14
Page 14 of 26
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXSE3004
REV: A
DATE: 03/06/03
CO: L10597
Fig. 14
If the new computer has Windows XP, then the Working Drive,
should be D. If Windows NT, then it should be C. You can tell
what the Working Directory should be, by using Windows
Explorer to examine the last archive disk for the database in
question. Always make sure their main database is done first.
The Archive Drive will be set to A. Click OK, and the New
Database window will disappear.
20. Click on Edit Database. An Edit Database window will
appear. *See figure 15
Fig. 15
Page 15 of 26
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXSE3004
REV: A
DATE: 03/06/03
CO: L10597
21. Now the customers main database can be restored onto the
new computer. To do this, click on Directory at the top of
the screen. A drop down menu will appear. Choose
Page 16 of 26
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXSE3004
REV: A
DATE: 03/06/03
CO: L10597
Fig. 16
22. A Restore Backup window will appear. Insert the customers

first archive disk. *See figure 17
Fig. 17
23. There is a file on the Archive disk called

clicking on the Browse button. A Browse for Folder window
will appear. *See figure 18
Page 17 of 26
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXSE3004
REV: A
DATE: 03/06/03
CO: L10597
Fig. 18
The ProdigyBackup.zip will be located in A:\Archive\Data. The

Data portion of the path must match the working path of the
directory. If the archive disk is for a database with a working
path of Data2, then it will be Data2 rather than Data.
24. Click OK. The Browse for Folder window will disappear,
revealing the Restore Backup window again.
25. Under the Backup File Contents section, a list of files will
appear. Highlight the Lunar.mdb file. Click OK. *See figure
19
Fig.19
Page 18 of 26
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXSE3004
REV: A
DATE: 03/06/03
CO: L10597
Fig. 20
restored. Click OK. *See figure 21
Fig. 21
The patient database from disk 1 should be on the new

computer.
28. Now the customers calibration information can be restored
onto the new computer. To do this, click on Directory at the
top of the screen. A drop down menu will appear. Choose
Page 19 of 26
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXSE3004
REV: A
DATE: 03/06/03
CO: L10597
Fig. 22
29. A Restore Backup window will appear. Insert the customers

last archive disk. *See figure 23
Fig. 23
30. There is a file on the Archive disk called

clicking on the Browse button. A Browse for Folder window
will appear. *See figure 24
Page 20 of 26
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXSE3004
REV: A
DATE: 03/06/03
CO: L10597
Fig. 24
The ProdigyBackup.zip will be located at A:\Archive\Data. The

Data portion of the path must match the working path of the
directory. If the archive disk is for a database with a working
path of Data2, then it will be Data2 rather than Data.
31. Click OK. The Browse for Folder window will disappear,
revealing the Restore Backup window again.
32. Under the Backup File Contents section, a list of files will
appear. Click the Select All button. All of the files in the
Backup File Contents will be highlighted. Hold the <Ctrl>
button down and single click the Lunar.mdb file to deselect
it. Click OK. *See figure 25
Fig. 25
Page 21 of 26
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXSE3004
REV: A
DATE: 03/06/03
CO: L10597

Fig. 26
restored. *See figure 27
Fig. 27
At this point all the calibration information from the old

computer should be on the new computer.
****If the Restore backup procedure does not workthen repeat the
process. If it still does not work then call Customer support for help.
35. On the directory screen, click the Restore button at the top of the
screen. *See figure28
Fig. 28
36. A Restore window will appear. Place a dot next to the choice,
Restore all exams for all patients. This will be worded Restore
Page 22 of 26
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXSE3004
REV: A
DATE: 03/06/03
CO: L10597
all images for all patients, in older software versions. Click OK.
*See figure 29
Fig.29
37. The computer will ask you to insert Disk 1. *See figure 30
Fig. 30
Place the archive disk 1 in the LS120 drive and click OK. The
computer will commence moving the image or exam files from archive
disk 1 to the database directory.
38. Once completed, disk 1 should be devoid of scan files. Exit out of
the Encore software.
39. In Windows Explorer, copy just the scan files from disks 2 and up,
into the database directory. *** Call customer support if you
run into problems copying scan files to the database directory.
40. After all the scan files from all the archive disks reside in the
database directory, they must be rebuilt in the Encore software.
Open up the Encore software and go to the Directory screen.
41. On the left hand side of the screen, click Rebuild Database. *See
figure 31
Page 23 of 26
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXSE3004
REV: A
DATE: 03/06/03
CO: L10597
Fig. 31
42. A Rebuild Database window will appear. Make sure Working

Directory is set under Source Options. A list of scan files should
appear in the left hand side of the window. Click the Select All
button. All the scan files should be highlighted. Click OK. *See
figure 32
Fig. 32
Page 24 of 26
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXSE3004
REV: A
DATE: 03/06/03
CO: L10597
43. The computer will commence a rebuild. A status bar will appear
in the lower left hand corner of the screen. It will be finished when
100% is reached. *** If the rebuild completes with errors,
make sure that the customer has all the correct features
activated. If not change feature code to activate them and
repeat rebuild process.
44. Repeat steps 21 to 43 for any additional databases. Do not perform
the second Restore from backup in steps 29 through 34 for
databases other than the main one.
45. Once all the databases are restored and rebuilt back into the new
computer, exit out of Encore and shut the computer down.
46. Disconnect the LS120 drive from the new computer.
47. Reconnect the floppy cable to the floppy drive, along with the
appropriate power cable.
48. Reconnect the IDE cable back to the Zip250 drive.
49. Close case and boot computer.
50. As the computer is booting up, press <F2> to enter the BIOS
setup.
51. Re-enable the Floppy controller.
52. Save the changes and exit. Let the computer boot up.
53. In Windows, verify that the floppy drive can read floppy disks and
is being recognized as drive A:. Verify the drive letter assigned to
the Zip250 drive.
54. Enter the Encore software.
55. On the Directory screen, click on Edit Database on the right hand
side of the screen. *See figure 33
Fig. 33
Page 25 of 26
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXSE3004
REV: A
DATE: 03/06/03
CO: L10597
56. An Edit Database window will appear. Change the Archive Drive
to the drive letter assigned to the Zip drive. Click Ok.
57. Repeat steps 55 and 56 for each database.
58. Archive each database to Zip250 disks.
4. Computer Swap Quality Assurance
a. Perform a QA.
b. Measure a phantom
c. Analyze the phantom
d. Print
e. Archive
f. Open and print 3 different patient scans.
i. Compare these to printouts obtained from the customer to ensure
they are the same.
GENERATED RECORDS
List any documentation that is produced as a result of, or to provide evidence of
a task being completed; specifically quality records. If none type None.
ex. EXMA0004 - Expert Base Initial Electrical Assembly Quality Record
Page 26 of 26
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC. ID: DXAP2000

REVISION: N
DATE: 8/13/01
WRITTEN BY: Jeff Franz
APPROVED ON CO: 7012
TITLE: Prodigy Installation Work Instructions
PURPOSE
This procedure describes the steps necessary to assemble a PRODIGY scanning system
at a customer's site, and to assure that the system is operating within GE-LUNAR's
specifications and in compliance with applicable Federal and State regulations.
APPLICATION
This procedure applies to all employees performing installation of a PRODIGY scanning
system.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
The x-ray generator produces a beam of ionizing radiation. The technician should take
precautions to avoid exposing any part of their body to the x-ray beam. The PRODIGY
scan table contains high voltages, the technician should take precautions to prevent
electric shock.
DXAP0002
DXAP2001
DXAP2003
DXAP2004
DXAP2010
DXAP2013
DXAP2015
DXAP2023
DXAP2024
DXAP2025
DXQC2022
DXPC2000
DXAP3030
DEXA External Options Installation Procedure

PRODIGY Source/Detector Alignment
PRODIGY Installation Test Procedures
PRODIGY Installation Report
enCORE Centerline Offset Procedure
PRODIGY Split Frame Installation Procedure
PRODIGY Arm Slot Cover Installation
PRODIGY USA Label Instructions
PRODIGY Canada Label Instructions
PRODIGY France Label Instructions
PRODIGY Aluminum Spine Phantom Scan Procedure
DPX-Fan/DPX-NT PC Configuration Procedure
Small Room Kit Installation Instructions
Page 1 of 27
This document contains confidential or proprietary information of GE Lunar. Neither the document nor the information therein is to be reproduced, distributed, used or
disclosed, either in whole or in part, except as specifically authorized by GE Lunar.
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXAP2000
REV: N
DATE: 8/13/01
CO: 7012
DEFINITIONS
PRODIGY I Systems are defined as scanners with system numbers 11999 and lower.
PRODIGY II Systems are defined as scanners with system numbers 12000 and greater.
PRODIGYIII Systems are defined as scanners with system numbers 13000 and greater.
PROCEDURES
1.
2.
PREPARATION
A.
Begin the installation by filling out the initial customer information on the
PRODIGY Installation Report DXAP2004.
B.
The remainder of the Installation Report (DXAP2004) will be completed

during procedures DXAP20001, DXAP2002 and DXAP2003.
UNCRATING THE SCAN TABLE

A.
Remove table assembly from shipping crate by removing the Phillips head
screws along the bottom edge of the shipping pallet.
B.
Lift the tri-wall cardboard top off of the scanner pallet.
C.
The scan table assembly is attached to the wood blocks supporting it with 4
Phillips head screws. These screws are on the inside of the scan table,
through the bottom frame. Remove all four screws.
D.
Carefully (using a minimum of two people) lift the scan table straight up and
off of the pallet, so it rests on the ground on the casters.
E.
Bring the scan table into the room. It may be placed on its back on a 4-wheel
dolly (with all external panels off) if necessary.
F.
If door and hallway clearance of the customers facility require, the scan table
may be split according to procedure DXAP2013 PRODIGY Split Frame
Installation Procedure.
G.
Position the scan table assembly in the room (on the casters) so the back of
the scanner is accessible (in order to install the arm).
H.
Remove the arm assembly from its crate. The arm may only be set down on
its backside with the Upper arm and lower extrusion pointing up.
Page 2 of 27
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXAP2000
REV: N
DATE: 8/13/01
CO: 7012
NOTE: The outer covers of the scan arm are fiberglass, be careful, as they will
scratch or fracture easily do not remove the foam wrapped around the arm until
it is in the room where it will be installed.
I.
Carefully bring the scan arm assembly into room where scanner is to be
installed. Carefully remove the packing materials wrapped around the arm.
J.
Bring the other cartons containing the Host computer and peripherals, and
any accessories shipped with the system into the room where the scan table
is to be installed and carefully unpack them
NOTE: The End Panels, Upper and Lower Back Panels, Back Ledge, Front Panel
and Front Rail Cap are in the Shipping Box.
K.
Upon unpacking at the customer's site, verify all of the equipment listed on
the packing slip has arrived, checking the contents of the cartons against the
pick list shipped with the scanner. Check off each item on the pick list as it is
unpacked; include the completed pick list with the Installation Report.
If there is evidence any equipment has been damaged in shipment, or if
items are missing, notify GE-LUNAR Customer Care immediately. USA
installers should call the DOA Hotline at 1-800-365-8627 Extension 7239.
2.
MOUNTING THE SCAN ARM

A.
Remove tabletop from the table assembly by removing the four 8-32 socket
head screws in the tabletop.
B.
Remove the two screws holding the L-shaped bracket on the high voltage
cable trough to the front longitudinal carriage. The High voltage cable trough
should be wire tied to the transverse extrusion to keep it up and out of the
way when the arm is mounted.
Page 3 of 27
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXAP2000
REV: N
DATE: 8/13/01
CO: 7012
C.
Remove the front longitudinal carriage (three flathead screws) from the arm.
D.
Loosen the two 1/8-inch drive cable clamp screws on the bottom of the front
longitudinal carriage such that the drive cable can be slid under the clamp.
E.
Slide the rollers on the front longitudinal carriage onto the front longitudinal
track located on the frame assembly. Keep the carriage as far as possible
towards the head end of the table assembly.
F.
Slide the Front Longitudinal drive cable under the cable clamp on the front
longitudinal carriage. DO NOT tighten the cable clamp screws.
G.
Gently pull the Longitudinal Drive Cable up and out of the way at the head
end of the scanner, being careful not to stress the cable pull it only as far as
is required.
H.
Clip the wire-tie that is holding the source / carriage (note source is on the
arm for PRODIGY II/III systems) to the back of the arm.
I.
Remove the two lower adjustable wheels from the rear longitudinal carriage
plate using 2-7/16 wrenches.
J.
PRODIGY II/III Only - PRODIGY II/III is shipped with the source factory
aligned on the arm place a wire tie around the extrusion on both sides of
the source to hold the source in place in the center of the extrusion.
K.
At the head end of the table where the cutout in the rear trough is, hold the
arm upright and position the arms lower transverse extrusion through the
back of the table (see figure 1).
Page 4 of 27
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXAP2000
REV: N
DATE: 8/13/01
CO: 7012
Long Column
Short Column
FIGURE 1: When the arm is to be mounted it should only be allowed to rest

on its back as in the illustration under the number 1 in this figure.
L. Lift the arm and hang the four wheels of the rear longitudinal carriage onto t the
upper longitudinal extrusion (this is easier if you tilt the front of the arm slightly
downward).
NOTE: Be careful not to damage longitudinal and transverse belts or any
components on the electronics pan.
M. Have a helper balance the arm in an upright position while you slide the front
longitudinal carriage into position and attach it with a flat head screw to the end
of the lower transverse extrusion do not completely tighten the flat head screw.
N. Re-attach the two adjustable wheels to the rear carriage, do not adjust at this
time. Cut the wire tie holding the transverse belt and run it onto the pulleys on
the transverse motor and the pulley on the front longitudinal carriage.
O. Tighten the 3 flathead screws which attach the front longitudinal carriage to the
arms lower transverse extrusion.
P. Mount the OMI board on the 1/8 hex head screw on bottom of the front
longitudinal carriage. Be sure it is properly adjusted so that the wheel between
the slots fully blocks the infrared beam of the transducer. As the wheel rotates,
each wheel slot should be aligned with the centerline of the transducer window.
Page 5 of 27
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
3.
DOC ID: DXAP2000
REV: N
DATE: 8/13/01
CO: 7012
ELECTRICAL ASSEMBLY
A.
Clip the wire tie holding the longitudinal cable track to the frame.
B.
Remove the protective bag covering the longitudinal cable track cables and
run the cables and longitudinal cable track into position, taking care not to
contaminate the high voltage connectors for the x-ray tube head (PRODIGY
II/III).
C.
Run the longitudinal belt onto its idler pulleys.
D.
The x-ray tube housing assembly is shipped upside down in a shipping

bracket in the scanner on PRODIGY I systems PRODIGY II/III systems are
shipped with the source pre-aligned on the arm. If the scanner is a
PRODIGY II/III Proceed to step x of this section.
E.
PRODIGY I ONLY Unbolt the tube housing assembly from the tube housing
assembly shipping bracket. It is held in place by 3 nuts.
FIGURE 2: PRODIGY I Tube housing assembly mounted in transit

bracket, the arrows indicate the direction of rotation to correctly orient
it for installation.
F.
PRODIGY I ONLY: Turn the tube housing assembly toward the foot end of
the scanner (arrow 1, Figure 2) so that the mounting studs point toward the
foot end of the scanner, then holding the tube housing assembly by the sides
flip the tube housing assembly over (arrow 2, Figure 2) without rotating the
tube housing assembly.
Page 6 of 27
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXAP2000
REV: N
DATE: 8/13/01
CO: 7012
NOTE: If you leave the series of concave washers (Belleville washers) on

the single stud they can serve as a guide for tipping the tube housing
assembly into place correctly, if the washers fall off the stud, the tube has
been tipped the wrong way.
G.
PRODIGY I ONLY: Insert the top stud into the hole on the source carriage,
insuring that the Bellville washers are in place and put the nut back on the top
stud to hold the tube housing assembly in place.
H.
PRODIGY I ONLY: Replace the other two nuts on the two lower tube
housing assembly mounting studs on the tube housing assembly tilt bar.
I.
PRODIGY I ONLY: Remove the shipping bracket from the pan (four bolts)
and reattach it to the pan, with one bolt, laying it down flat.
J.
PRODIGY I ONLY: Place the other 3 bolts for the mounting bracket in the
front rail. This is done for transporting the Tube housing assembly in the
future should the scanner be moved.
K.
Attach the cable track to the rear longitudinal carriage, the cable track
attaches to the rear longitudinal carriage bracket using (2) 10-32 x 1/2
BHCS.
CAUTION: Do not apply power to any of the electronics until connections have
been checked at least twice for accuracy.
CAUTION: Do not connect or disconnect any wires with power applied to system.
A.
Neatly separate the following cables
Page 7 of 27
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXAP2000
REV: N
DATE: 8/13/01
X-ray tube
housing
assembly
Cables
Bulkhead
Connectors
CO: 7012
OMI
Cable
Signal
Cable
CENTENT
Motor
Cable
Cable
Track
Red
CENTENT
Cable
Ground
Cable
FIGURE 3: Cable Connections and layout at the rear longitudinal

carriage
I.
II.
III.
IV.
V.
OMI Cable (small gray cable, which goes to the transverse motion
detector from the bulkhead).
Tube housing assembly Cable (large black wrapped bundle which is
connected to the tube housing assembly)
Signal Cable (DB-9)
Ground cable (green/yellow cable)
Bulkhead cable (bundle with two Molex connectors).
B.
PRODIGY I ONLY: Lay the red Centent cable to the Centent (make sure red
cable is routed above longitudinal drive belt and on top of the high voltage
cable trough, and under the black High Voltage cable bundle) and make
connections to the Centent as Illustrated in Figure 4.
C.
PRODIGY I ONLY: Hook up the transverse motor wires (over red Centent
cable, below Tube Head bundle) to the Centent in the proper configuration
(see figure 4).
Page 8 of 27
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXAP2000
REV: N
DATE: 8/13/01
CO: 7012
CENTENT CNO142
Green
Blue
3
4
5
6
See Charts
Unused
Orange
White
Red/Black
Red
Black
POWER SUPPLY GND.

+24 TO 60 VOLTS DC
PHASE A
PHASE B
PHASE C
PHASE D
NC
DIRECTION
STEP PULSE
+5 VOLTS DC
CURRENT SET
GROUND
FIGURE 4: CENTENT Wiring
CAUTION: If a transverse stepper motor is not wired properly, it may stall or

cause other motion errors.
Centent Pin #
3
4
5
6
AMP Motor
Red
Blue
Green
Black
TABLE 1: Transverse CENTENT Motor Wires

NOTE: Throughout the following steps, wire ties will be used. Do not snug them
too tightly, as damage to the cables will result.
D.
PRODIGY I ONLY: Wire-tie the red Centent cable and the transverse motor
wires bundle to the high voltage cable trough (see figure 3).
Page 9 of 27
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXAP2000
REV: N
DATE: 8/13/01
CO: 7012
CAUTION: Secure all cables such that they do not contact the transverse motor
(it gets quite hot).
E.
Lay the small gray cable (OMI cable) in place along the outside (toward
head) of the high voltage cable trough and connect it to the transverse OMI
(Optical Motion Indicator) board (see figure 3).
F.
Route the x-ray tube housing assembly cables along the longitudinal carriage
bracket, to the bulkhead bracket (see figure 3).
G.
Connect the DB-9 cable at the bulkhead and tighten the mounting screws
(signal cable see figure 3)
H.
Connect the Molex connectors labeled "Bulkhead 1" and "Bulkhead 2" to the
appropriate bulkhead connectors (see figure 3).
CAUTION: PRODIGY I ONLY: Be sure to attach the Bulkhead connectors

correctly, if the Bulkhead connectors are reversed the Power on LED on the
display panel will be damaged.
I.
Connect the green/yellow ground cables to the rear carriage near the
protective earth label (see figure 3).
NOTE: The protective earth label must be in place and only green/yellow wires
may be attached near it.
J.
Connect the green/yellow ground cable with the spade connector to the
green/yellow ground cable at the bulkhead.
K.
PRODIGY II/III ONLY: Wipe the inside of the cathode and anode
receptacles and the outside of the high voltage cables with a lint free rag and
ethyl alcohol. Take care not to contaminate the connectors or the
receptacles after they have been cleaned.
L.
PRODIGY II/III ONLY: Place a drop of silicone oil in the center of the
cathode cable and a light bead of silicone oil on the outside of the cathode
connector, then gently insert the connector into the cathode receptacle on the
tube housing assembly (see figure 5).
Page 10 of 27
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXAP2000
REV: N
DATE: 8/13/01
CO: 7012
Oil here
FIGURE 5: PRODIGY II/III High Voltage connector the arrows

indicate where to place the drops of silicone oil note also that the
connectors are keyed.
M.
PRODIGY II/III ONLY: Tighten the retaining ring by hand until snug, and then
tighten the 1.5mm grub screw to lock the ring into position.
N.
PRODIGY II/III ONLY: Repeat steps L and M for the anode high voltage
cable.
O.
PRODIGY II/III ONLY: Attach the ground wire (green with yellow stripe) to
the marked ground at the base of the tube housing assembly as illustrated in
figure 4.
NOTE: The protective earth label must be in place and only green/yellow wires
may be attached near it.
P.
PRODIGY II/III ONLY: Connect the two and six pin Molex connectors for the
fans and the collimator, wire tie the cables into place as illustrated in figure 6.
Q.
Re-attach the high voltage cable trough to the front longitudinal carriage with
the hardware that was removed.
R.
Make sure that the front side of the high voltage cable trough is biased as
high as possible, without causing the bottom of the tube housing assembly to
collide with the CENTENT.
Page 11 of 27
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXAP2000
REV: N
DATE: 8/13/01
CO: 7012
S.
Wire tie the cables in place to the two anchor positions on the rear
longitudinal carriage (see figure 3).
T.
Anchor the tube housing assembly cables to the high voltage cable trough.
There are four tie down locations toward the rear of the trough panel.
U.
The tube housing assembly cables should be tied down first in such away as
to create an arch in the cable as it leaves the cable track. This is to allow
some slack in the cable when the arm moves to the foot end of the table.
V.
Tie the OMI cable on the head end of the high voltage cable trough using the
two tie downs and tying to the four wire ties, securing the tube housing
assembly bundle.
W.
Tie the OMI cable to the tube housing assembly bundle an additional time
near the bulkhead. Tie to High Voltage bundle, also between trough and
bulkhead.
R.
Assure that all cables and bundles lie neatly, do not bend sharply, and are
securely in place. Wire ties should be placed where provision is made
(anchors mounted to frame); wire ties should also be used to neatly bundle
wires.
CAUTION: DO NOT over tighten the wire ties.
S.
Install the PRODIGY Collimator on the X-ray Tube Housing Assembly and
tighten down with the 4 5/32 hex head screws provided.
Page 12 of 27
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXAP2000
REV: N
DATE: 8/13/01
CO: 7012
Molex Connectors
Wire
Ties
Ground
Screw
FIGURE 5: PRODIGY II/III Tube housing assembly cable dressing
7.
T.
PRODIGY II/III ONLY: Wire tie the anode and cathode high voltage cables
to the L-shaped bracket on the base of the tube housing assembly (see
figure 5).
U.
PRODIGY II/III ONLY: verify the tube housing assembly thermostat

connection at the top of the x-ray generator.
AC ENTRANCE / ELECTRICAL INSPECTION

A.
Install the scanner AC power cord by inserting the cord through the hole in the
scanner near the AC entrance and using the screws provided to mount the
strain relief plate.
B.
Run the power cord out from under the scanner to the outlet to be used, but
do not plug in.
Page 13 of 27
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXAP2000
REV: N
DATE: 8/13/01
CO: 7012
C.
Re-check all electrical connections made.
D.
Check to see each printed circuit board is firmly mounted and properly
connected.
E.
Check the other electrical assemblies to make sure they are firmly mounted
and properly connected.
F.
Check to see that a 20-amp or greater service is supplied to the room. It

must be dedicated to the system.
G.
Install any external options if the scanner is equipped (see DXAP0002).
H.
PRODIGY I ONLY: Determine the regional AC line levels by setting a

meter for AC voltage measurement and at least 250 VAC full scale.
Carefully measure the line voltage at the outlet that is going to be used to
power the scanner.
I.
PRODIGY I ONLY: Look up the AC voltage measured in table 2 and note

the recommended jumper setting in figure.
J.
PRODIGY I ONLY: Set the AC Entrance jumpers on the primary terminal

block according to the illustration in figure 8 for the appropriate AC voltage
measured in step C.
CAUTION: Be sure the AC power cord is not plugged into the wall outlet before
moving jumpers.
NOTE: The Isolation Transformer (PRODIGY I) / Power Supplies can handle

occasional over voltage (surge) situations, but under voltage (brown out)
situations can cause premature failure of the X-ray generation subsystem. The
Isolation transformer will function correctly as long as the AC power coming in to
the scanner is within 10% of the jumper setting. If the regional AC conditions
occasionally fluctuate by 10% or more the use of an Uninterruptible Power Supply
is advised, contact GE-LUNAR Customer Care for information.
Meter Reading
(VAC)
Jumper
Setting
Page 14 of 27
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXAP2000
90 105 VAC
106 113 VAC
114 118 VAC
119 123 VAC
124-126 VAC
127- 140 VAC
180-210 VAC
211- 226 VAC
227-236 VAC
237-246 VAC
247-252 VAC
253-279 VAC
REV: N
DATE: 8/13/01
CO: 7012
100 VAC
1 110 VAC
115 VAC
120 VAC
125 VAC
127 VAC
200 VAC
220 VAC
230 VAC
240 VAC
250 VAC
254 VAC
Table 2: PRODIGY I AC Entrance Recommended Jumper Settings
Page 15 of 27
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXAP2000
REV: N
DATE: 8/13/01
CO: 7012
FIGURE 6: Primary AC terminal block jumper configurations

K.
PRODIGY II/III ONLY: systems will automatically configure themselves for

the regional AC conditions.
L.
PRODIGY I ONLY: Refer to the appropriate labeling instructions depending

on the country where the scanner is being installed.
1. USA - see DXAP2023 PRODIGY US Label Installation Instructions
2. Canada see DXAP2024 PRODIGY Canada Label Installation
Instructions
3. France see DXAP2025 PRODIGY France Label Instructions
M.
If one of the instructions above do not apply, place the appropriate voltage
configuration label (if necessary) to the PRODIGY Is system label on the foot
end panel. Labels are found in the destination kit, p/n 7830 for 220-240
VAC systems and p/n 7829 for 100 V systems.
N.
PRODIGY I ONLY: Review the following conditions carefully and decide

which power set up option best suits the room in which the scan table is
being installed.
CAUTION: The following is in accordance with IEC 601 and UL safety regulations.
NOTE: The PRODIGY I scanners output power strip can be used to supply the Host PC
with isolated power. If it is to be used the following conditions must be met. If the
conditions cannot be met, the scanners output power strip cannot be used.
Page 16 of 27
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
1.
2.
DOC ID: DXAP2000
REV: N
DATE: 8/13/01
CO: 7012
If the PRODIGY I Scanner power (isolated power) is to be used:

a. The strip must be mounted it cannot be on the floor.
b. The strip should be mounted away from an edge it may not
come into contact with other equipment. All other (non-isolated)
electrically powered equipment must be 1.83 meters (6 feet)
from the scan table.
c. The computer and all peripheral devices (monitor, printer,
external disk drive, etc.) must be all powered from the outlet
strip.
d. The Host computer may not be connected to a network or to a
modem unless the network and / or modem is / are optically
isolated from the Host PC.
e. The Host PC may be placed anywhere in the room.
If the scanner isolated power is not used (wall outlet):
a. No devices are to use the scanners isolated power output.
b. The Host PC may be connected to a modem or to a network
without optical isolation.
c. The Host PC, peripherals and any other electrically powered
equipment must be placed a minimum of 1.83 meters (6
feet) from the scan table.
O.
PRODIGY I ONLY: If the PRODIGY I scanners isolated power is to be

used, run the output AC power cord to the area where the Host PC will be
installed. If the scanners isolated power will not be used neatly coil the power
cord and store it under the scan table.
P. PRODIGY I ONLY: If the isolated AC power strip is to be used, verify the AC
output jumper settings on the secondary terminal block are correct for the Host
PC and peripherals to be used as illustrated in figure 9.
Q. PRODIGY II/III ONLY: Install the external Isolation transformer as described in
DXAP3030 Small Room Kit Installation Instructions.
Page 17 of 27
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXAP2000
REV: N
DATE: 8/13/01
CO: 7012
FIGURE 7: PRODIGY I Isolated AC Power strip jumper settings

11.
COMPUTER, PERIPHERAL AND CABLE SETUP

A.
Remove all components from the boxes.
B.
Position the computer, monitor, and printer on the console table. If the
scanners isolated power or the isolation transformer included in the small
room kit is to be used, the Host PC can be anywhere in the room. If the
scanners isolated power, or isolation transformer is not used, the Host PC
must be at least 1.83 meters (6 feet) from the scan table.
C.
Connect the monitor, keyboard, mouse, and printer to the computer.
D.
Feed the supplied paper and ink cartridges into the printer according to the
printer manufacturers instructions.
E.
Connect the printer to LPT1 on the Host PC.
Page 18 of 27
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
12.
DOC ID: DXAP2000
REV: N
DATE: 8/13/01
CO: 7012
F.
Connect the monitor to the Host PCs video card.
G.
Position and set up any optional peripherals according to the manufacturers

instructions and connect them by cable to the computer.
H.
Using the cables supplied, connect the scan table to the Host computer. The
scan table uses RS-422 communications, this is via a serial card installed in
one of the Host computers expansion slots. Host PCs supplied by LUNAR
have the card installed and configured. If the card needs to be installed, use
procedure DXPC2000 PRODIGY / DPX-NT PC Configuration
Procedure.
I.
Make sure that all I/O cables are fastened at both ends to their respective
connections (by screws or clamps).
J.
Verify the I/O cable at the scan table is connected tight at the HOST RS-422
(J5) connector of the controller ((c)SBC).
K.
Verify that the Host PCs input voltage select is set for the AC voltage of the
scanners isolated power or the AC voltage of the wall outlet.
L.
Verify that all peripheral devices are compatible with the AC voltage of the
scanners isolated power (step 8-E) or the AC voltage of the wall outlet.
M.
Plug each of the AC power cables into the Host PC and peripherals set up
above into the isolated power strip, an external non-isolated power strip or
the Isolation Transformer.
N.
Plug the scan table power cord into the wall outlet that was checked
previously. If the scanners AC output is not being used, plug in the outlet
strip for the Host PC and peripherals.
O.
Turn on the scan table, computer, monitor, printer and any peripherals, in that
order.
SOFTWARE VERIFICATION / DIAGNOSTIC SOFTWARE INSTALLATION

A.
When the computer boots, log in as Administrator.
B.
Verify that the Host PC does not have a screen saver turned on and that all
power management is turned off.
Page 19 of 27
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
1.
DOC ID: DXAP2000
REV: N
DATE: 8/13/01
CO: 7012
C.
If necessary, configure the Host PC to run the enCORE PRODIGY software

by following procedure DXPC2000 DPXFan/DPX-NT PC Configuration
Procedure. Return to this procedure after completing DXPC2000.
D.
Start the enCORE Software by double clicking the PRODIGY Icon on the
desktop.
E.
Verify that the software version shipped with the system is the same as the
software version shipped on CD-ROM, if there is a discrepancy, load the
software on the CD-ROM.
F.
From the PRODIGY main menu, go to Options / User Options / System Tab
and enter the system number and feature code found on the PRODIGY
software CD-ROM shipped with the system.
Tube Head Warm Up

A.
Power up the scan table by turning on the power switch at the foot end of the
scan table. Power up the host computer and all peripheral devices.
B.
Enter the Service Mode of the Fan Software Options / User Options
Service Enter Password (Smile sw ver 1.0 2.05 or Award ver 2.10 +)
C.
Go to Tools / Diagnostics / Scanner X-Ray (as shown in Figure 2).
Page 20 of 27
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXAP2000
REV: N
DATE: 8/13/01
CO: 7012
Figure 2: Scanner X-ray Test Menu

D.
Click on the warm up Button as indicated in Figure 2. This process will

gradually increase kV to warm the tube head insert, it will take approximately
40 minutes.
NOTE: While the Tube Head warm up is running, you may continue with the
procedure.
x.
BACK PANEL and ARM SLOT COVER INSTALLATION

A.
Adjust the eccentric wheels v-wheels using two 7/16 wrenches and a 9/16
wrench.
NOTE: The scan arm on the PRODIGY scanner is supported by a series of

concentric (stationary) and eccentric (adjustable) bearing rollers (V wheels). The
concentric rollers primarily carry the load of the arm. The eccentric rollers are
Page 21 of 27
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXAP2000
REV: N
DATE: 8/13/01
CO: 7012
used to stabilize and position the arm, and to adjust the free play in the mounting
of the arm.
A. By rotating the adjustable bearing roller on its mounting bolt, the clearance
between the wheel and the track can be adjusted.
NOTE: Normal adjustment is obtained by rotating the eccentric bearing roller with
a 9/16-inch wrench, while holding the bolt that goes through the wheel with two
7/16-inch wrenches. The 7/16 bolt should be tight, and the adjustable bearing
roller wheel should be tight enough that the wheel rotates when the arm is moved
longitudinally, but it can be turned against the track by hand.
CAUTION: If the adjustable bearing roller is over-tightened it can exert a force
greater than the load rating of the longitudinal drive system, causing the slip
clutch to release or the belt to jump teeth.
B. Attach the upper and lower back panels using the hardware provided (see figure
10 page 25 of this instruction) and sure to reconnect the green/yellow ground
wires near the protective earth labels (P/N 17231).
a. Adjust the rear panel height by performing the following:
b. Move the scan arm to either the head or foot end of the scan table.
FIGURE 3: Adjusting the lower back panel height using a 5/32 allen key
as a guide.
c. Use a 5/32 allen key as a gauge to set the panel height (see figure 3).
d. The 5/32 allen is placed on the top edge of the lower arm slot cover
guide and fits between it and the transverse extrusion.
i. This provides just enough sag room for table flex when a heavy
patient is scanned, but keeps the lower panel high enough to keep
the slot cover in the guides.
e. Repeat the adjustment for the opposite end of the scan table .
C. Install the Arm Slot Cover see DXAP2015 for detailed instructions
Page 22 of 27
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXAP2000
REV: N
DATE: 8/13/01
CO: 7012
D. Move the scan table to its final position in the room, with six to eight inches
between the wall (2 to 3 inches minimum) and the back of the arm.
E. Unscrew the casters from the bottom of the legs and replace them with glides.
Store the casters inside the scanner in the front trough behind the door.
NOTE: Be careful, as the scan arm may roll away from side of the scan table
being elevated.
F. With the scan arm in the center of the table, level the scan table by placing a
torpedo level alternately on the front, rear, and sides of the frame and adjust the
heights of the glides to make the table level. Once the table has been leveled, it
must not be moved.
G. Attach the Rear Longitudinal Drive ground cable to the cable clamp via clamp
screw. Place the upper rear longitudinal drive cable into the clamp on the
longitudinal carriage keeping the turnbuckle on the head end of the clamp. Move
drive cable relative to clamp so as to take up any slack in the ground cable.
Tighten the clamp.
NOTE: Make sure the extrusion that carries the source is perpendicular to the
front longitudinal rail
H. Verify the lower front drive cable is in the clamp mounted on the front longitudinal
carriage. Verify the arm is perpendicular to the centerline of the table and that
this is the natural position (i.e., no force is necessary to maintain this position).
Then tighten the front clamp, accessing it from the bottom at the front of the scan
table; tighten the two 1/8 hex head screws.
I.
Place the head and foot end panels on the scanner (do not put the panel screws
in).
J. Place the front panel and the upper front panel cap on the scanner (do not put
the panel screws in).
K. If the tube head warm up is still running, remove the upper and lower arm panels.
L. If the tube head warm up is still running, sort the panel attachment hardware
according to Figure X.
13.
TUBE HEAD ALIGNMENT
Page 23 of 27
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
A.
14.
REV: N
DATE: 8/13/01
CO: 7012
After the tube head warm up is finished, align the tube head as instructed in
the Procedure DXAP2001 PRODIGY Source-Detector Alignment. The
arm upper cover may be left off until the limit switches have been verified.
INSTALLATION TESTING AND CALIBRATION

A.
15.
DOC ID: DXAP2000
Perform the System function verification test as outlined in DXAP2003

PRODIGY Installation Test Procedures.
ATTACH PANELS
A.
Using the illustrations in Figure 6 attach the Front, and Side panels to the
scanner if they have not been mounted with the appropriate hardware (also
illustrated in Figure 10).
B.
Attach the tabletop using the 4 countersunk 8-32 1/8 inch socket head
screws.
C.
Place the table pad on the scanner in the correct orientation (zipper end at
foot) and perform procedure DXAP2010 enCORE Centerline offset
Procedure. When this procedure has been completed return to these
instructions to complete the installation.
D.
Coil and wire tie excess power cords neatly under the scanner.
Page 24 of 27
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXAP2000
REV: N
DATE: 8/13/01
CO: 7012
Page 25 of 27
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXAP2000
REV: N
DATE: 8/13/01
CO: 7012
FIGURE 10: Outer Panels and Hardware

16.
RECORDS
A.
(U.S. Installs Only) - Completely fill out form FDA 2579 - Report of
Assembly of a Diagnostic X-Ray System. Leave the appropriate copy
(pink) with the customer and mail the yellow and white copies to GE-LUNAR,
the blue copy stays with the installation paperwork.
B.
Verify all compliance labels are affixed to the system are legible, and
completely filled out: If labeling is incomplete or inaccurate, contact GELUNAR Customer Support.
NOTE: US ONLY- these forms must be submitted to the federal and state agencies
within 15 days of the install. It is imperative they are completely filled out and returned
(yellow and white copies) to the GE-LUNAR Customer Support Department as quickly,
as is possible.
C.
Verify that all Scan Types in the PRODIGY software listed on the Software
Order form can be accessed.
D.
Verify the system number entered matches the system number recorded on
the delivery receipt.
E.
Create an Emergency Repair Disk (ERD).

Click on START/ RUN in the dialogue box type rdisk
Label a blank 1.44 MB 3 floppy disk EMERGENCY REPAIR DISK
Click on the Create Repair Disk button on the Repair Disk Menu
Follow on screen prompts to create ERD.
When process is complete (Floppy drive light is off) eject ERD.
Place ERD with WINDOWS NT CD-ROM and Diskettes.
Exit Repair Disk.
F.
Complete the installation page of the Product Locator Card and return to the
appropriate pole as indicated on the card.
Page 26 of 27
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXAP2000
REV: N
DATE: 8/13/01
CO: 7012
G.
(U.S. Installs only) Complete the system ID field on the GE-CARES support
labels found in the software box. Apply one of the labels to the front of the
host PC. Leave the other lable for the customer to place near their phone.
H.
Verify that all relevant portions of DXAP2004 PRODIGY Installation Report

are complete; this is submitted to the Applications department upon return to
GE-LUNAR. After review, this report becomes part of the systems Device
History Record.
I.
U.S. Installs Only) - Have the customer sign the delivery receipt and verify the
date of the applications training (if applicable).
J.
Return all Installation paperwork to GE-Lunar

GE-LUNAR
Attn: Installation Paperwork
726 Heartland Trail
Madison, WI 53705
USA
GENERATED RECORDS
DXAP 2004
FDA Form 2579 (USA only)
Product Locator Card
Delivery Receipt
Page 27 of 27
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC. ID: DXAP2001

REVISION: J
DATE: 8/13/01
TITLE: Prodigy Source Detector Alignment Procedure
PURPOSE
This procedure provides work instruction for personnel warming up and aligning the x-ray
source and detector for the PRODIGY.
APPLICATION
This procedure applies to all service / applications personnel installing or repairing a
Prodigy system with version 2.26 or greater software.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
X-ray generator produces beam of ionizing radiation. The technician should take
precautions to avoid exposing any part of their body to the x-ray beam.
DXAP2000
DXAP2003
DXAP2004
DXAP2006
DXAP2011
Prodigy Installation Procedure

Prodigy Installation Test Procedures
Prodigy Installation Report Form
Prodigy Dial Indicator Alignment Verification
enCORE Beam Wobble Procedure
DEFINITIONS
PRODIGY I Systems are defined as scanners with system numbers 11999 and lower.
PRODIGY II Systems are defined as scanners with system numbers 12000 and greater.
PROCEDURES
1.
Prepare the System for Alignment

A.
If the tabletop and the arm shroud covers are on the scan table, remove them
now.
Page 1 of 10
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
I.
II.
2.
DOC ID: DXAP2001
REV: J
DATE: 8/13/01
CO: 7012
Upper arm shroud hinges at the front, is held in place by two 5/32 hex
head screws into the back of the arm column.
Lower shroud is attached by 10 hex head screws, 4 at the front and 6
at the rear. The back cover of the arm column must be loosened at
the top to gain access to two of the screws. Use the foam leg block to
support the lower shroud while removing it. Be sure to disconnect the
ground wire for the metal portion of the lower shroud.
PRODIGY I ONLY or TUBE HEAD REPALCEMENT ON PRODIGY II: Rough

Alignment: Point to Point.
NOTE: Installation of PRODIGY II Systems skip section 2 and procede to section
3.
A.
PRODIGY I ONLY: Install the film holder on detector by holding one latch pin
on each side of film holder, sliding film holder along detector and releasing
latch pins into dimples on the detector when the two locator pins inside film
holder find the two locator holes on the underside of the detector.
B.
PRODIGY I ONLY: Move detector/arm to center of table.
C.
PRODIGY I or TUBE REPLACEMENT ONLY: Remove the collimator

assembly (if it is on the tube head).
D.
PRODIGY I or TUBE REPLACEMENT ONLY: Attach the Prodigy

Alignment rod to the top of the tube head using the two 5/32 screws. These
screws mount the alignment rod on the top of the Prodigy tube head in the
same position as the collimator. The access hole in the alignment rod base
should be toward the head and front end of the table.
E.
PRODIGY I or TUBE REPLACEMENT ONLY: Adjust the length of the

alignment rod by loosening the 9/64 (8-32) screw on the collar on the
alignment rod. Pull the rod up, so its position relative to the film holder can
be easily determined. Be careful not to damage the film holder by contacting
it with the sharp end of the alignment rod.
F.
PRODIGY I or TUBE REPLACEMENT ONLY: Adjust tube head in the

transverse direction by using the tilt bar (loosen the 3/8 hex nut) such that the
point on the alignment rod is aiming for the transverse center of the film
holder.
NOTE: Tightening the tilt bar adjustment 5/32 hex head screw tilts the Tube
Head toward the front; the effect of the tilt bar is unidirectional, it will only tilt the
tube head toward the front of the table (see Figure1). If the adjustment screw is
Page 2 of 10
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXAP2001
REV: J
DATE: 8/13/01
CO: 7012
used to tilt the Tube Head too far toward the front, it must be repositioned toward
the rear and readjusted forward again. Be sure to retighten the 3/8 hex nut to lock
the tilt bar in position and tighten the two lower tube head mounting nuts (7/16).
G.
PRODIGY I or TUBE REPLACEMENT ONLY: Adjust the tube head in

longitudinal direction by turning the spring-loaded nut at the top of the tube.
This will compress or decompress the Belleville washers, which serve as a
spring. Tighten or loosen the spring-loaded nut so that the point of the
alignment rod is on the cross hairs of the film holder. At this time also verify
that the lower two nuts that mount the tube head are tight.
Film Holder /
Alignment Jig
Alignment Rod
Tilt Bar
Side View Front to Rear
End View Head to Foot
FIGURE 1: Tube Head with Alignment Rod Installed pointing at Film Holder
(High voltage cable trough is not shown)
H.
PRODIGY I or TUBE REPLACEMENT ONLY: At this point remove the

alignment rod.
I.
PRODIGY I or TUBE REPLACEMENT ONLY: Install the shutter assembly

on the tube head with the four 5/32 hex head screws; also reconnect the
Molex connector for the shutter electronics. Make sure the Molex connector
is wire tied to the tube head so that it will not get caught between the
collimator assembly and the frame when the tube head moves to home
position.
Page 3 of 10
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
3.
DOC ID: DXAP2001
REV: J
DATE: 8/13/01
CO: 7012
Tube Head Warm Up (If this has been performed as part of a PRODIGY II/III
Install go to section 4.)
A.
Power up the scan table by turning on the power switch at the foot end of the
scan table. Power up the host computer and all peripheral devices.
B.
Service Enter Password (Smile sw ver 1.0 2.05 or Award ver 2.10 +)
C.
Go to Tools / Diagnostics / Scanner X-Ray (as shown in Figure 2).
Figure 2: Scanner X-ray Test Menu

D.
Click on the warm up Button as indicated in Figure 2. This process will

gradually increase kV to warm the tube head insert, it will take approximately
40 minutes.
Page 4 of 10
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
4.
DOC ID: DXAP2001
REV: J
DATE: 8/13/01
CO: 7012
Fine Alignment
NOTE: To speed installation, the Head, Foot and front panels may be attached with
the correct hardware (see DXAP2000 figure 6) while acquiring counts for the fine
alignment and the alignment photo.
A.
Make sure the software is in the service signal monitor mode, if it is not go to
Tools/Alignment Aid
B.
Using the joystick move the detector / source to the approximate center of
the longitudinal and transverse axes.
C.
Click on the Get Reference button on the alignment aid screen
D.
Place the alignment aperture on the collimator as shown in figure 3.
Figure 3: Alignment Aperture

E.
Click on the Get Alignment data button on the Alignment Aid Main screen.
Page 5 of 10
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXAP2001
REV: J
DATE: 8/13/01
CO: 7012
Figure 4: Alignment Aid Main Screen

F.
On the screen a graph with transmission and detector labels on the x and y
axies will appear. The green boxes represent the individual detectors and
the red line is the ideal transmission rate (target).
G.
The column at the right gives the engineer performing the alignment the
rotational, transverse and longitudinal error.
NOTE: PRODIGY II Systems are shipped with the tube head pre-aligned, proper
alignment can often be achieved by adjusting the collimators position on top of the
tube head by loosening the 4 5/32 collimator mounting bolts and shifting the
collimators position.
H.
Rotational Alignment - limit = +/- 1.0 degree if necessary adjust with

screws 1,2, 5 & 6 (see figure 5 ).
Page 6 of 10
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXAP2001
Prodigy Collimator top view

style)
REV: J
DATE: 8/13/01
CO: 7012
Prodigy Collimator top view

(new style)
(old
Figure 5: Top view of PRODIGY Collimators numbers indicate alignment

adjustment screws
Figure 6: Overview of PRODIGY Fine collimator Alignment

Page 7 of 10
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXAP2001
REV: J
DATE: 8/13/01
CO: 7012
1. If the rotational value is positive, the collimator requires clockwise

rotational adjustment:
a. Loosen screws 5 & 6.
b. Slowly tighten approximately turn for each degree of rotation (it may
be necessary to loosen screw 7 to allow for enough rotation).
c. Take Reference and alignment data and continue to adjust until the
rotational error is within 1.0 degrees of zero
d. Retighten screws 5& 6.
2. If the rotational value is negative, the collimator requires a counterclockwise rotational adjustment:
a. Loosen screws 5 & 6.
b. Slowly tighten screw 7 turn for each degree of rotation.
c. Take Reference and alignment data and continue to adjust until
the rotational error is within 1.0 degrees of zero
d. Retighten screws 5 & 6.
I.
Longitudinal Alignment - Limit = +/- 1.9mm - if necessary adjust with

spring washer nut.
1. If the signal on detector 1 is lower than the signal on detector 16,
(negative longitudinal error) slowly tighten the spring washer nut (same
nut used in rough alignment)., turn at a time.
2. If the signal on detector 16 is lower than the signal on detector 1, (positive
longitudinal error) slowly loosen the spring washer nut (same nut used in
rough alignment)..
3. Take Reference and alignment data and continue to adjust until the
longitudinal error is within 1.0 mm of zero
J.
Transverse alignment Limit = +/- 4.5 mm if necessary adjust with

screws 8 and 2
1. Loosen screws 3 &4.
Page 8 of 10
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXAP2001
REV: J
DATE: 8/13/01
CO: 7012
2. Adjust the beam in the transverse direction by loosening screw 8 and

then tightening screw 2 each turn.
3. Take Reference and alignment data and continue to adjust until the
transverse error is within 2.5 mm of zero
4. If you need to adjust the collimator back toward the front of the scanner,
loosen screw 2 and tighten screw 8 (old style collimator new style has a
spring plunger in place of screw 8).
5. Alignment Verification
A. If the brass alignment aperture is on the collimator, remove it.
B. Move the scan arm source detector to the center of the transverse and
longitudinal axes.
C. Place the film jig on the detector as in step 1-C.
D. Insert a piece of film into the holder (large number "57" on film should face up
and metal strip should be towards the scanner column)
E. Take an alignment film by clicking Picture button on the Alignment Aid Main
screen.
F. Follow the directions on the film developer for developing the film (move the
lever to 'L', insert the film, move lever to 'P', remove film, wait 20 seconds, peel
apart).
G. Examine the alignment photo.
The box on the circuit board mask (from the film holder) should be entirely
visible in the image on the film, if it is not, verify table level and realign the
source.
Note: The box may not be centered exactly on the image as the position of
the box on the film jig may not correspond to the exact location of the
detector elements in the detector. As long as the entire box is visible and
the Beam Wobble test (performed in the next section) passes, the source /
detector is aligned.
1. The length and width of the beam image on the film should not be
greater than 63.8 mm and 12.3mm respectively.
Page 9 of 10
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXAP2001
REV: J
DATE: 8/13/01
CO: 7012
2. Label the film with the system number, the date, and label each
exposures location. Coat the film using the chemical sponge
supplied with the film. Save this film and include it with the rest of
the installation paperwork.
H.
6.
Beam Wobble Test

A.
7.
Remove the film holder from the detector
Perform Procedure DXAP2011 enCORE Beam Wobble Procedure.
Completing Required Testing

A.
Refer to the Prodigy Service manual for additional tests to be performed or

for installations proceed to document DXAP2003 Prodigy Installation Test
Procedures.
GENERATED RECORDS
Alignment Photo
Page 10 of 10
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC. ID: DXAP2003

REVISION: H
DATE: 8/13/01
TITLE: Prodigy Installation Test Procedures
PURPOSE
This procedure details the tests required to be run on a PRODIGY system upon its
installation at a customer's site or when service requires.
APPLICATION
This procedure applies to all personnel installing or servicing a PRODIGY.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
The X-ray generator produces beam of ionizing radiation. The technician should take
precautions to avoid exposing any part of their body to the beam.
DXAP2000 PRODIGY Installation Procedure
DXAP2001 PRODIGY Source-Detector Alignment Procedure
DXAP2002 PRODIGY Primary Calibration Procedure
DXAP2007 PRODIGY Hacksaw Test
DXQC2022 PRODIGY Aluminum Spine Phantom Scan Procedure
DEFINITIONS
None.
PROCEDURES
These test procedures shall be performed following the assembly of the PRODIGY scanner
according to procedure DXAP2000
1.
CALIBRATION / SOFTWARE SETUP
Page 1 of 3
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
A.
B.
C.
2.
REV: G
DATE: 10/3/00
CO: 6704
Perform the Primary Calibration according to Procedure DXAP2002

at this time.
Software / PC Installation Verification
I.
Setup the Printer, Default, and Reference Data options as

appropriate. Refer to the Operator's Manual.
I.
Check the QA standard batch number on the bottom of the QA

standard. The fifth number in the serial number is the batch number
it will be a 1 or a 2.
II.
Go to Tools/UserOptions/ Systems tab and verify that the batch

number matches that found on the QA standard.
Daily Quality Assurance tests

I.
From the Main Menu, press F5 or click on the Quality Assurance to

run a system calibration. Run three (3) calibrations.
II.
Verify that all QA tests pass.
III.
Leave the QA (calibration printouts) with the customer.
HACKSAW TEST
A.
3.
DOC ID: DXAP2003
Perform the PRODIGY Hacksaw Test according to Procedure DXAP2007 at

this time.
PHANTOM SCANS
NOTE: Before running any patient or phantom scans, three (3) daily QAs (secondary
calibrations) must be in the QA database for accurate results. If only one QA has been
run from the system software (before the Alignment Verification), two (2) more need to be
run.
Page 2 of 3
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXAP2003
REV: G
DATE: 10/3/00
CO: 6704
A.
Scan the Encapsulated Lunar spine phantom scans according to the

Procedure DXQC2022.
B.
When setting up the phantom scan, verify the Patient Positioning Laser and
the Laser On light operate properly.
C.
Acquire 3 Phantom scans
D.
Average the results from the 3 analyzed scans, and verify that the
mean is within 2or 3% of the expected value for the phantom. Record
the average results of the scans and the expected result on the Install
Report (DXAP2004).
NOTE: Follow the analysis instructions included with the Aluminum Spine
Phantom. If not analyzed properly, the results may deviate from the expected
value.
4.
TEST COMPLETION
A.
Perform 3 additional Daily QA (secondary calibrations) and insure all tests

pass.
B.
Print the QA Trend Reports (2 - 3mA and Misc.) by clicking on QA/QA Trend
Reports/Print.
C.
Print the High mA Trend Report and the Misc. Trend Report.
NOTE: The software must be in Service Mode to print the QA Trend Reports.
D.
Verify that the number of QA Repeats is set to 1 (QA/Settings QA Repeats

= 1).
GENERATED RECORDS
2 QA Trend Reports
Alignment Verification Results
3 Aluminum Spine Phantom Results
Page 3 of 3
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC. ID: DXAP2004

REVISION: S
DATE: 8/13/01
TITLE: Prodigy Installation Check Sheet
DXAP2000 PRODIGY Installation Work Instructions
DXAP2003 PRODIGY Installation Test Procedures
CHECK LIST
SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION
SYSTEM NUMBER:
_________________________
SCAN TABLE SERIAL NUMBER
_________________________
INSTALL DATE:
_________________________
IF CUSTOMER DATA ON THE DELIVERY RECIEPT IS INCOMPLETE / INCORRECT FILL IN BELOW
FACILITY:__________________________________________________________________________
ADDRESS:_______________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________
CITY:__________________________________STATE/COUNTRY:_________________ZIP:________
CONTACT:______________________________ PHYSICIAN:________________________________
PHONE #:__________________________________ FAX #:__________________________________
HOST PC MODEL :___________________________S/N:____________________________________
PRINTER TYPE:_____________________________________________________________________
SOFTWARE VERSION:____________________
TEST EQUIPMENT USED

NONE
SETUP and TESTING

A indicates a step has been completed satisfactorily, NA indicates not applicable.
All Items on Pick List present ......................................................................................................... _____
Verify 20A Dedicated Outlet ............................................................................................................ _____
Room passes criteria for Isolation or Isolation Transformer is present .................................................. _____
Page 1 of 2
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXAP2004
REV: S
DATE: 8/13/01
CO: 7012
Verify system alignment.................................................................................................................. _____

Verify motion control....................................................................................................................... _____
Beam Wobble Test Performed and Passed....................................................................................... _____
Verify Limit Switch Positions ........................................................................................................... _____
Hacksaw Test Performed ................................................................................................................ _____
6 QA Tests Performed .................................................................................................................... _____
Verify All Compliance Labels are correct and present......................................................................... _____
FDA Form 2579 Completed / Filed (USA ONLY)................................................................................ _____
Aluminum Phantom Scan Results

Phantom S/N____________
L2-L4 BMD
% Fat
1
2
3
Average (sum/3)
Expected Value
N/A
% Difference ((ave-expected) / expected * 100)
N/A
+/- 3% for Encapsulated Phantom

+/- 2% for Water Bath Phantom
PASS
N/A
(Circle One)
REPORTS PRESENT
Picklist .......................................................................................................................................... _____
Alignment Photo (single exposure)................................................................................................... _____
Beam Wobble Test Results............................................................................................................. _____
QA Trend reports (High and Misc.)................................................................................................... _____
Phantom Scan Printouts (include Ancillary results)............................................................................ _____
FDA Form 2579 (Blue Copy) (USA ONLY)........................................................................................ _____
Signed (Customer) Delivery Receipt ................................................................................................._____
Installer CARES Dispatch # ______________

INSTALLER _____________________/____________________ DATE ___/___/___
Page 2 of 2
PURPOSE
This procedure specifies the methods used to install external options for a DPX-Series
or Prodigy system.
APPLICA
TION
This document applies toward the installation of external options for all DPX-Series or
Prodigy systems.
SAFETY
None.
ASSOCIA
None.
PRECAUTIONS
TED
MA TERIALS
DEFINITIONS
None.
PROCEDURES
This hardware facilitates two important external safety options:
1.
2.
External emergency stop switch.

External indicator for x-ray generation
UNCON1'ROllD
DOCUMEN1'
Verity latest Revision

Betore Usmg
QUALITY
SYSTEM
DOCUMENT
Page
1 of
This document contains confidential or proprietary information of Lunar Corp. Neither the document nor the information therein Is to be reproduced, distributed,
used or disclosed, either In whole or In part, except as specIfically authorized by Lunar Corp.
REV: G
DOCUMENT ID: DXAP0012
DATE: 8/7/00
CO: 6570
External Options Wiring

External E-Stop Switch
Gnd OUT
Neutral OUT
Line OUT
A2
A2
A1
A2
LED
F11 F12
A2
A1
LED
Line
Relay
Neutral
Relay
E-Stop
Jumper
Gnd IN
11
14
12
11
Neutral IN
Line IN
14
12
E-Stop
Cable
Figure 1
1.
EXTERNAL EMERGENCY STOP OPTION

A.
The e-stop jumper must be removed and an external e-stop switch is

installed as shown in Figure 1. The external e-stop must be a normally
closed dry contact switch rated for 26 VDC or greater and 1 amp or greater.
Without an external emergency stop, the e-stop jumper (see Figure 1) must
be inserted.
Page 2 of 6
This document contains confidential or proprietary information of Lunar Corp. Neither the document nor the information therein is to be reproduced, distributed, used
or disclosed, either in whole or in part, except as specifically authorized by Lunar Corp.
REV: G

2.
CO: 6570
EXTERNAL INDICATOR OPTION

A.
3.
DATE: 8/7/00
An external power source must be supplied by the customer. The voltage

and current are limited by the ratings of the line and neutral fuses provided.
Fuses with lower amperage rating for a specific application may be provided
by the customer. The ratings of the factory fuses are 3.15A/250V. The
external power source must be connected to the Line and Neutral IN terminal
blocks. The external indicator must be connected to the Line and Neutral
OUT terminal blocks (see Figure 1). An earth terminal block is provided for
connecting power supply and indicator grounds if necessary. F11 and F12
are fuses for the Line IN and Neutral IN respectively. If an external indicator is
not used, no external power source is needed.
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
A.
Fasten the DIN rail to the PEM nuts located on the pan using 2 8-32 X 3/8"
screws each with a #8 flat washer and lock washer (see Figures 2-5 for
locations). Some older systems may not have the PEM nuts on the pan. In
that case, drill two holes in the pan 5" apart as in Figure 2. Ensure that holes
do not interfere with mainframe strut located under the electronics mounting
plate.
5"
26V PS
AGS
Board
Fuse
Label
Terminal Blocks
SS
RELAY
Terminal Block
+5/+12/-12 V PS
Isolation Transformer
Terminal Block
AC ENTRANCE
Figure 2 (DPX-IQ)
Page 3 of 6
REV: G
DATE: 8/7/00
CO: 6570
Figure 3 (Prodigy systems < DF+12000)
External Options
Terminal Block
Fuse
Label
Isolation Transformer
SS
RELAY
AC Inlet
Terminal Block
Figure 4 (DPX-NT systems < NT+72000)
Page 4 of 6
REV: G
DATE: 8/7/00
CO: 6570
STRAIN RELIEF
Fuse
Label
External Options
Terminal Block
Filter
Relay
Relay
Terminal Block
AC Inlet
Figure 5
(DPX-NT systems > NT+72000 and Prodigy systems > DF+12000)
B.
For systems with 3 holes for strain relief (DPX-NT and Prodigy) use supplied
strain relief fittings (4549).
For IQ systems with 3/4" access holes, cut the 4 5/8" piece of grommet
(1029) in half. Place a small amount of cyanoacrylate based glue on the
inside edge of the grommets and insert around the edge of the 3/4 diameter
holes.
C.
For DPX-NT systems greater than NT+72000 and Prodigy systems greater
than DF+12000, connect the external options relay cable to CSBC J26.
Route the cable along side the existing relay cable.
For all other systems, connect the cable assembly (3682) to the solid state
x-ray relay located on the pan. Connect the black wire terminal ring to the (-)
terminal on the solid state relay and the red wire terminal ring to the (+)
terminal. Route the cable from the solid state relay to the external options
terminal block.
Page 5 of 6

D.
REV: G
DATE: 8/7/00
CO: 6570
For systems using a CSBC or FOINK, remove jumper J15 or J3 from the
CSBC or FOINK, respectively. Connect the remaining external e-stop cable
to J15 or J27, respectively. Route the cable along side the existing relay
cable.
For systems using OINK, Revision E or higher, connect remaining external estop cable (4339) to J27. Route the cable from the OINK board to the
external options terminal block, wire tying the cable to existing wires along
the way. Insert the cable ends into the terminal block (see Figure 5) if
necessary. Remove jumper JB1 from the OINK board.
For systems using OINK, revision 02C, locate the gray wire coming from J17
of the OINK board. Cut the gray wire approximately two inches from the
OINK board connector. Strip 1/4" of insulation from both ends of the gray
wire. Cut the J connector off of cable 4339 and strip 1/4" of insulation from
the black and red wires. Cut the 1 1/2" piece of heat shrink tubing (5190) in
half and slide it onto the red and black wires. Solder the red wire end to a
gray wire end, twisting the two wires together before soldering; repeat for the
black wire end and the remaining gray wire end. Place the heat shrink over
the exposed wire.
E.
Place the External options label (3680) on the pan. The label should be
placed in close proximity to the terminal block. Leave the data boxes on the
label blank if the information is unknown.
F.
Secure all wires in place with wire-ties.
G.
Start a QA or spine scan. Verify that the both LEDs (one near each relay)
illuminate in unison with the x-ray indicator on the scanners display panel.
Verify that scanner stops when external e-stop is engaged or e-stop jumper
(see Figure 1) is removed.
GENERATED RECORDS
None.
Page 6 of 6
DOC. ID: DXPC2000

GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
REVISION: AP
DATE: 12/19/02
WRITTEN BY: Jerry Mandt
TITLE: enCORE PC Configuration Procedure for WinNT
PURPOSE
This procedure is used to setup a PC and software for Drive Imaging enCORE (aka
Prodigy, DPX-NT, and DPX-MD+).
APPLICATION
This procedure applies to all PCs and software. Execute appropriate procedure steps
based on the model of PC to be configured and the sites requested by the sales order.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Disconnect the line cord from the Computer before opening the enclosure.
Precautions should be taken (e.g. wearing of grounding straps, etc.), when necessary,
to ensure a static-free environment exists when handling and installing PCBs and other
static sensitive devices.
None.
DEFINITIONS
None.
PROCEDURES
Section 1. SETTING UP THE PC (Standard configuration)
Loading Application Software
A.
Windows NT 4.0 Installation (not required for preloaded systems)

Section A of this procedure is used to: 1) Setup the Disk for imaging or, 2)
When replacing the system drive, only if attempts to recover a corrupt
system have failed. The steps described here will erase all data on the
system partition. The data will not be recoverable. If the system has an
Page 1 of 25
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXPC2000
REV: AP DATE: 12/19/02
CO: L10527
LS120 installed, set the first boot device to the CD-ROM following
Section S, and skip to step # 10. (To determine if the system has an
LS120- LS120 drives have the Emergency Eject holes on them.)
1. Restart the computer with the Windows NT 4.0 Workstation Setup Disk 1 in the
floppy drive.
2. Wait for the computer to load Setup Disk 1.
3. Insert Windows NT 4.0 Workstation Setup Disk 2 when prompted and press
<Enter>.
4. Press <Enter> to install NT.
5. Press <Enter> to detect disk controllers.
6. Insert Windows NT 4.0 Workstation Setup Disk 3 when prompted and press <Enter>
7. Verify setup detects IDE and SCSI disk controllers.
8. Press <Enter> to continue setup.
9. Insert Windows NT 4.0 Workstation CD when prompted and press <Enter> to
continue.
10. Press <Page Down> 7 times to scroll through license agreement.
11. Press <F8> to accept agreement and continue.
12. Press <n> to install a new version of NT.
13. Verify hardware and software components:
Computer:
Standard PC
Display: Auto Detect
Keyboard:
XT,AT, or enhanced keyboard (83-104 keys)
Keyboard layout:
US
Pointing device: Microsoft mouse port mouse
14. Press <Enter> to continue.
15. If a partition exists, use the up/down arrow keys to highlight it.
16. Press <d> to delete the partition.
Note: Deleting a partition will permanently destroy all data on the partition. Make
sure any data has been backed up so that it can be later restored. This action is
irreversible.
17. Press <Enter> to continue deleting the system partition.
18. Press <L> to verify deleting the partition.
19. Press <C> to create a new partition.
20. Use the Backspace key to clear the Default Partition size and enter 3999 as the
Partition size. Press <Enter> to accept the partition size. Note: This is the maximum
size for an installation partition. OTC will resize it according to our specs.
21. Press <Enter> to install the Partition.
22. Select the desired file system using up/down keys. Select NTFS File System and
press <Enter> to continue.
23. Wait for partition to be formatted.
24. Location for installation of NT files should be \WINNT. Press <Enter> to continue.
25. You should perform an exhaustive disk test if the software is being reloaded
because of a disk problem (i.e. hard disk failures). Press <Enter> to perform the
exhaustive test. Otherwise, press <ESC> to perform a quick disk test.
Page 2 of 25
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXPC2000
CO: L10527
26. Wait for the disk test to complete.

27. Wait for the file copy to complete.
28. Remove the diskette/CD from the drives and press <Enter> to restart the computer.
29. Wait for the restart to complete.
30. Insert Windows NT 4.0 Workstation CD into the drive and press <OK>.
31. Press <Next> to gather information required for install.
32. Select Typical installation and press <Next>.
33. Type in GE Lunar Corporation for both name and organization and press <Next>.
34. Type in the Product ID from the Certificate of Authenticity and press <Next>.
35. Type in ENCORE in the Computer Name and press <Enter>
36. Do not enter a Password. Press <Next> to continue.
37. Select Yes to create an Emergency Repair Disk and press <Enter> to continue.
(For Imaging purposes, select NO)
38. Select Install the most common components and press <Next>.
39. Press <Next> to install Windows Networking.
40. Select Do not connect this computer to a network at this time.
41. Select <Next> to continue.
42. Select <Finish> to complete the installation.
43. Select the appropriate time zone. (Central Time(US and Canada)
44. Verify correct time and date.
45. Press <Close> to continue.
46. Press <OK> to configure the display settings.
47. Note: The video card detected may not match the current configuration. Video
drivers should be loaded according to the steps specified later in this section.
48. Press <OK> to continue setup.
49. If you answered Yes to step #37, Label a Floppy disk, insert it in the drive and press
<Next> to continue.
50. Remove the CD and/or diskette and Restart the computer when prompted. If the
system has an LS120 installed, press [F2] on boot up, enter setup and reset the first
boot device to the Floppy Drive. Refer to Section S for the correct configuration.
51. Wait for the computer to restart.
52. Log in as Administrator. (No Password) and close the Welcome Window.
Setting up the Network Note: Before proceeding, copy both the I386 and SP6
folders to the HDD. This will facilitate the rest of the process. Refer to steps 5 & 7 of
section U for help.
1. Insert the latest Technical Data CD supplied by OTC, into the CD-ROM drive.
2. Use WindowsNT Explorer (click Start, Programs, WindowsNT Explorer) to create
a Folder called C:\NT_Drivers. Explore the Technical Data CD and Navigate to
Drivers\MBA and open either the Ca810E folder or the 815 folder depending on
which type of System board is in the PC. For the 845 board go to Drivers\NIC\486x.
The System board type is displayed during the POST Boot. Copy the Networking
folder to the folder you just created on the Hard Disk. Right click on the Networking
folder. From the drop down menu, click on copy. Move the cursor to the Hard Disk
Page 3 of 25
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXPC2000
CO: L10527
(C and Right click on (C:\NT_Drivers). From the drop down menu, click on Paste.
Close Explorer. Right click on the Networking folder and rename it to Network.
Close Explorer.
3. Right click on the Network Neighborhood Icon. Select Properties.
4. When prompted to install Networking, (Make sure youre connected to the Network),
select Yes.
5. Verify Wired to the Network is checked and click Next.
6. Click on Select from List and then Have Disk
7. When prompted for the drivers, type C:\NT_Drivers\Network and click OK
8. From the Select OEM option box, Select OK
9. From the Network Adapters box, click Next
10. From the Network Protocols box, check both TCP\IP and Net BEUI and click Next
11. From the Network Services box, click Next
12. Click Next to install the selected components.
13. Setup will need to copy some files from the WinNT CD. When prompted, enter
C:\Winnt\I386 for the location of the files and press Continue.
14. At the TCP\IP Setup screen, click Yes to use DHCP.
15. Click Next at the Show Bindings for screen.
16. Click Next to start the Network.
17. From the Computer Name and Workgroup box, click Next and then Finish.
18. Restart when prompted.
19. Uncheck the show this screen on the next login Close the Welcome screen.
20. Double click on the Network Neighborhood Icon to verify the connection. You
should see other members of the Workgroup such as:
Entire Network
Npprod
ENCORE
S5y5f4
Symposium
21.Exit the Network Neighborhood
Windows NT 4.0 Service Pack Installation 128 Bit Security (not
required for preloaded systems)
Prodigy/NT versions 2.16 and older use SP4
Insert the NT 4.0 Service Pack 4(SP4) CD into the CD-ROM drive.
Wait for autorun to display Lunar CD Browser menu.
Select Install NT 4.0 Service Pack 4 (40-bit).
Select Accept at the License Agreement screen
Deselect Backup files necessary to uninstall
Press <Install> to continue.
Wait for setup to complete.
Press <Restart> when prompted.
Page 4 of 25
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXPC2000
CO: L10527
Verify WinNT blue boot screen states Microsoft Windows NT

Version 4.0 Build 1381: Service Pack 4
Log in as Administrator.
A Message box may be displayed indicating Year 2000 issues with the
detected software components. (These issues will be resolved later in
this procedure)
Press <No> to the Y2K.TXT file question.
Remove the NT 4.0 Service Pack 4(SP4) CD from the drive.
Prodigy/NT versions 2.17 and newer use SP6 (installing from CD)
Insert the EnCore product CD into the CD-ROM drive.

Exit the CD browser when Autorun launches.
Navigate to NT4Sp6a\update and run update.exe
Select Accept at the License Agreement screen.
When the files are copied, the system will reboot.
Prodigy/NT versions 2.17 and newer use SP6 (installing from HD)
Click Start, Run and type in C:\SP6\Update\Update.exe
Select Accept at the License Agreement screen
When the files are copied, the system will reboot.
Remove the EnCore product CD from the drive.
Video Driver Installation (not required for preloaded systems)
For Granite Microsystems computers (STB NITRO 3D)
Insert the diskette labeled STB NITRO 3D Video Drivers WINNT into
the floppy drive.
Use Start|Settings|Control Panel|Display to load the drivers.
Select the Settings property page.
Press <Display Type>.
Press <Change>.
Press <Have Disk>.
Enter A:\ for Copy manufactures files from: and press <OK>.
Select STB Systems, Inc. Nitro 3D (ViRGE/GX) and press <OK>
Page 5 of 25
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXPC2000
CO: L10527
Continue to common section below.
For Omni-Tech computers (Matrox G200 Video Card)
Insert the Technical Data CD supplied by OTC, into the CD-ROM

drive.
From My Computer, double click on the CD-ROM drive and run setup
from \Drivers\Vdc\G200-400\WinNT40.
Select the Settings property page.
Press <Display Type>.
Press <Change>.
Press <Have Disk>.
Enter X:\Drivers\Vdc\G200\Winnt40 for Copy manufactures files
from: and press <OK>. (substitute X: for the appropriate CD-ROM
drive designation)
For Omni-Tech computers (on Board Video)
Insert the latest Technical Data CD supplied by OTC, into the CDROM drive.
Explorer the CD and navigate to \Drivers\MBA and open either the
Ca810E the 815 or the 845ge folder depending on which type of
System board is in the PC. The System board type is displayed
during the POST Boot. Open Video\WNT4 and copy the Graphics
folder to C:\NT_Drivers. Rename this folder to Video.
Open the Video folder and run Setup.exe.
At the Welcome Screen, Press Next.
At the License Agreement Screen, Press Yes.
At the Destination Location Screen, Press Next.
Remove the Technical Data CD
Restart the computer when prompted by clicking on Finish.
Go to Internet Explorer Section.
Common (this section applies to Video cards)
Press <Yes> at the warning message.

Wait for the file copy to complete and press <OK> when prompted.
Remove the diskette or CD from the drive.
Press <Close> to exit the Display Type dialog.
Press <Close> to exit the Display Properties dialog.
Press <Yes> to restart the computer.
Wait for the computer to restart.
Press <OK> when prompted that a new display adapter has been
added.
Check the Dont show this message again box and cancel the
Registration. (Do this on the second re-boot).
Page 6 of 25
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXPC2000
CO: L10527
Configure Settings to: Small fonts, 65536 colors and 1024x768 (for
17 monitors) and 800x600 (for 15 monitors).
Press <Test> to verify the settings will work properly.
Press <OK> to view the test pattern.
Press <Yes> if the pattern was displayed properly.
Press <OK> to close the Display Properties dialog.
Internet Explorer 4.01 SP2 Installation Note 1. Use SP1 for v2.16 and
earlier Note 2. If your setting up a system using enCORE v3.0 and
newer, use the enCORE application CD to install IE4. Use Explorer to
view the contents of the enCORE CD and run ie4setup.exe from the IE4
folder. Note 3. For systems with enCORE v6.7 use the enCORE
application CD to install IE6. Skip down to Press <Next> at welcome
dialog.
Insert EnCore OS Supplement v2 into CD-ROM drive.

Select Install Internet Explorer 4.01.
Press <Next> at welcome dialog.
Select Accept license agreement
Press <Next> to continue.
Select Standard Installation
Select Yes to install Desktop Update.
Select United States for the language.
Use default folder location (C:\Program Files\Plus!\Microsoft
Internet).
Wait for setup to complete.
Press <OK> to continue.
Press <OK> to restart the computer.
Logon as Administrator.
Wait for configuration to complete.
Next steps are for IE4 only
Close the IE4 quick tour by clicking on the X in the upper right hand
corner.
Use Start/Settings/Control Panel Double click on Display. Change
the Wall Paper to None by selecting the Background Tab.
Select the Web Tab.
Deselect View my Active Desktop as a web page
Press <Apply> and <OK>
Remove the CD
Page 7 of 25
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
B.
CO: L10527
Insert the latest Technical Data CD supplied by OTC, into the CDROM drive.
Explorer the CD and navigate to \Drivers\MBA and open either the
Ca810E the 815 or the 845ge folder depending on which type of
System board is in the PC. The System board type is displayed during
the POST Boot. Run the Setup program. At the Welcome screen, click
Next to begin the selected process.
When the Setup is complete, click Finish and reboot when prompted.
In the Microsoft Internet Explorer Welcome Dialog box, Deselect
Show this next time you log in and click Close.
Remove the CD
Configure Additional Users (optional)
D.
Audio Installation
C.
DOC ID: DXPC2000
If you want to setup new users, logon as the Administrator

Use Start|Programs|Administrative Tools (Common)| User Manager
From main menu select |User|New User
Enter the new users name in Username with a password.
Keep default settings so
- User will change password at next logon
- User cannot change password
- Password never expires
- Account is enabled
- Member of ordinary users
<OK>
Logout.
Login to confirm new user account.
Configure Desktop Settings (repeat for each user)

1. Login as desired user.
2. Right mouse click on an open space in the Task Bar and select
Properties to configure Task Bar properties Clear the Check mark from
Always on top option. Press Apply and OK.
3. Use Start|Settings|Control Panel|Display to configure display.
4. Click the Settings tab to configure the following settings. Small fonts,
65536 colors and 1024x768 (for 17 monitors) and 800x600 (for 15
monitors). If no changes were necessary, proceed to step # 7
5. Press Test to ensure video adapter can handle this resolution.
6. At the Did you see the Bitmap properly? Prompt, press Yes if the
bitmap appears. (Select Yes before 5 second timeout resets the display
settings to the previous values)
7. Press OK to set the selections and exit the display setup.
8. Double Click on the Regional Settings Icon. Select the Date Tab and Set
the short date format to mm/dd/yyyy. Click Apply and OK
Page 8 of 25
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXPC2000
CO: L10527
9. Double Click the System Icon. Select the Startup|Shutdown Tab and
Change the boot timeout from 30 seconds to 10 seconds in Show List
for 10 seconds Click Apply.
10. Select the Performance Tab, Click Change in the Virtual Memory box
and change the Paging File size of drive C in both the Initial size and the
Max size accordingly; Set both to 150mb for systems with 64mb physical
memory.
Set both to 300mb for systems with128mb physical memory.
Click Set, OK, Close and reboot when prompted.
11. Close the Control Panel
E.
Install (PCI) Modem Card and Drivers (Installed on all PCs)

Note: The 3Com PCI modem is installed using a default address and
a default IRQ. These should not be changed unless you are certain
there will be no conflicts.
1. Un plug the power cord, wait 5 seconds and install the Modem in
slot 3 for Prodigy and either slot 2 or 3 for Dpx-NT/MD+.
2. Plug in the power cord and boot the PC.
3. Insert the latest Technical Data CD supplied by OTC, into the
CD-ROM drive. Explorer the CD and navigate to
Drivers\MDI\3com\Setup.exe for the 810e/815 boards or
\Drivers\MDI\LPDF56K92\WinNT\Setup.exe for the 845 board.
The System board type is displayed during the POST Boot.
4. Run the Setup program.
5. Press Next, Next
6. Double click on Modem from Control Panel.
7. Click Dialing Properties and set the Area code to 608
To test the Modem, use Phone Dialer found in Accessories.

Prior to creating the in-house image (this is the image of the operating system setup
prior to Lunar Application software installation) verify/perform the following1. Empty the Recycle Bin.
2. Verify there are no errors from the last boot in the Event viewer (Start,
Programs, Administrative Tools, Event viewer)
F.
Printer Setup: HP930c
Copy the appropriate Print Driver folder from the Printer folder on the
current enCORE application CD to C:\NT_Drivers using Explorer.
Run the Setup program from within the folder you just copied over (i.e.
HP930c\Disk1\Setup)
Click Install Printer Software
Click Next at the Welcome screen
Page 9 of 25
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXPC2000
CO: L10527
At the Select Port screen, Verify LPT1 is the selected port and click
Next.
At the Congratulations screen, press Done.
Close Explorer.
Set the Printer Properties by using Start|Settings|Printers, rightmouse click and select Properties. Select the Scheduling tab and set
the Priority to 50, enable Spool print documents so program
finishes printing faster, and enable Start printing immediately.
Click OK to apply the changes and close the printer properties.
Removing HP IO
G.
Click Start, Programs, HP DeskJet 930C Series v2.3, HP DeskJet

930C Series v2.3 Toolbox.
Click the printer icon in the upper left corner of the Title bar.
Click About.
While holding down the CTRL key, double-click on the printer in the
middle of the screen.
A Configuration Dialog box should appear with name of your printer
highlighted. Make sure this dialog box is active (the Title bar will be
highlighted, if not click anywhere in the box to make it active). Press
ENTER, then click Continue. The Configuration screen should open.
Click the Remove HP IO button and confirm the removal. This may
take a few seconds. Control returns when the Remove HP IO button
is grayed out.
Deselect 4 items: Automatic two sided printing module handling, Status
client, Photo tray handling and Low on ink warning.
Close the Configuration screen.
Open the Services Icon in the Control Panel. Scroll down and
highlight the Printer Status Server. Press the Startup button and
Disable the service and press OK. Next press the Stop Button and
Stop the service. Close the Services program and exit the control
Panel.
Reboot the PC
Printer Setup: HP940c
3. Note: Use version 4.3 of the 930c print driver. HP IO is not installed with this
version.
H. Printer Setup: Kodak 1200
Insert the Driver Software CD
At the Welcome screen, press Next.
At the License Agreement Screen, press Yes.
From the Select Components screen, press Next.
Page 10 of 25
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
I.
DOC ID: DXPC2000
CO: L10527
Press Next at the Destination Location dialog box.

Press Next to start coping files.
Press Next at the Printer Port screen. (The default is LPT1)
Accept the printer name by pressing Next.
Set it up as the default printer and press Next.
Press Next at the Copy Files screen.
Press the Cartridges Tab from the Properties dialog box.
Press Install the Left cartridge and then select either Black
cartridge 1 for Gray scale printing or select Install cartridge 1 for
Color printing and press New.
Press Install Right cartridge, press Install cartridge 2 and press
New.
An alignment page will print out, use it to align the cartridges according
to the on screen prompt and press OK.
Press OK to close the Properties dialog box.
Wait for the setup to complete, uncheck the View the Readme file
and press Finish.
The PC will reboot automatically. Remove the CD.
Printer Setup: HP Business Inkjet 2250 Note: The very first time the
printer is turned on it can take up to 15 minutes to initialize and warm up.
Also when an ink cartridge is changed it can take a while to prime.
Insert the Driver Software CD
Select Install Print Driver
Press OK to install the software in English
Press Next at the Welcome screen and Accept the License
Agreement
With Connect directly to this computer selected, press Next
With Parallel selected and LPT1 highlighted, press Next
Select Custom setup and press Next
From the Components dialog box, deselect HP Business Inkjet 2250
PCL 5C driver and press Next
Press Install from the Installation Settings dialog box
Close the HP Installer help box and press Exit twice.
To Print a test page go to the properties page of the printer by
selecting Start/Settings/Printers and right clicking on the printer.
Sealevel Serial Adapter Driver Installation (PRODIGY ONLY)

Drivers for the SeaLevel serial adapter must be installed before the board
can be installed. The PCI Plug and Play feature requires the
manufacturers information files (*.inf) are installed first.
Login as Administrator.
Page 11 of 25
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
J.
DOC ID: DXPC2000
CO: L10527
Insert the Latest released Prodigy Setup CD into CD-ROM drive.

Select Install Serial Drivers from the Main Menu and press OK.
Close the Advanced Ports Windows NT Configuration Utility
screen
Exit the Prodigy Installation Menu.
Sealevel Serial Adapter Hardware Installation (PRODIGY ONLY)

Check Jumper settings on board:
J1A = On for P,P,T and off for L, L
J1B = All jumpers off
J1C = DIV2 on and off for DIV1 and DIV4
Shut down computer using Start|Shut down computer.

Wait for prompt when safe to turn off the computer.
Pull power cord out.
Remove PC cover.
Remove blank panel from PCI slot 2 to make room for SeaLevel serial
card. Note: Slots are numbered from the inside to the outside with the
inside slot being number one.
Install the Sealevel PCI card into slot 2. (For PCs with a Video card,
use slot 4)
Secure the card into slot using the screw removed from blank panel.
Insert power cord and turn power on.
Wait for the system to restart and login as Administrator.
From the Control Panel, (Start/Settings/Control Panel) double click
on Advanced Ports. Click on the appropriate COM port (COM3 if no
modem is installed, COM4 if a modem is installed and COM2 on the
845as described below)
Verify settings are Model 7102, PCI bus Port, and Valid Port is
checked.
Note: If there is a modem in the PC, the SeaLevel card will be configured as
COM4. For the PC P/N 41122 (845 bd.), the SeaLevel card is installed as
COM2
K. Application Software Installation
1. Login as Administrator.
2. Obtain the latest Production Master Application Software CD and insert it in the
CD-ROM drive.
3. Wait for autorun to display Lunar CD Browser menu.
4. Select product installation from Lunar CD Browser menu.
5. Press Yes to accept the EnCore Software License Agreement.
Page 12 of 25
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXPC2000
CO: L10527
6. The Default is Install required components. Accept this and press Next to
continue.
7. The installation is in several parts. Restart the system (if prompted) after each
component is installed.
8. If prompted at the Acrobat Reader screen, press Next, otherwise skip to step12.
9. Press Accept at the License Agreement screen.
10. Press <Next> at Install Location screen. (accept default location)
11. At the Thank You screen, press OK.
12. Press <Next > at the Product Welcome screen.
13. Press <Next> at Information screen.
14. Press <Next> at the User Information Screen.
16. Leave the System# and Feature Code fields blank and press <Next> to continue.
17. Press <Next> to Start Copying Files
20. Select Yes I want to Launch Prodigy/DPX-NT (or MD+) now and Press Finish.
As the Software opens, you will receive a few dialog boxes. (If a Modem is installed,
youll also get an invalid Com3 error- see the note below.)
If Tele-D is enabled in the feature code and Outlook is not yet
configured, you will be prompted with an error message from
Outlook stating there is no default mail client followed by an
application error message stating Enhanced messaging API is not
available. These message boxes will appear on application startup
until Outlook is properly configured.
Click OK to create a New QA Database
Click OK at No Primary Calibration file is specified (Prodigy only)
Click OK at No Database Connections
Set the archive path to the appropriate drive letter, if not A: and
Click OK to accept the New Database
NOTE: (PRODIGY ONLY) By default the COM port in the software is [3]. If
a modem is installed in the PC, follow the steps below to set the COM port
to [4]. NOTE: Version 5.00 and newer auto detect which port the SeaLevel
card is on and set the software accordingly. The 845 board has only one
on-board Communication port so the SeaLevel card will be setup as
Comm2.
From the Main Menu, Click [F6] Options, Select User Options.
Check the Service box and enter the Service Mode using Smile as the
password for version 1.3 and earlier and Award for version 2.1 and later,
and click OK. From the Main Menu, Click [F6] Options, and select service
options. Click on the Serial Tab. If a change is necessary, drop down the
selection menu by clicking on the button to the right of Port and change
the port accordingly. Click OK to close the Service Options box.
Page 13 of 25
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXPC2000
CO: L10527
Remove the CD.

Exit the Software only. Do not shut down the PC at this time.
Installing Optional Interface Cards and Drives

Note: If both a modem and a Network adapter are being installed, the Audio must
be disabled in the BIOS. Turn on the PC and enter the BIOS by pressing F2 when
prompted. Cursor to Advanced, select Peripherals and disable the Audio by
highlighting Audio and pressing enter. Select Disable and press Enter. Exit by
pressing F10, save the configuration and let the PC boot. You must also remove
the Audio drivers by double clicking on Multimedia from the Control Panel. Click on
the Devices Tab, and click the + by the Audio Devices. Highlight the Driver and click
Remove. Click Yes to the warning message. This will eliminate the service failure
message displayed during NT startup.
L. Install (PCI) Modem Card and Drivers (after the SeaLevel card is installed)
A. Prodigy Systems
1. Go to Start/Settings/Control Panel, open Advanced Ports.
Highlight Com3.Under Adapter information, click the Com Port
drop down menu button and select Com4. Click OK and Yes to
Restart.
2. From the Control Panel, double click Ports and click Add.
3. Select Com3 as the Com Port number.
4. Change the Base I/O Port Address to 03E8 by clicking on the
down arrow to the right of the Address box.
5. Change the IRQ to 4 by clicking on the down arrow to the right
of the Address box. Click OK and Dont Restart Now. Click Close.
6. Close the Control Panel, click Start, Shutdown and
Shutdown the PC.
7. Unplug the power cord, wait 5 seconds and Install the Modem in
slot 3
8. Plug in the power cord, power up the PC.
9. Wait for the PC to boot and go to Start/Settings/Control Panel,
open Ports. Highlight Com3, click Settings then Advanced and
Change the Base I/O Port Address to Default by clicking on the
down arrow to the right of the Address box.
10. Change the IRQ to Default by clicking on the down arrow to the
right of the Address box. Click OK and Dont Restart Now. Click
OK and Close. Close the Control Panel.
11. Insert the latest Technical Data CD supplied by OTC. Navigate
to \Drivers\MDI\3com\Setup.exe for the 810 and 185 board. .
Page 14 of 25
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXPC2000
CO: L10527
Navigate to \Drivers\MDI\LPDF56K92\WinNT\Setup.exe for the

845 board. Press Install to start the installation.
12. Press Yes to Restart.
13. Go to Start/Settings/Control Panel, open Advanced Ports.
Highlight Com3. Click Remove Port, and Yes to Are you sure.
Click OK and Yes to restart.
14. Close the Control Panel and remove the CD.
B. Dpx-NT (MD+) Systems
1. Un plug the power cord, wait 5 seconds and install the Modem in
slot 2 or 3
2. Plug in the power cord and boot the PC.
3. Insert the latest Technical Data CD supplied by OTC Navigate to
\Drivers\MDI\3com\Setup.exe for the 810 and 185 board. .
Navigate to \Drivers\MDI\LPDF56K92\WinNT\Setup.exe for the
845 board.
4. Press Install to start the installation.
5. Press Yes to Restart.
6. Remove the CD.
Prodigy only: Use Advanced Ports from the Control Panel and Verify
COM4 is a valid PCI port. Press Cancel to avoid the reboot prompt.
Prodigy only: When opening Prodigy you will receive an error message
stating a 750 Serial card has been detected or incorrect Serial Port
configuration. This is because the software is by default, set to Com3. You
must go into Service Options and set the Port to Com4. NOTE: Version
5.00 and newer auto detect which port the SeaLevel card is on and set the
software accordingly. The 845 board has only one on-board
Communication port so the SeaLevel card will be setup as Comm2.
To test the Modem, use Phone Dialer found in Accessories.
M. NIC Installation. (Network Interface Card) Note: Omni Tech PC Models #
OEM-1000D01810E, 8100D05815 and the OEM-3124D00 Halyron ESG(845ge
board) come with integrated Networking.
If the LAN needs to be re-installed, the Drivers can be located on the OTC
Technical Data CD (Version 1.63 or newer for the 815 board) in either the
Drivers\MBA\CA810E\Networking folder or the
Drivers\MBA\815\Networking folder.
Point the installation to the above folder and from the list of drivers
select the 8255x-Based PCI Ethernet Adapter 10/100. This is the
preferred driver although any of the drivers in the list will work just fine.
Follow the prompts to complete the installation. Note: You must reinstall the Service Pack. Refer to the Service Pack installation of
Section A.
Page 15 of 25
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXPC2000
CO: L10527
For the 845ge board navigate to \Drivers\NIC\846x\Setup.exe. From

the list of drivers select the Intel Pro 100 Family adapter. Follow the
instructions on Setting up the Network in Section A
SCSI Installation
N.
Adapter Installation
1. Insert the supplied driver CD which is packaged with the Jaz drive. If
Autorun starts, cancel it.
2. Go to Start/Settings/Control Panel, and double click on SCSI
Adapters. Click the Drivers Tab and then click on ADD.
3. Click on Have Disk. When prompted for the location of the drivers,
type X:\Drivers\NT40\Jaz Jet 2930C (replace X with your CD-ROM
drive letter), and press OK to continue.
4. From the Select driver box, press OK.
5. Enter the same path as in step #3 and press OK.
6. Restart the PC when prompted. You will receive an error message on
boot up stating, One or more driversfailed to start. This is ok.
7. Remove the CD and shut down the PC. (Start, Shutdown, OK)
8. Un plug the power cord, wait 5 seconds and install the SCSI adapter in
PCI slot one (the slot closest to the Power Supply).
9. Install the drive in one of the 3.5 drive bays with the provided
hardware. Connect the SCSI cable from the drive to the adapter card
and connect the power cable to the drive.
10. Plug in the power cord and power up the PC.
Zip Drive Installation

O.
Refer to LUPC0001 (Verify latest Rev) for the drive installation procedure.
Zip Driver Installation

The drivers can be found on the CD that OmniTech supplies with all their PC's,
(Technical Data CD, the path is \Drivers\Tad\Iomega) v1.60 (dated 12/8/00) or
newer. Run Ioware.exe.
2. At the Welcome screen, press Next
3. Press Yes to the License agreement.
4. Accept the default Destination Location by pressing Next.
5. Click Close to end Setup.
6. Shut down when prompted and install the drive.
7. When re-started the installation will resume. Answer Yes if the Zip drive is
displayed.
8. Close the congratulations box and verify the operation of the drive.
9. The setup will ask if youre installing a USB drive, Answer NO.
Page 16 of 25
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXPC2000
CO: L10527
The drive will be installed with the next Physical drive letter. To change the
drive letter to the last Logical letter,
1.
Go to Start\Programs\Administrative Tools\Disk Administrator
(youll need to have a disk in the Zip drive to do this)
2.
Right click on the second partition of Disk 0, (E:) and select Assign
Drive Letter. Change the Drive Designation to any unused letter.
Press OK and accept the Change.
3.
Right click on Drive D: and select Assign Drive Letter. Set the
Drive Designation to E: Press OK and accept the Change.
4.
Right click on the Drive you changed in step 2 and change the drive
to D:
5.
Reboot the PC.
This procedure can be used to switch any drive letters except A:
P.
Installing Outlook 2000

1.
Insert the CD and wait for Autorun to launch.
2.
At the Welcome screen, enter the CD key code and press Enter.
3.
Accept the Agreement and press Next.
4.
Click Customize
5.
From the Install Location dialog box, press Next.
6.
From the Updating Windows dialog box, click the drop down
menu arrow and select Do not upgrade Microsoft I.E. and press
Next.
7.
From the Selecting Features window, click on the yellow 1 by
Symantec Fax starter, select Not available and press Install Now.
8.
Wait for the files to be copied and restart when prompted.
Refer to DXAP2030 for Setup Procedures.
Installing Outlook 2002 Note: Version >6.0 If the system you are installing
Outlook 2002 on does not have the minimum required level of functionality, you
will be prompted to update the Core System, Data Access Components and Web
Browsing. If prompted to update, proceed with step 2, if not skip to step 4.
1.
2.
If prompted to update, press Next.
3.
From System Files Update Setup drop down the selection menu
and select Do Not upgrade I.E and press Next. Reboot when
prompted
4.
Enter the Product key (found on the back of the case), and press
Next.
5.
Accept the Agreement and press Install.
6.
From the Type of Installation screen, click Next.
7.
Begin the installation by clicking Install.
8.
When the install is complete, press OK, remove the CD and reboot
the system.
Page 17 of 25
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXPC2000
CO: L10527
Refer to DXAP2030 for Setup Procedures.

Q.
Remote Access Service Installation

1.
Right click on the Network Neighborhood Icon and select
Properties.
2.
Click the Services Tab and press Add.
3.
Select Remote Access Service and press OK.
4.
Insert the WinNT CD when prompted (if Autorun Launches, close it)
and press Continue.
5.
From the add RAS device dialog box, verify the modem (56k fax
internal PCI) is selected and press OK.
6.
From Remote Access Setup, press continue.
7.
Close the Network dialog box and press No when prompted to
restart and Re-install the appropriate Service Pack. Refer to the
Service Pack installation of Section A.
R.
Configure WinFax Pro (Modem software)
Configuring Windows NT to use the fax modem.

1. In Windows NT Control Panel, (Start, Settings, Control Panel)
double click the Modems icon. Verify that the 56K Fax INT
modem is present. If the Modem is not present you will get the
prompt asking if you want to install one. Follow the appropriate
steps above.
2. Click on Dialing Properties and enter 608 as the area code.
(The customer will have to change this later) Press Close,
Close and Exit the Control Panel.
Installing WinFax PRO

1. Insert the WinFax installation CD and wait for autorun to display
WinFax Pro Menu Screen.
2. Click Install.
3. At the Welcome Screen, press Next.
4. At the License Agreement Screen, press Yes.
5. Click Next at the User Information Screen.
6. Click Next at the Destination Folder Screen.
7. The Default Setup Type is Typical, Click Next.
8. Click Next at the Select Program folder.
9. Click Next at the Start Copying Files screen.
10. At the File Copy Complete screen, click Finish to reboot.
11. Click Next at the WinFax Pro Setup (CSID) screen. (Leave the
fields blank)
Page 18 of 25
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXPC2000
CO: L10527
12. At the Modems and Other Fax Devices screen, select the
56K FAX modem from the modem and device list if it is not
already selected and click Next.
13. Click Next to Test the Modem.
14. The results of the Test list the class and speed of the Modem.
Click Next to continue.
15. With Yes selected in the Enable Controller dialog box,
press Next.
16. From the Configure E-Mail screen, click Next.
17. Press Cancel at the Online Registration screen and Yes to
Are You Sure? click Next.
18. From the Ready to Configure System screen, press Finish.
19. Answer NO to the Readme question.
20. Cancel the Live Update.
21. Select Yes to the Message Manager.
22. From the Phone book autolink screen, check Outlook 2000
and press OK.
23. Press Next at the Phone Book Name
24. Click on the Set Information button.
25. Click on the Use Business Related Information Radio button
(if not already selected) and press OK.
26. Press Finish
27. After rebooting Windows NT and logging back on, verify that the
fax icon appears on the status bar.
28. The WinFax Installation program has a bug in it. To correct it,
Click Start, then Settings, and Printers. Right click on WinFax.
Select Document Defaults from the Drop down list. Click the
Advanced Tab. In the WinFax Document Settings dialog box,
click on Print Quality. Click on Low Resolution Fax in the
Change Print Quality Setting Box and click OK. Right click on
WinFax and Select Document Defaults again. Change the
Resolution back to Normal by clicking the Advanced Tab. In the
WinFax Document Settings dialog box, click on Print Quality.
Click on Normal Resolution Fax in the Change Print Quality
Setting Box and click OK.
29. Close the Printers Dialog box and remove the CD
Configuring AutoMentor
1. Subject to change.)
Verify that you select WinFax as one of the available printers from
within the application and that you can fax a patient report to Lunar
service or some other destination. AutoMentor is not enabled at
this time.
S.
Setting the CD-ROM as the first Boot Device.
Page 19 of 25
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXPC2000
CO: L10527
On boot up, Press [F2] to enter Setup.

Press the key 4 times to enter the Boot Menu.
Press the key 7 times to the first Boot Device and press <Enter>.
Cursor down to the CD-ROM and press <Enter>. Insert the Bootable
CD (i.e. Windows NT Workstation) and press [F10] to save and exit
setup. Windows Setup will initiate on boot up. Press <Enter> at the
Welcome screen, press enter at the mass storage detection screen,
and skip to step # 10 of section A.
Default Boot Sequence

FDD
HDD
CD-ROM
T.
PCI card slot assignment (for PCs with a Video Card)

PCI Slot 1: Adaptec SCSI Card (Optional)
PCI Slot 2: Virge Nitro 3D Video Card
PCI Slot 3: EtherLink Network Card (optional)
PCI Slot 4: SeaLevel Serial Card
PCI card slot assignment (for PCs with on board Video and NIC)
PCI Slot 3: Modem
PCI Slot 4:
U.
Creating the Image
Prior to creating the Final image (this is the image of the operating system setup with
the Lunar Application software installed) verify/perform the following1. Empty the Recycle Bin.
2. Verify there are no errors from the last boot in the Event viewer (Start, Programs,
Administrative Tools, Event viewer)
3. Verify DMA is Enabled. DMA Check is a small utility (NT only) used to
enable/disable the DMA of the HDD. There is a copy on the network at
R&D\Software(32Bit)\Utilities. Copy the file DMA check to a floppy disk, insert
the disk in the PC being configured and using WindowsNT Explorer (click Start,
Programs, WindowsNT Explorer), switch to the a: drive and double click on
DMA check. Place a in both Enabled boxes. Press OK, then Yes to the
Warning Message. Press OK at the Finished prompt.
4. For SP4 - Insert the EnCore OS Supplement v2 CD. (Exit the CD browser when
Autorun launches). Using WindowsNT Explorer, copy the i386 folder from the
NT4SP4a folder located on the EnCore OS Supplement v2 CD onto the Hard
Disk. Rename this folder to SP4.
Page 20 of 25
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXPC2000
CO: L10527
5. For SP6 Insert the EnCore product CD. (Exit the CD browser when Autorun
launches). Using WindowsNT Explorer, copy the NT4SP6a folder from the
EnCore product CD onto the Hard Disk. Rename this folder to SP6.
6. Using WindowsNT Explorer, create a folder on the Hard Disk called NT_Drivers
and copy the following folders into it. Explore the Technical Data CD and
Navigate to Drivers\MBA and open either the Ca810E folder or the 815 folder
depending on which type of System board is in the PC. The System board type is
displayed during the POST Boot. For the 845 board go to Drivers\NIC\846x.
Copy the Networking folder to the folder you just created on the Hard Disk. Right
click on the Networking folder. From the drop down menu, click on copy. Move
the cursor to the Hard Disk (C:) and Right click on (C:\NT_Drivers). From the
drop down menu, click on Paste. Right click on the Networking folder and
rename it to Network. Close Explorer.
7. Using WindowsNT Explorer, copy the i386 folder from the WinNT 4.0 CD into the
WinNT folder on the Hard Disk.
8. Insert the latest Production Master Application Software CD and install Dklite.
After the installation is complete, defrag the HD by going to Start, Programs,
Dklite.
10. All OmniTech PC models with on board LAN have networking installed. This
means that you will receive an error message every time the system is booted
(and every 6 minutes) if it is not connected to the Network. To avoid this message
disable the DHCP Client. Go to Start,Settings,Control Panel.
Double click on the Services Icon.
Highlight DHCP Client and click on Startup.
Click in the disabled radio button and press OK.
Note: Prior to connecting a system to a LAN, the service must be re-enabled.
11. Refer to LUPC0006 to create the Image.
Section 2. Duplicating Product Software

If the appropriate version of software is already loaded on the local hard disk,
proceed with Step B. This can be verified by locating the appropriate folder
named \product_X_XX_XXX on local hard drive; where product_X_XX_XXX is
the product software version to be duplicated.
A.
Creating Master Software on Duplicator PC.
Insert product Master Setup CD into CD-ROM drive.

Wait for Lunar CD Browser to start.
Exit Lunar CD Browser.
Create folder named \product_X_XX_XXX on local hard drive.
Copy entire contents of product Master Setup CD into folder created
above.
Wait for copy to complete and remove the Master Setup CD from the
CD-ROM drive.
Page 21 of 25
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
B.
DOC ID: DXPC2000
CO: L10527
Start Adaptec Easy CD Creator.

Select Data CD and press <Next>
Select entire contents of the folder product_X_XX_XXX.
Press <Add Now> to add the selected files and sub-folders to the CD
layout. Press <Next>
Select Do not perform test and press <Next>
Select Create CD later and press <Finish>
Change CD label to product_X_XX_XXX using menu command
File|CD Layout Properties
Save CD layout as product_X_XX_XXX.cl3 using menu command
File|Save As
Create Product CD.
Insert blank CD into CD-ROM drive.

Start Adaptec Easy CD Creator.
Press <Cancel> from the CD Creator Wizard Dialog.
Open CD layout product_X_XX_XXX.cl3 using menu command
File|Open CD Layout.
Validate CD layout using menu command File|Validate Layout
If errors are encountered, go to Step A of this section to restore
required files.
Start recording process using menu command File|Create CD
Select option to: Test and create CD
Select <OK> to start recording.
Verify CD was created successfully.
Section 3. Configuring Application Software
Check Sales Order for System Number and Application Sites.

Get S/W Order Form FM03-4.
Start Configurator.
Enter System Number and select the options per the sales order.
Do not enable any application that does not have okay to ship status
unless approved by Regulatory Affairs. Review table below for latest
status. If Regulatory Affairs approval is granted, then enable the
application and add special Investigation label on software.
Page 22 of 25
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXPC2000
Application
DPX-MD+
Release
Status
DPX-NT
Release
Status
Prodigy Pro
Release
Status
AP Spine
Femur
Total Body
Standard
Standard
Optional
(Full-size
Only)
Optional
Optional
Standard
Standard
Optional
(Full-size
Only)
Optional
Optional
Optional
Dual Femur
Advanced Hip
Assessment
Pediatric
Spine
Pediatric
Total Body
Forearm
oneVision
Orthopedic
Lateral
HL7
Multiuser DB
Teledensitom
etry
Dicom
Lateral View
Business
Reports
(encore
composer)
Physician
Reports
(encore
composer)
Animal body
All other
Software
Options
CO: L10527
Standard
Standard
Optional
(Full-size
Only)
Standard
Optional
Prodigy
Oracle
Release
Status
Standard
Standard
Standard
(Full-size
Only)
Standard
Optional
Prodigy
Vision
Release
Status
Standard
Standard
Standard
(Full-size
Only)
Standard
Standard
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Standard
Optional
Optional
Optional
Standard
Standard
Optional
Standard
Optional
Optional
Standard
Optional
Not Available
Optional
Optional
Not Available
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Optional
Optional
Optional
Standard
Standard
Not Available
Not Available
Internal use
only
Internal use
only
Optional.
Need
warning label
40122
Internal use
only
Optional.
Need
warning label
40122
Internal use
only
Optional.
Need
warning label
40122
Internal use
only
Note: Compact systems do not require a configuration feature code. They are
configured in the field at the time of install using Service Options.
Page 23 of 25
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXPC2000
CO: L10527
Serial and System numbers:

First Scanner Number
First System Number
70001
70101
72001
72101
73001
73101
NT+70000
NT+70000
NT+72000
NT+72100
NT+73000
NT+73100
DPX-NT (DPX-MD+)
NTA Beta
NTA Production
NTB Beta
NTB Production
NTC Beta
NTC Production
DPX-NT 180 (DPX-MD+ 180)
NTB-180 Beta
NTB-180 Production
NTC-180 Beta
NTC-180 Production
90001
NT-90101
91001
91101
NT-91000
NT-91100
Prodigy
Prodigy 1 Beta
Prodigy 1 Production
Prodigy 2 Beta
Prodigy 3 Beta
Prodigy 4 Beta
60001
60101
62001
62101
63001
63101
64001
64101
DF+10001
DF+10001
DF+12000
DF+12100
DF+13001
DF+13101
DF+14001
DF+14101
Prodigy Compact
Prodigy 3 Compact Beta
80001
DF-80001
Prodigy 3 Compact Production
80101
DF-80101
81001
DF-81001
81101
DF-81101
Note, in each system number, the plus or minus symbol is used to denote total body
option availability. This has been for historical purposes. Configurator is not
conditionally tied to this convention.
Application
Production Release
Limited release for
user tests at early
adopter sites
DPX-MD+ Release
Status
6.70.021 on NT
hardware
None
DPX-NT Release
Status
6.70.021
None
Prodigy Release
Status
6.70.021
None
Page 24 of 25
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXPC2000
CO: L10527
Configurator program automatically generates the feature code.

Select required printer, using menu command File|Printer Setup, to
Epson FX-880.
Print three labels.
Remove labels and place one on the S/W Production Form in the
designated area. Place the second label on the CD Diskette sleeve.
Place the third label on the PC Form.
Using Copy/Paste (Ctrl C/Ctrl V), take feature code from configuration
and paste into Filemaker DB program.
Fill out paperwork associated with software order form.
Note: Internal QA/Production software should be configured as System Number

00002 with all sites enabled.
GENERATED RECORDS
DXPC2001
FM03-4
DPX Fan PC Configuration Form

Software Order Form
Page 25 of 25
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC. ID: DXAP2011

REVISION: B
DATE: 8/13/01
TITLE: enCORE Beam Wobble Procedure
PURPOSE
This procedure describes the steps necessary to perform the Beam Wobble scan for
Prodigy or DPX-NT systems.
APPLICATION
This procedure applies to all employees performing installation or service of Prodigy
scanners with version 2.26 or greater software.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
The x-ray generator produces a beam of ionizing radiation. The technician should take
precautions to avoid exposing any part of their body to the x-ray beam.
DXAP2000
DXAP2004
DXAP200x
Prodigy Installation Instructions

Prodigy Installation Report
Prodigy Source Detector Alignment
DEFINITIONS
None.
PROCEDURES
1.
LIMIT TO LIMIT TEST

A.
Remove the scanners table top (if not already removed).
B.
Service Enter Password (Smile sw ver 1.0 2.05 or Award ver 2.10
+)
C.
Insure that the Front, Head and Foot Panels are minimally hanging on the
scanner frame.
Page 1 of 7
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
D.
DOC ID: DXAP2011
REV: B
DATE: 8/13/01
CO: 7012
Run the limit to limit test with the configure box checked to establish the
scan window.
1. Select Tools / Diagnostics / Scanner Motion
2. Click on the configure box there will be a check mark in the box
when it is selected.
3. Click on Start in the limit to limit box
4. While the Limit to Limit test is running be sure to listen and look for
anything that is binding or impeding the mechanics of the scanner.
In particular:
- Tube head and shutter assembly must clear tabletop and carriage
bracket bolts.
- Shutter assembly wiring should be correct and wire tied so they do
not catch on anything
- Especially watch for binding while the scan arm is moving to home
position. The Molex connector of the collimator assembly may
hang up, causing the scanner to jerk when moving off of the limit
switch.
- Also verify that the arm slot cover is not slipping out of the guides
when the scan arm is at the head and foot of the scan table.
- The height of the High Voltage cable trough must be low enough
so that the High Voltage cables do not get hung up on the stepper
motor drive (CENTENT) but not so low as to cause the high
voltage cables to bind.
- Insure that all moving parts are traveling to their limits without
restriction or impediment.
5. Check the limit to limit values against the table below.
Direction
Longitudinal
Transverse
Steps
19875
12475
Tolerance
+/- 25
+/- 25
6. If any of the limit to limit distances are out of spec perform the steps
below, if values pass go to step 7.
I.
II.
If the front panel is on the scanner, remove it.

Go to Tools\Diagnostics\Scanner Motion
Page 2 of 7
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
III.
DOC ID: DXAP2011
REV: B
DATE: 8/13/01
CO: 7012
Click on Move to Home - Place the "Home Position" jig in the home
corner. Verify the hole in the collimator lines up with the hole in the jig
as in figure 1.
FIGURE 1: Home position Jig verifying home position

IV.
If home position does not match the Home position Jig, adjust the limit
switch positions using the service software as illustrated in step A
below. If home position does not need to be adjusted, proceed to
step V.
a. Go to Tools/Diagnostics/Limit Switch Adjustment
b. Follow the on Screen prompts DO NOT EDIT THE DEFAULT
VALUES
c. If limit switch positions are altered a Limit to Limit test (see VI
below) must be run with the configure box checked to recalibrate
the scanners range of motion.
Page 3 of 7
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXAP2011
REV: B
DATE: 8/13/01
CO: 7012
V.
Replace all exterior scan table panels (see DXAP2000 Figure 9 for
panel placement and fastener selection), with the exception of the arm
shrouds.
VI.
In the Service software, go to Tools / Diagnostics / Scanner

Motion. Check the configure box and then Run the Limit to Limit Test
by clicking on the Start button for Limit to Limit verify that the Step
Values for longitudinal and transverse are within tolerance.
NOTE: If the scan window is altered in any way (limit switch moved
scanner is reassembled) the Limit to Limit Test must be run with the
configure box checked.
7. Run a second limit to limit test with approximately 250 lbs (150kg) of
weight on the table top, check for binding in the arm slot cover at this
time.
8. Click on Close
2.
PERFORM BEAM WOBBLE

A.
B.
C.
D.
Select Measure use the patient Phantom Spine if the patient does not
exist enter the following information
Enter patient information for Spine Phantom (if it has already been entered,
go to step E).
Enter the Directory by selecting the Directory F4 button from the main
screen.
Open the New Patient dialog by clicking the New button on the Directory
toolbar.
Page 4 of 7
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXAP2011
REV: B
DATE: 8/13/01
CO: 7012
Figure 2: New Patient Dialogue Box with Spine Phantom Patient information
entered in the appropriate fields.
E.
Enter the patient information as illustrated in figure 2.
F.
Click OK to close the dialog and save the new patient information.
G.
Double-click the Spine Phantom patient in the Patient List to enter the New
Measurement screen.
H.
Click on Beam Wobble in the Site box (it will be highlighted blue when it is
selected)
I.
Verify that the table top is off and there are no objects positioned around the
table that might impede scanner motion
J.
Click on position in the tool bar at the top of the screen
K.
Allow the scanner to acquire reference counts in the center of the table
make sure the alignment aperture is not present.
L.
When prompted, place the alignment aperture on to the collimator, then click
OK.
Page 5 of 7
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXAP2011
REV: B
DATE: 8/13/01
CO: 7012
M.
When the scanner returns home, click on Start and allow the Beam Wobble
scan to run. It will take approximately 6 minutes.
N.
When the test is complete it will be analyze it by clicking on the analyze

button on the tool bar.
O.
Select the Spine Phantom patient from the list and then double click on the
appropriate Beam Wobble file.
a. Verify that the TEST RESULTS Test Outcome = Pass
b. If the test does not pass, look at the image, it should look
essentially like a random distribution of gray.
c. White areas with an outline indicate areas where alignment
problems exist.
Figure 2: Failing Beam Wobble Image Alignment Aid

showed that the beam was biased toward detector 1 (head)
Alignment aid showed good alignment in all other areas of the
scan table. Lowering the front foot corner with the glide
improved the alignment in Alignment Aid.
Page 6 of 7
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXAP2011
REV: B
DATE: 8/13/01
CO: 7012
d. To correct these areas of mis-alignment:

1. Verify table level
2. Verify that nothing is impeding scanner motion
3. Verify count rate / alignment in Signal Monitor or Alignment Aid
in the problem areas of the scan table.
4. Adjust Table level / alignment as necessary.
5. Re-Run the Beam Wobble test
6. If the Beam Wobble test fails a second time perform
DXAP2006 Prodigy Dial Indicator Alignment Verification
Procedure.
NOTE: If anything passes through the beam during this test, IT WILL FAIL.
P.
When passing results have been achieved, print the results by clicking on the
Print button on the toolbar.
Q.
When the Beam Wobble has been completed return to DXAP2001 step 7-A
to complete the alignment.
GENERATED RECORDS
None.
Page 7 of 7
DOC. ID: DXAP2030

GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
REVISION: D
DATE: 3/1/02
WRITTEN BY: Tom Bergman
TITLE: Teledensitometry Configuration Procedure
PURPOSE
This procedure is used to setup the Teledensitometry kit and any optional software for
Prodigy and DPX-NT.
APPLICATION
This procedure applies to certain LUNAR validated PCs and software (Granite
Microsystems where applicable and OmniTech computers). It can be used as a
guideline for installing hardware and software in other computers, however there is no
guarantee that this procedure will in fact work with other PCs. Execute appropriate
procedural steps based on the model of PC to be configured and the number of
additional Teledensitometry options ordered by the site.
If the hardware setup is to be performed on a system running Windows XP,

follow section 6. Note: After setting up Outlook, the customer should be strongly
encouraged to archive their mail on a weekly basis. This backup should place
the archived file on the D: drive. In the event a customer uses the recovery
image and they have not archived their mail to the D: drive, it will be lost
including all contacts.
If the hardware setup is to be performed on a Prodigy system, follow section 1.
If the hardware setup is to be performed on a DPX-NT system, follow section 2.
If the hardware is already setup and you need to install Microsoft Outlook 2000
software, follow section 3.
If the hardware is already setup and you need to install WinFax Pro software,
follow section 4.
If the hardware is already setup and you need to install WinFax Pro software
and/or other Teledensitometry options, follow section 4 (SETTING UP WINFAX
PRO SOFTWARE) and section 5 (SETTING UP TELEDENSITOMETRY
SOFTWARE).
Page 1 of 20
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXAP2030
REV: D
DATE: 3/1/02
CO: L10181
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
None.
LUNAR enCORE Operators Manual P/N 8543
LUNAR Ambassador HL7 Interface Configuration Manual P/N 8596
LUNAR DICOM Operators Manual P/N 17663
Setting up a Multi-User Database
DXPC2000 DPX-Fan/DPX-NT PC Configuration Procedure
DEFINITIONS
None.
PROCEDURES
Section 1. INSTALLING HARDWARE IN PCs CONNECTED TO
PRODIGY
A. Installing Optional Interface Cards
Note: OmniTech computers require some alterations prior to installing
interface cards. If both a modem and a Network adapter are being
installed, the Audio must be disabled in the BIOS. Turn on the PC and
enter the BIOS by pressing F2 when prompted. Cursor to Advanced,
select Peripherals and disable the Audio by highlighting Audio and
pressing Enter. Select Disable and press Enter. Exit by pressing F10,
save the configuration and let the PC boot. Remove the Audio drivers by
double clicking on Multimedia from the Control Panel. Click on the
Devices Tab, and click the + by the Audio Devices. Highlight the Driver
and click Remove. Click Yes to the warning message. This will eliminate
the service failure message displayed during NT startup.
There are two possible types of modems that can be in the
Teledensitometry kit, ISA or PCI. If there are jumpers on the card it is an
ISA, if not it is a PCI card. For ISA modems go to step B, for PCI
modems go to step C.
B. Install (ISA) Modem Card and Drivers
All new systems are purchased with the SeaLevel card installed as Com3.
If a modem is being added, follow the steps below:
Page 2 of 20
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXAP2030
REV: D
DATE: 3/1/02
CO: L10181
1. Jumper the modem for Com3, IRQ 4 and install it in the outermost ISA
slot.
2. Login in as Administrator and install the modem drivers by going to the
Control Panel and double clicking on the Modem Icon. Check the
Dont detect my Modem box and click Next.
i. Omni-Tech Systems
1. Insert the CD supplied from OTC (Technical Information
and Data) and click Have Disk. Switch to the CD drive
and click Browse. Double click on Drivers|MDI|USRB.
Click Open then OK. In the Manufacturers box, click U.S.
Robotics Access Corp. and select the 56k fax internal
modem and click Next. Select Com3 as the port to
install the drivers on and click Next. Click Finish and
from the Modem Properties Dialog box, click Dialing
Properties and enter the Area Code. Click OK, Close.
3. Prodigy only: Use Advanced Ports from the Control Panel and
change the second Com3 port to COM4. Click OK and let the
computer reboot.
4. Prodigy only: Use Advanced Ports again and Verify COM4 is a valid
PCI port. Select Cancel to avoid the reboot prompt.
5. Prodigy only: When opening the Prodigy program you will receive an
error message stating a 750 Serial card has been detected or
incorrect Serial Port configuration. This is because the software is by
default, set to Com3. You must go into Service Options and set the
Port to Com4.
6. To test the Modem, use Phone Dialer found in Programs\Accessories.
7. To load WinFax Pro software go to Section 3.
C. Install (PCI) Modem Card and Drivers
there will be no conflicts. For PCs in the field that already have
Microsoft Windows-NT Service pack 6 installed, Go to Step 1. For
PCs with Service Pack 4 go to step 3.
1. Remove the SeaLevel Serial card drivers by going to
Start|Settings|Control Panel. Select Add/Remove Programs,
Highlight SUD Setup and then select Add/Remove. After the serial
drivers have been removed close the Add/Remove Programs screen.
Restart the PC.
Page 3 of 20
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXAP2030
REV: D
DATE: 3/1/02
CO: L10181
2. Go to Start|Settings|Control Panel, select Ports. Highlight Com 3

and select Delete. Exit Control Panel and power down PC.
3. Install the Modem in slot 3.
1. Insert the supplied OTC Technical Data CD (ver 1.41 or >)
and wait for the Autorun to launch. Exit the autorun
program on the CD. Click Start|Run and Browse. Navigate
to \Drivers\MDI\3com and run Setup. Reboot when
prompted. After a successful reboot you may enter setup
(BIOS) and re-enable the Audio (if disabled in step 2).
2. If you have removed the SeaLevel drivers in step C.1. you
must reinstall them now by inserting the Prodigy CD in the
CDROM drive, wait for autorun to launch and select option
#1-Serial drivers version XXX.
4. Prodigy only: Use Advanced Ports from the Control Panel and Verify
COM4 is a valid PCI port. Press Cancel to avoid the reboot prompt.
5. Prodigy only: When opening Prodigy you will receive an error
message stating a 750 Serial card has been detected or incorrect
Serial Port configuration. This is because the software is by default,
set to Com3. You must go into Service Options and set the Port to
Com4.
i. Go to Tools|User Options|Systems tab.
ii. Check the Service checkbox and enter in the appropriate
password. Select OK.
iii. Go to Tools|Service Options|Serial tab.
iv. Change the Com port to 4.
v. Select OK to close.
vi. Exit Prodigy software.
6. To test the Modem, use Phone Dialer found in Accessories.
7. To Load WinFax Pro software proceed to Section 3.
D. Adding a Network Interface Card (NIC) to an existing system
NOTE: There must be a functional network connection in order for the
installation of Windows Networking to be tested. Consult with the customers
IS department, or Network person, to determine the protocols and services
required. If a workgroup (no server) is used then the specific TCP/IP address
will have to be known before installing the NIC. If a DHCP Server is used,
then a Computer Name and Domain must be known before installing the
NIC. The Computer Name must match the one given by the Network
Administrator. To change the Computer Name, Right click on Network
Neighborhood from the Desktop. Answer No to setting up the network
Page 4 of 20
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXAP2030
REV: D
DATE: 3/1/02
CO: L10181
now. Go to Properties| Identification and Change. Edit the Computer

Name. Do not reboot the computer now, rather shutdown and install the
NIC. Follow the appropriate steps below. DICOM and HL7 features require
TCP/IP protocol and default Windows Networking services to function
properly.
There are two types of NICs. A PCI NIC and an on-board NIC. To install
networking with the on-board NIC go to step 2.
1. Insert the PCI NIC in PCI slot #3.
2. Connect the network cable.
3. Power-up the computer and login as the Administrator.
i. For Omnitech computers with a PCI NIC:
1. Copy the 3C90X folder (found on the OTC Technical Data
CD version 1.41 or greater) from \drivers\NIC\3com\ to the
root on the C drive before starting the network install.
2. Insert the Windows NT CD in to the CD ROM drive. If the
autorun program starts, cancel out of it and leave the CD in
the drive. You will need it in step 5 Win NT setup.
ii. For OmniTech computers with an on-board NIC:
1. Networking will already be installed on the PC. A DHCP
Client will have been chosen but turned off to avoid the PC
from trying to connect to a network every 6 minutes. To reenable the DHCP Client go to Start|Settings|Control
Panel. Select the Services icon by double clicking on it.
Select DHCP Client and select Startup. Select the
Automatic radio button and select OK. Select Start to start
the service. Go to section 3.
4. Double-click the Network icon in the Control Panel and confirm the
installation of Windows Networking. If Windows Networking has not yet
been set up you will receive a message that Windows NT Networking is
not installed. Do you want to install it now? Select Yes and continue.
5. Select Wired to the network and press Next.
6. At the Network Setup Wizard screen, choose Select from list.
7. At the Select Network Adapter screen, choose Have Disk.
8. At the Insert Disk take the appropriate action based on the type of
Ethernet adapter.
i. For a PCI NIC type c:\3c90x and select OK.
ii. For an on-board NIC type c:\lan and select OK.
9. The OEM option screen should state `you have selected either the 3Com
EtherLink PCI NIC or the Intel 82559 Fast Ethernet LAN on Motherboard.
Select OK to continue.
Page 5 of 20
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXAP2030
REV: D
DATE: 3/1/02
CO: L10181
10. Select Next to continue at the Network Setup/Network Adapters screen.

11. At the Network Protocols screen, make sure TCP/IP Protocol is checked
and select Next to continue.
12. At the Network Services screen all options will be checked. Select Next
to continue.
13. Select Next to install the selected components.
14. At the Windows NT Setup screen it will state Setup needs to copy some
Windows NT files. Make sure that the Windows NT CD is in the CD
ROM drive. If the autorun program starts, exit the autorun program and
get back to the Windows NT Setup screen. Type: x:\i386 (where x is the
drive designator of the CD ROM drive. Select Continue.
15. The TCP/IP Setup screen will appear. It will state that If there is a DHCP
server on your network TCP/IP can be configured If you have a DHCP
server, select Yes to continue. If not, select No and continue.
16. If you selected Yes, the Network Setup Wizard will start copying files from
the Windows NT CD. If you selected No, you are then given the
opportunity to input a specific IP address. This information will be
provided by the IS personnel on site.
17. Select all services and then select Next.
18. Windows will now be ready to start the network. Select Next.
19. If a DHCP server has been chosen then the Install Wizard will ask for the
Computer Name, Workgroup and/or Domain. Make sure the Computer
Name matches the one given on the network by IS personnel. It
cannot be changed in this screen. Follow the onscreen directions and
select Next.
20. Select Finish and Networking should be installed.
21. Remove the Microsoft Windows NT CD from the drive.
22. Click Yes to restart the computer to complete the network configuration.
23. Login as administrator.
24. Error messages may appear indicating failure of services during startup.
Dismiss these errors and continue with the following step.
25. Re-apply NT Service Pack 6 to update any files that were copied from the
NT 4.0 Workstation CD. Use Windows Explorer to look for Service Pack
6 on the C drive. If Service Pack 6 is on the C drive it will be in a folder
called C:\SP6. If you do not find this folder, use the enCORE Operating
System Supplement CD ROM disk provided with the Teledensitometry
kit. Follow the instructions in step E to reapply Service Pack 6.
E. Windows NT 4.0 Service Pack 6 Installation 40 Bit Security (not
1. Insert the enCORE Operating System Supplement CD in the
CD ROM drive. Wait for Autorun to launch and display the
LUNAR browser menu
2. Select option 1 Install NT 4.0 SP6 - English. Service Pack 6 will
be installed and the PC will restart automatically.
Page 6 of 20
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXAP2030
REV: D
DATE: 3/1/02
CO: L10181
Wait for the PC to boot up completely and remove the CD from the drive.
Section 2. INSTALLING HARDWARE IN PCs CONNECTED TO DPX-NT

A. Installing Optional Interface Cards
Note: OmniTech computers require some alterations prior to installing
interface cards. If both a modem and a Network adapter are being
installed, the Audio must be disabled in the BIOS. Turn on the PC and
enter the BIOS by pressing F2 when prompted. Cursor to Advanced,
select Peripherals and disable the Audio by highlighting Audio and
pressing Enter. Select Disable and press Enter. Exit by pressing F10,
save the configuration and let the PC boot. Remove the Audio drivers by
double clicking on Multimedia from the Control Panel. Click on the
Devices Tab, and click the + by the Audio Devices. Highlight the Driver
and click Remove. Click Yes to the warning message. This will eliminate
the service failure message displayed during NT startup.
There are two possible types of modems that can be in the
Teledensitometry kit, ISA or PCI. If there are jumpers on the card it is an
ISA, if not it is a PCI card. For ISA modems go to step B, for PCI
modems go to step C.
B. Install (ISA) Modem Card and Drivers
1. Jumper the modem for Com3, IRQ 4 and install it in the outermost ISA
slot.
2. Login in as Administrator and install the modem drivers by going to the
Control Panel and double clicking on the Modem Icon. Check the Dont
detect my Modem box and click Next.
1. Insert the CD supplied from OTC (Technical Information and
Data) and click Have Disk. Switch to the CD drive and click
Browse. Double click on Drivers|MDI|USRB. Click Open
then OK. In the Manufacturers box, click U.S. Robotics
Access Corp. and select the 56k fax internal modem and
click next. Select Com3 as the port to install the drivers on
and click next. Click Finish and from the Modem Properties
Dialog box, click Dialing Properties and enter the Area
Code. Click OK, Close.
3. To test the Modem, use Phone Dialer found in Accessories.
Page 7 of 20
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXAP2030
REV: D
DATE: 3/1/02
CO: L10181
4. To Load WinFax Pro software go to Section 3.

C. Install (PCI) Modem Card and Drivers
1. Install the Modem in slot 3
2. If both a modem and a Network adapter are being installed, follow the
directions above in Section 2. A.
3. Insert the supplied OTC Technical Data CD (ver 1.41 or >) and wait for
the Autorun to start. Click Exit in the lower Right hand corner. Select
Start and then Run. Type in X:\Drivers\MDI\3com\Setup.exe. (Replace
X: with your CD-ROM drive letter). Click OK.
4. Select Install to start the installation.
5. Select Yes to Restart. (On reboot enter setup and re-enable the Audio (if
disabled in step 2).
6. Remove the CD.
7. To Load WinFax Pro software go to Section 3.
D. Adding a Network Interface Card (NIC) to an existing system
There must be a functional network connection in order for the installation of
Windows Networking to be tested. Consult with the customers IS
department, or Network person, to determine the protocols and services
required. If a workgroup (no server) is used then the specific TCP/IP address
will have to be known before installing the NIC. If a DHCP Server is used,
then a Computer Name and Domain must be known before installing the
NIC. The Computer Name will have to be changed to match the one given
by the Network Administrator. To change the Computer Name, Right click
on Network Neighborhood from the Desktop. Answer No to setting up the
network now. Go to Properties| Identification and Change. Edit the
Computer Name. Do not reboot the computer now, rather shutdown and
follow the appropriate steps below. DICOM and HL7 features require TCPIP
protocol and default Windows Networking services to function properly.
There are two types of NICs. A PCI NIC and an on-board NIC. To install
networking with the on-board NIC go to step 2.
2. Insert the Ethernet adapter in PCI slot #3.
3. Connect the network cable.
4. Power-up the computer and login as the Administrator.
ii. For Omnitech computers with a PCI NIC:
1. Copy the 3C90X folder (found on the OTC Technical Data
CD version 1.41 or greater) from \drivers\NIC\3com\ to the
root on the C drive before starting the network install.
Page 8 of 20
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXAP2030
REV: D
DATE: 3/1/02
CO: L10181
2. Insert the Windows NT CD in to the CD ROM drive. If the

autorun program starts, cancel out of it and leave the CD in
the drive. You will need it in step 12 for Win NT setup.
iii. For OmniTech computers with an on-board NIC:
1. Networking will already be installed on the PC. A DHCP
Client will have been chosen but turned off to avoid the PC
from trying to connect to a network every 6 minutes. To reenable the DHCP Client go to Start|Settings|Control
Panel. Select the Services icon by double clicking on it.
Select DHCP Client. Select the Automatic radio button and
select OK. Select Start to start the service. Go to section 3.
5. Double-click the Network icon in the Control Panel and confirm the
installation of Windows Networking. If Windows Networking has not yet
been set up you will receive a message that Windows NT Networking is
not installed. Do you want to install it now? Select Yes and continue.
6. Select Wired to the network and select Next.
7. At the Network Setup Wizard screen, choose Select from list.
8. At the Select Network Adapter screen, choose Have Disk.
a. At the Insert Disk take the appropriate action based on the type of
Ethernet adapter.
i. For a PCI NIC type c:\3c90x and select OK.
ii. For an on-board NIC type c:\lan and select OK.
8. The OEM option screen should state `you have selected either the 3Com
EtherLink PCI NIC or the Intel 82559 Fast Ethernet LAN on Motherboard.
Select OK to continue.
9. Select Next to continue at the Network Setup/Network Adapters screen.
10. At the Network Protocols screen, make sure TCP/IP Protocol is checked
and select Next to continue.
11. At the Network Services screen all options will be checked. Select Next
to continue.
12. Select Next to install the selected components.
13. At the Windows NT Setup screen it will state Setup needs to copy some
Windows NT files. Make sure that the Windows NT CD is in the CD
ROM drive. If the autorun program starts, exit the autorun program and
get back to the Windows NT Setup screen. Type x:\i386 (where x is the
drive designator of the CD ROM drive. Select Continue.
14. The TCP/IP Setup screen will appear. It will state that If there is a DHCP
server on your network TCP/IP can be configured If you have a DHCP
server, select Yes to continue. If not, select No and continue.
15. If you selected Yes, the Network Setup Wizard will start copying files from
the Windows NT CD. If you selected No, you are then given the
Page 9 of 20
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXAP2030
REV: D
DATE: 3/1/02
CO: L10181
opportunity to input a specific IP address. This information will be

provided by the IS personnel on site.
16. Select all services and then select Next.
17. Windows will now be ready to start the network. Select Next.
18. If a DHCP server has been chosen then the Install Wizard will ask for the
Computer Name, Workgroup and/or Domain. Make sure the Computer
Name matches the one given on the network by IS personnel. It
cannot be changed in this screen. Follow the onscreen directions and
select Next.
19. Select Finish and Networking should be installed.
20. Remove the Microsoft Windows NT CD from the drive.
21. Select Yes to restart the computer to complete the network configuration.
22. Login as administrator.
23. Error messages may appear indicating failure of services during startup.
Dismiss these errors and continue with the following step.
24. Re-apply NT Service Pack 6 to update any files that were copied from the
NT 4.0 Workstation CD. Use Windows Explorer to look for Service Pack
6 on the C drive. If the SP6 folder is on the HDD, you can install it by
going to C:\SP6\Update. Click on Update.exe. From the Welcome
screen, Accept the License Agreement, deselect Backup and press install.
If the SP6 folder is not on the HDD, proceed with step 1. If you do not find
this folder, use the enCORE product CD.Follow the instructions in step E
to reapply Service Pack 6.
E. Windows NT 4.0 Service Pack 6 Installation 40 Bit Security (not
1.
2.
3.
Insert the product software CD. Wait for Autorun to launch and
display the LUNAR browser menu. Click exit and start Explorer.
Navigate to NT4sp6a\Update. Click on Update.exe. From the
Welcome screen, Accept the License Agreement, deselect Backup
and press install. Restart the PC when prompted.
Wait for the PC to boot up completely and remove the CD from the
drive.
Section 3. SETTING UP MICROSOFT OUTLOOK 2000/2002

B. Installing Outlook 2000
1.
2.
Insert the Microsoft Outlook 2000 CD into the CD ROM drive and
wait for Autorun to launch.
At the Welcome screen, enter the Customers name and the Key
Code and select Next.
Page 10 of 20
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
DOC ID: DXAP2030
REV: D
DATE: 3/1/02
CO: L10181
Click on I accept the terms in the License Agreement and select

Next.
Select Customize.
From the Install Location dialog box, select Next.
From the Updating Windows dialog box, click the drop down menu
arrow and select Do not upgrade Microsoft Internet Explorer and
select Next.
From the Selecting Features window, click on the yellow 1 by
Symantec Fax starter; select Not available then select Install Now.
Wait for the files to be copied successfully and select Yes to restart
when prompted.
Remove the CD from the drive.
C. Installing Outlook 2002 Note: Version >6.0 If the system you are installing
Outlook 2002 on does not have the minimum required level of functionality,
you will be prompted to update the Core System, Data Access Components
and Web Browsing. If prompted to update, proceed with step 2, if not skip to
step 4.
1.
2.
If prompted to update, press Next.
3.
From System Files Update Setup drop down the selection menu
and select Do Not upgrade I.E and press Next. Reboot when
prompted
4.
Next.
5.
Accept the Agreement and press Install.
6.
7.
8.
the system.
New Outlook 2000/2002 Setup: If Remote Access Service (RAS) is installed, go to

the appropriate section, either F or G. You can verify that RAS has been installed by
right clicking on the Network Neighborhood Icon and selecting Properties. Select the
Services Tab to see which services are installed.
D. Remote Access Service Installation
1.
2.
3.
Right click on the Network Neighborhood Icon and select

Properties.
Click the Services Tab and select Add.
Select Remote Access Service and select OK.
Page 11 of 20
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
DOC ID: DXAP2030
REV: D
DATE: 3/1/02
CO: L10181
Insert the WinNT CD when prompted (if Autorun Launches, close it)
and select Continue.
From the add RAS device dialog box, verify the modem (56k fax
internal PCI) is selected and select OK.
From Remote Access Setup, select continue.
From the Network dialog box select Close.
Select No when prompted to restart.
Install SP6.
E. Installing Windows-NT Service Pack 6 Note: If the SP6 folder is on the

HDD, you can install it by going to C:\SP6\Update. Click on Update.exe.
From the Welcome screen, Accept the License Agreement, deselect Backup
and press install. If the SP6 folder is not on the HDD, proceed with step 1.
1.
2.
3.
Insert the product software CD. Wait for Autorun to launch and
display the LUNAR browser menu. Click exit and start Explorer.
Navigate to NT4sp6a\Update. Click on Update.exe. From the
Welcome screen, Accept the License Agreement, deselect Backup
and press install. Restart the PC when prompted.
Wait for the PC to boot up completely and remove the CD from the
drive.
F. New Outlook 2000 Setup

1.
2.
3.
Double Click on the Outlook 2000 Icon.

From the Outlook 2000 Startup screen select Next.
From the E-mail Service Options screen select Internet Only then
select Next.
4. From the Your Name dialog box, enter the customers name and
select Next.
5. From the E-Mail Address dialog box, enter the customers E-mail
address and select Next.
6. From the E-Mail Server Names dialog box, enter the Server type
and Incoming and Outgoing Servers and select Next.
7. From the Internet Mail Login screen, have the customer enter their
E-mail password (and name if necessary) and select Next.
8. From the Friendly Name dialog box select Next.
9. Choose the appropriate connection type and select Next. Most likely
a Phone Line (Modem) connection.
10. Enter the location information (area code) and select Close.
11. Enter the Telephone number used to connect to the ISP and select
Next.
Page 12 of 20
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXAP2030
REV: D
DATE: 3/1/02
CO: L10181
12. Enter the User Name and Password used to login to the Internet
and select Next.
13. From the Advanced Settings screen, select Next.
14. At the Dial-up connection Name dialog box, enter a name for the
connection (e.g. the ISP), and select Next.
15. Select Finish.
16. Select Yes to accept Outlook as the Default Manager.
G. New Outlook 2002 Setup
enCORE v6.0 or newer
1.
2.
3.
4.

From the Account Configuration screen press Next.
From the E-Mail Accounts dialog box, select the Server type
(generally POP3) and press next.
5. From E-Mail Accounts (Internet E-Mail Settings(POP3)), enter
the customers Name, E-mail address, Incoming/Outgoing Servers
and the customers User Name and Password. Press More
Settings and click on the Connection tab to select the connection
type (i.e. Modem, LAN).
Note: If selecting a Modem, youll need to add a Dial-Up Network
Connection, press the Add button. From the Phone book Wizard,
enter a name for the new Phone book (e.g. the ISP) and press Next.
6. Select I am calling the Internet and press Next.
7. Enter the Telephone number used to connect to the ISP and select
Next.
8. Press OK to close the Internet E-Mail settings dialog box.
9. Press Next to continue.
10. Select Finish.
With Outlook 2002, youll need to add the Personal Address book.
1. To add one go to Tools/E-mail accounts and click on Add a new
Directory or Address book and press Next.
2. Click Additional Address books and press Next.
3. Highlight Personal Address book and press Next.
4. From the Personal Address book screen press Next.
6. Press OK and exit Outlook to activate the account.
7. Go to Tools/Address book. In the Show Names from the: field,
drop down the list and select the Personal Address book.
8. Select Tools/Options and make sure that the Personal Address
book appears in all 3 fields. If the PAB does not appear in When
sending mail, check names using these Address lists in the
following order, select Add, highlight PAB and press Add and then
Close. Use the arrows to move the PAB to the top.
9. Press Apply, OK and close the address book.
Page 13 of 20
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXAP2030
REV: D
DATE: 3/1/02
CO: L10181
Section 4. SETTING UP WINFAX PRO SOFTWARE

A. Configuring Windows NT to use the fax modem
1.
2.
3.
In Windows NT Control Panel, double click the Modems icon. Verify

that in the list of modems there is an entry for U.S. Robotics 56K Fax
PCI appears. If the U.S. Robotics 56K Fax INT entry does not
appear, it must be added to NT. To add this modem to NT, check the
Dont Detect checkbox and then the Next button. Select Have Disk
and insert the CD included with the modem. Change the drive letter to
the root directory of the CD and continue. Select 3Com Corp. as the
Manufacturer and U.S. Robotics 56k FAX INT as the Model, and
select Next.
When the Windows NT modem Dialing Properties dialog appears for
the U.S. Robotics 56K FAX modem, complete the Dialing Properties
dialog as appropriate for the customers site. Windows NT has on-line
help available for this task.
Dont forget to connect the modem to the phone jack with a standard
(RJ-11) phone cable.
H. Installing WinFax PRO

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Insert the WinFax installation CD and wait for autorun to display

WinFax Pro Menu Screen.
Select Install.
At the Welcome Screen, select Next.
At the License Agreement Screen, select Yes.
Select Next at the User Information Screen.
Select Next at the Destination Folder Screen.
The Default Setup Type is Typical, select Next.
Select Next at the Select Program folder.
Select Next at the Start Copying Files screen.
At the File Copy Complete screen, select Next.
Select Next at the WinFax Pro Setup (CSID) screen. (Leave the fields
blank)
At the Modems and Other Fax Devices screen, select the 56K
FAX modem from the modem and device list if it is not already
selected and select Next.
Select Next to Test the Modem.
The results of the Test list the class and speed of the Modem. Select
Next to continue.
Page 14 of 20
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXAP2030
REV: D
DATE: 3/1/02
CO: L10181
15. With Yes selected in the Enable Controller dialog box, select
Next.
16. From the Configure E-Mail screen, select Next.
17. Select Cancel at the Online Registration screen and Yes to Are
You Sure? select Next.
18. From the Ready to Configure System screen, select Finish.
19. Select NO to the Readme question.
20. Select Cancel the Live Update.
21. Select Yes to the Message Manager.
22. From the Phone book autolink screen, check Outlook 2000 and
select OK.
23. Select Next at the Phone Book Name
24. Select the Set Information button.
25. Select the Use Business Related Information Radio button (if not
already selected) and select OK.
26. Select Finish
27. After rebooting Windows NT and logging back on, verify that the fax
icon appears on the status bar.
28. Close the Printers Dialog box and remove the CD.
29. Verify that you select WinFax as one of the available printers from
service or some other destination.
Section 5. SETTING UP ADDITIONAL TELEDENSITOMETRY OPTIONS

NOTE: There must be a functional network connection in order for the installation of
Windows Networking to be tested. Consult with the customers IS department, or
Network person, to determine the protocols and services required. If a workgroup
(no server) is used then the specific TCP/IP address will have to be known before
installing the NIC. If a DHCP Server is used, then a Computer Name and Domain
must be known before installing the NIC. The Computer Name will have to be
changed to match the one given by the Network Administrator. To change the
Computer Name, Right click on Network Neighborhood from the Desktop. Go to
Properties| Identification and Change. Edit the Computer Name and the
Workgroup or Domain name. Reboot when prompted. DICOM and HL7 features
require TCPIP protocol and default Windows Networking services to function
properly. LUNAR factory PCs will be setup to use a DHCP server. To change to a
specific IP address:
1. Right click on the Network Neighborhood icon
2. Click on Properties
3. Click on Protocols
4. Click on TCP/IP Protocol
5. Make sure you are in the IP Address tab
6. Select the Specify an IP Address radio button
Page 15 of 20
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXAP2030
REV: D
DATE: 3/1/02
CO: L10181
7. Insert the correct IP address and subnet mask given by the IS support
staff.
8. Click OK, Apply, OK and Restart to restart the system and complete
the change to a specific IP address.
A. Setting up AutoMentor
Refer to the enCORE Operators Manual Outbox Options sections for
more information.
B. Setting up EMAIL
Refer to the enCORE Operators Manual Outbox Options sections for
more information.
C. Setting up DICOM
Refer to the DICOM Operators Manual for setup information.
D. Setting up HL7
Refer to the LUNAR Ambassador HL7 Interface Configuration Manual for
setup information.
E. Setting up MULTI-USER DATABASE (MUDBA)
When setting up the Multi-User Database, several issues will have to be
considered.
1. Where will the database reside, on the Prodigy or DPX-NT PC or
other peer-to-peer network or network server drive?
2. How will the site archive data?
3. Will the site share a printer?
When sharing drives, make sure that you use the New Share option.
Sharing the drives as C$ can cause the sharing to be unsuccessful.
These issues should be determined by the site who is also responsible for
setting up the Multi-User Database on additional PCs.
When installing enCORE software on other networked PCs, you can
install the software in a workstation mode. Note: PC must be running a
supported Operating System, either WinNT or WinXP.
1. Install the software from the CD using install option number 2.
2. Launch the enCORE software.
3. Disregard any errors about primary calibration files.
4. Go to Tools|User Options|Systems tab and check the Auxillary
Workstation checkbox. Click OK to leave the User Options menu.
5. Close the enCORE application and relaunch it.
6. You will now be in the workstation mode.
NOTE: you will not be able to perform patient measurements,
QAs or simulated measurements or simulated QAs in the
worksation mode.
Page 16 of 20
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXAP2030
REV: D
DATE: 3/1/02
CO: L10181
Refer to the document Setting Up a Multi-User Database for further

instructions.
Section 6. Windows XP setup and configuration.

All WinXP systems come with Modem and Networking factory installed and
configured (Networking is setup as a Workgroup, see the sites Network
Administrator for Domain configuration). The computer name is ENCORE-XP.
NOTE: There must be a functional network connection in order for the installation of
Windows Networking to be tested. Consult with the customers IS department, or
Network person, to determine the protocols and services required. If a workgroup
(no server) is used then the specific TCP/IP address will have to be known before
installing the NIC. If a DHCP Server is used, then a Computer Name will have to be
changed to match the one given by the Network Administrator and the will have to
be changed from a Workgroup to a Domain.
To change the Computer Name, go to Start/Control Panel/Network and
Internet connections/Network connections. Drop down the Advanced
menu and select Network Identification, Click the Change button. Change
the name and reboot.
To set up the PC on a Domain, follow the same steps.
To change to a specific address, go to Start/Control Panel/Network and
Internet connections/Network connections. Right click on the Local Area
Network and select Properties. Double click on Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).
Click the radio dial Use the following IP address and enter the correct IP
address and subnet mask provided by the Network Administrator or the IS
support staff.

1
Insert the OL2002 CD in the CDD and wait for Autorun to launch
2.
Next.
3.
4.
From the Type of Installation screen, change the path from C: to
D: and click Next.
5.
6.
When the install is complete, press OK, reboot the system and
remove the CD.
New Outlook 2002 Setup
Note: After setting up Outlook, the customer should be instructed to archive their
mail on a weekly basis. This backup should place the archived file on the D: drive. In
Page 17 of 20
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXAP2030
REV: D
DATE: 3/1/02
CO: L10181
the event a customer uses the recovery image and they have not archived their mail
to the D: drive, it will be lost including all contacts.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

From the Account Configuration screen press Next.
From the E-Mail Accounts dialog box, select the Server type
(generally POP3) and press next.
From E-Mail Accounts (Internet E-Mail Settings (POP3)), enter
the customers,
Name
E-mail address
Incoming/Outgoing Servers
The customers User Name and Password.
If the customer is connecting via modem, click on the More
Settings button.
Click the Connections tab and click in the radio button by
Connect using my phone line.
Under Modem click the Add button and with Dial-up to private
network selected, press Next.
From the Phone Number to Dial screen enter the Telephone
number used to connect to the ISP and select Next.
Enter a name for the connection (e.g. the ISP), and press Finish
and then OK to close the Internet E-mail Settings dialog box.
Press Test Account Settings and enter your Internet User
Name and Password. Check the box to Save this User Name
and Password, click in the Me Only radio button and press Dial.
You should connect to your ISP and all tests should complete
with no errors. Click Close to exit the Test dialog and Next to
continue.
From the Congratulations screen press Finish. At this point youll
be prompted to Activate your Outlook software. You can Activate it
later but should be activated prior to using the e-mail feature in the
encore software.
With Outlook 2002, youll need to add the Personal Address book.
1. To add one go to Tools/E-mail accounts and click on Add a new
Directory or Address book and press Next.
2. Click Additional Address books and press Next.
3. Highlight Personal Address book and press Next.
4. From the Personal Address book screen, point the path for the
address book to D: press OK.
10. Press OK and exit Outlook to activate the account.
Page 18 of 20
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXAP2030
REV: D
DATE: 3/1/02
CO: L10181
11. Start Outlook and go to Tools/Address book.

12. From the Address book, Select Tools/Options and make sure that
the Personal Address book appears in all 3 fields. If the PAB does
not appear in When sending mail, check names using these
Address lists in the following order, select Add, highlight PAB
and press Add and then Close. Use the arrows to move the PAB to
the top.
13. Press Apply, OK and close the address book.
Archiving
1.
2.
First create a folder on the D: drive using Explorer, i.e. Outlook

Archive
From the main tool bar, click on Tools and select Options. From the
Options page, click on the Other tab. Click on the AutoArchive
button. Click browse and point the path to the folder you just
created.
Section 7. TROUBLESHOOTING
CANNOT COMMUNICATE WITH THE NETWORK.
If you cannot seem to communicate with the network, try the following:
1. Check the connection of the network cable into the network connector
at the back of the computer.
2. Check to see if the lights next to the connector are illuminated. Both
the send and receive lights should be illuminated.
3. If you are using a DHCP Client, make sure that DHCP is enabled.
Refer to section D.3.ii.
4. Go to an MS DOS prompt from the desktop and ping the NIC (see
example below). If this is successful then ping an address on the
network. If this is not successful then you have a problem with the NIC
or network setup on the PC. If you can ping the local PC but not the
network then have the site contact there is staff to look into the
problem further.
i. Example: If you know the address of the network card type;
ping 175.100.42.110 (example of a TCP/IP address) and press
Enter.
WINFAX IS INSTALLED BUT REPORTED NOT INSTALLED.
After attempting to fax a report using WinFax, the system displays the error
message Printer driver is missing or the printer is not installed. The cause of
this problem is that Symantecs installation program for WinFax does not update
the Windows Registry correctly with any dependability. So even though WinFax
is installed, the enCORE software cannot use WinFax on some installations
because it cannot find WinFaxs default device mode settings. You can verify
Page 19 of 20
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXAP2030
REV: D
DATE: 3/1/02
CO: L10181
this is truly the cause of the problem by looking at the Windows Registry using
the REGEDIT program. Confirm the absence of the Registry key named
DefaultDevMode under the key named
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\System\Current Control
Set\Control\Print\Printers\WinFax. PLEASE NOTE: incorrect use of the
REGEDIT program can leave the PC inoperable!
On the Windows Start menu, select Settings and then Printers. Then
right-click on the WinFax printer icon, and select Document Defaults
Under the WinFax Document Settings tree view, expand the

Paper/Output entry and select Orientation.
Change the Orientation value from Portrait to Landscape. Select OK.
Once again select WinFax Document Defaults dialog, and then select
Orientation.
Change the Orientation value from Landscape to Portrait. Select OK.
There should now be a key in the Registry named

HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\System\Current Control
Set\Control\Print\Printers\WinFax\DefaultDevMode.
Within Prodigy, you should be able to fax a report now.
GENERATED RECORDS
None.
Page 20 of 20
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC. ID: DXPC2004

REVISION: G
DATE: 12/06/02
WRITTEN BY: Jeff Salbego
TITLE: enCORE PC Configuration Procedure /Win-XP
PURPOSE
This procedure is used to setup a PC and software for Drive Imaging enCORE (aka
Prodigy, DPX-NT, and DPX-MD+).
APPLICATION
This procedure applies to all PCs and software. Execute appropriate procedure steps
based on the model of PC to be configured and the features requested by the sales
order.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Disconnect the line cord from the Computer before opening the enclosure.
Precautions should be taken (e.g. wearing of grounding straps, etc.), when necessary,
to ensure a static-free environment exists when handling and installing PCBs and other
static sensitive devices.
DXPC2003 - Prodigy / DPX-NT PC Testing Procedure
MINIMUM HARDWARE SPECS
900MHz Intel Celeron processor

512 MB RAM
20 GB hard drive
8 MB video RAM
52X CD ROM
250 MB Zip drive
56k Modem
10/100 MB network card
Microsoft Windows XP Professional (SP1)
17 monitor
Super VGA (1024 X 768) or higher resolution video adapter
Page 1 of 16
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXPC2004
REV: G
DATE: 12/6/02
CO: L10507
CURRENT SOFTWARE VERSIONS

Operating System
Emailing Software
Faxing Software
Current Version
Notes
Microsoft WinXP w/ SP1

Refer to Section O
Refer to Section P
*Only required for TeleD

*Only required for TeleD
PROCEDURES
Section 1. SETTING UP THE PC (Standard configuration)

Loading Application Software
A.
Windows XP Professional Installation (not required for preloaded

systems)
Section A of this procedure is used to: 1) Setup the Disk for imaging or, 2)
When replacing the system drive, only if attempts to recover a corrupt
system have failed. The steps described here will erase all data on the
system partition. The data will not be recoverable.
1. Restart the computer with the Windows XP Professional CD in the CDD.

2. When prompted to boot from CD, press <Enter>. If you miss the prompt, reboot and
start over.
3. Press <Enter> at the Welcome to Setup screen.
4. Press <F8> to accept agreement and continue.
5. If a partition exists, use the up/down arrow keys to highlight it.
6. Press <d> to delete the partition.
Note: Deleting a partition will permanently destroy all data on the partition. Make
sure any data has been backed up so that it can be later restored. This action is
irreversible.
7. Press <Enter> to continue deleting the system partition.
8. Press <L> to verify deleting the partition.
9. If necessary, repeat the deletion of all existing partitions.
10. Press <C> to create a new partition.
11. Use the Backspace key to clear the Default Partition size and enter 12500 as the
partition size. Press <Enter> to accept the partition size.
12. Cursor down to the unpartitioned space, press <C> to create a second partition.
Use the Backspace key to clear the Default Partition size and enter 20000 as the
partition size. Press <Enter> to accept the partition size and create the second
partition.
13. Cursor down to the unpartitioned space, press <C> to create a third partition. Press
<Enter> to accept the default size and create the third partition. The 3rd partition is
where the recovery image will be stored and Must be formatted as FAT32.
Page 2 of 16
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXPC2004
REV: G
DATE: 12/6/02
CO: L10507
14. With drive <C> highlighted, press <Enter> to install the Partition.
15. Select the desired file system using up/down keys. Select Formatting using NTFS
File System (the default) and press <Enter> to continue.
16. Wait for partition to be formatted.
17. Wait for the file copy to complete.
18. Leave the CD in the CDD and press <Enter> to restart the computer. Do NOT boot
on the CD.
19. Once the system restarts it will proceed with installation.
20. Accept the defaults from the Regional & Language Options screen by pressing
<Next>
21. Type in GE Medical Systems Lunar for both name and organization and press
<Next>.
22. Type in the Product ID from the Certificate of Authenticity and press <Next>.
23. Type in ENCORE-XP for the Computer Name; do NOT enter a Password and press
<Next> to continue.
24. Verify time and date; select the appropriate time zone, (Central Time(US and
Canada) and press <Next>
25. From Networking Settings, accept the default (typical) and press <Next>
26. Press <Next> to setup the PC in a Workgroup called Workgroup.
27. When all the files have been copied, the system will reboot. Wait for it to restart and
press <Next> to setup the computer.
28. When prompted to connect to the Internet press <Skip>
29. Select <NO> to the Registration, and press <Next>
30. Enter in GE Lunar as name for the user and lunar (lower case) for the password
and press <Next>
31. Press Finish/Next and the OS will boot.
32. Remove the CD
33. Click Start. Right click on My Computer and select Manage. Double click Storage
and then Disk Management.
34. Right click on (G:) and select Change Drive Letter and Paths. Click the Change
button and change the Drive Designation to (H:) temporarily. Confirm the change by
pressing Yes.
35. Repeat the process till the letters are assigned as follows;
36. The Hard Drive (Disk 0) should be C: D: and G:
37. The Zip drive (Disk 1) should be E:
38. The CDD should be F:
39. Right click on the D: partition of disk 0 and select format. Enter Applications as
the volume label and press OK to format the partition with the NTFS file system.
40. Right click on the G: partition of disk 0 and select format. Enter Recovery as the
volume label, change the File System to FAT 32 and press OK to format the
partition.
41. Open My Computer. Right click on C: and name the volume GE Lunar.
42. Close Computer Management.
Page 3 of 16
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXPC2004
REV: G
DATE: 12/6/02
CO: L10507
43.
Install XP-Professional Service Pack 1 found at

netserver\R&D\software(32bit)\WinXP\SP 1 Note: If youre installing other devices
that need to copy files from the WinXP CD, install them prior to installing SP1.
B. Setting up the Network (Not necessary for Imaging purposes)

1. The Network is automatically setup (in a Workgroup) as the OS is installed.
2. To verify the connection, make sure the PC is connected to the Network and go to
Start\Control Panel\Network and Internet Connections\Network Connections.
3. If the connection is disabled, double click on the Local Area Connection to Enable
service. Click on My Network places.
4. Click on View workgroup computers and verify you can see other computers in the
workgroup.
C. Configuring the Network for a Domain

Start\Control Panel\Network and Internet Connections\Network
Connections. If the connection is disabled, double click on the Local
Area Connection to Enable service.
Drop down the Advanced menu from the tool bar and select Network
Identification.
Click the Change button. Under Member of, click in the Domain radio
button. Enter Lunarcorp and press OK. Note: You will need a unique
computer name and Administrator rights.
Enter User name and password and press OK.
When youre welcomed to the domain, press OK and restart when
prompted.
D. Video Driver Installation (not required for preloaded systems)

All devices are detected and installed automatically by WinXP
This is where new procedures for new devices/drivers will be added.
E. Internet Explorer Installation

WinXP by default is bundled with I.E. version 6. Installation is not necessary
at this time.
This is where update/new procedures will be added.
F. Configure Desktop Settings (repeat for each user)

1. Right mouse click on an open space in the Task Bar and select Properties to
configure Task Bar properties Clear the Check mark from Keep the Taskbar on
top of other Windows option. Remove the check mark from Hide inactive Icons,
press Apply and OK.
Page 4 of 16
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXPC2004
REV: G
DATE: 12/6/02
CO: L10507
2. Right click in an open area of the Desktop and select Properties. Select the
Desktop tab and set the Background to None. Click on Customize desktop.
Remove the check mark from Run Desktop Cleanup Wizard every 60 days and
press Apply
3. Click the Screen Saver tab, set the Screen Saver to None. Click the Power button
and set all options under Power Schemes to Never. Press Apply and OK.
4. Click the Appearance tab and change the Windows and Buttons setting to
Windows Classic and press Apply.
5. Click the Settings tab and set the Screen resolution to 1024x768 and color
Quality =Highest (32bit) If no changes were necessary, proceed to step # 6
6. Press Yes and OK to set the selections and exit the display setup.
7. Go to Start\Control Panel. Click on Date, Time, Language and Regional Options.
Click on Regional and Language Options. Click the Customize button and then
select the Date tab. Set the short date format to mm/dd/yyyy. Click Apply and OK,
OK.
8. Click on Date and Time. Select the Internet Time tab and remove the check from
Automatically synchronize with an Internet time server. Press Apply and OK.
9. Click the Back and open Performance and Maintenance. Click on the System
Icon.
10. Click on the Advanced tab and then Error Reporting. Click in the Disable error
reporting radio dial. Press OK. Click Settings from the Performance box and then
select the Advanced tab. Click Change in the Virtual Memory box and change the
Paging File size of drive C in both the Initial size and the Max size to 1000. Click
Set, OK, OK. Reset when prompted.
11. Click on the System Restore tab and check the box for Turn of System Restore
for all drives. Press Apply and a message pops up asking if you really want to
stop System Restore. Press Yes.
12 Click on the Automatic Updates tab. Click in the Turn off automatic updating
radio button. Press Apply and close everything up.
13.Press Start, Right click on My Computer and select Manage. Expand Services and
Applications. Click on Services to disable the following service. Double click on
Web Client. Stop the Service and set the Startup Type to Disabled. Press Apply
and OK.
14. Open Device Manager and expand USB Controllers. Right click on the first USB
Root Hub and select Properties. Open the Power Management tab and de-select
the Power Save option. Press OK and close the Computer Management screen.
15. Close the Computer Management window.
16. Press Start, All Programs and select Windows Messenger. Cancel the .Net
Passport Service setup. From the Windows Messenger dialog box, drop down the
Tools menu and select Options. Click the Preferences tab and remove the check
mark from both Run this program when Windows starts and Allow this
program to run in the background. Press OK.
Page 5 of 16
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXPC2004
REV: G
DATE: 12/6/02
CO: L10507
G. Install MultiLingual User Interface (MUI) Subject to change

1. Insert the CD label Disk 1
2. At the Welcome screen, Accept the License Agreement and press Continue.
3. Check all languages in the Install Languages for menus and dialogs screen and
press OK.
4. Insert the Windows XP CD when prompted and click OK.
5. Wait for the files to copy and insert the MUI CD disk 1 and press Yes when
prompted.
6. When the fonts are installed press OK, and reboot when prompted.
7. Repeat the process with all MUI Disks. Disks 3 and 4 do not auto run
H. Install (PCI) Modem Card and Drivers (Installed on all PCs)

With the PC shut off, unplugged and grounded, insert the Modem
(supplied from OTC) in the 3rd PCI slot. Startup the PC and from the New
Hardware Wizard, select install from a list or specific location
(Advanced) and press Next
Select Search removable media, insert the OmniTech Technical Data
CD (v1.81 or higher) and press Next.
The Wizard will find the driver and install it.
Open the control panel, select printers and other hardware then Phone
and Modem options. From the Modem Setup screen, enter 608 for the
area code and press <Next>
To test the Modem, use Dialer found in the WinNT folder. Open Dialer
and drop down the Phone menu from the tool bar and select Dial. Enter
the number to connect to, click in the Phone call radio button and press
Place Call. Press Disconnect and close the Phone dialer.
I. SeaCOM Serial Adapter Hardware Installation (PRODIGY

ONLY)
Check Jumper settings on board:
J1A = On for P,P,T and off for L, L
J1B = All jumpers off
J1C = DIV2 on and off for DIV1 and DIV4
1. Copy files to the HDD and Setup prep.
Using Explorer, create a folder on the D: drive Program Files.

Create a folder in this folder called SeaCOM.
Copy the SeaCOM drivers into this folder.
Use Explorer to run the Setup program from the SeaCOM folder
on Drive D:
From the Welcome screen, press Next.
Accept the agreement by pressing Yes.

Page 6 of 16
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXPC2004
REV: G
DATE: 12/6/02
CO: L10507
Press Next at the Customer Information screen.

Accept the default Destination Location by pressing Next.
Accept the default Setup Type (Typical) by pressing Next.
Accept the default Program Folder by pressing Next.
Un Check Launch Help File and press Finish.
Shut down computer using Start|Turn off Computer.
Unplug the PC and Remove the cover.
Remove blank panel from PCI slot 2 to make room for SeaCOM
serial card. Note: Slots are numbered from the inside to the
outside with the inside slot being number one.
Install the SeaCOM PCI card into slot 2. Secure the card into slot
using the screw removed from blank panel.
Insert power cord and turn power on.
After the system boots, it will detect the card and the New
Hardware Wizard will start.
2. Installing the Drivers
Press Next at the New Hardware Wizard.
Press Continue Anyway from the Compatibility Warning.
Press finish to close the Wizard.
The New Hardware Wizard will start up again, press Next.
Press Continue Anyway from the Compatibility Warning.
Press finish to close the Wizard.
To Test the card, follow the steps at the end of step L.

Note: All PCs from OTC come with a modem. The SeaCOM card will be
configured as COM4.
J. Creating the Recovery Image

Prior to creating the Recovery image (this is an image of the
operating system setup prior to Lunar Application software installation)
verify/perform the following1. Empty the Recycle Bin.
2. Verify there is no errors from the last boot in the Event viewer. Start, Right click on
My Computer and select Manage. Expand Event viewer and check and clear all
events from both Application and System.
3. Disable Autoplay for the Zip drive by installing TweakUI. Found at
(\\netserver\R&D\Software (32bit)\WinXP) or see the PC setup department. Run
Setup. Go with the defaults except, select Custom install and install only the
TweakUI component.
Page 7 of 16
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXPC2004
REV: G
DATE: 12/6/02
CO: L10507
4. From the Programs menu, run TweakUI. Expand My Computer. Expand AutoPlay.
Click on Types and disable AutoPlay for Removable drives.
5. Install Acrobat Reader.
Insert the enCORE CD and exit the browser
Use Explorer to run Setup from the Acrobat folder.
Click Next at the Welcome screen.
Click Next at the Destination Location screen.
Press OK to finish.
6. Remove TweakUI
7. Refer to LUPC0006 to create the Image. Make the Recovery image and copy it to G:
8. All OmniTech PC models with on board LAN have networking installed. If the
system is not connected to the Network youll see a red X through 2 PCs, which
means the Network cable is unplugged. To stop this from being shown on the Task
bar, click the red X. Right click on the Local Area Connection and Disable it.
K.
Printer Setup:
HP940c
Setup the printer (with cartridges and paper), and turn it on. Connect it
to the PC and the basic 940c print drivers that come with XP will be
installed.
Open the Control Panel/Printers folder, right click on the printer and
select Properties.
Install the Enhanced driver from HP.In the Advanced tab click on New
Driver. Click Next and then Have Disk.
Point the installation to the enCORE cd. Path =
Printer\WinXP\hp940c\enu\driversWin2k_XP
Select the .INF file and click open. Click Ok to continue
Click Next, Finish and then Ok
Open the Printers folder (if necessary) and Delete the newly installed
printer.
Restart the PC and after logging in the printer will be detected. Point
the installation to the same path as in the step above and complete the
installation. Subsequent installations of the 940c printer will install the
enhanced driver. (note: delete the printer prior to creating the image)
For USB printers turn off Power Management
HP Business Inkjet 2280 Note: The very first time the printer is turned on it
can take up to 15 minutes to initialize and warm up. Also when an ink
cartridge is changed it can take a while to prime.
Connect the printer to the PC and cancel the new Hardware Wizard.
Insert the HP Printer Driver CD
Select Install Printer Driver
Press OK to install the software in English
Page 8 of 16
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXPC2004
REV: G
DATE: 12/6/02
CO: L10507
Press Next at the Welcome screen and Accept the License

Agreement
With Connect directly to this computer selected, press Next
With Parallel selected and LPT1 highlighted, press Next
Select Custom setup and press Next
From the Components dialog box, deselect the HP Business Inkjet
2280 PCL 5C driver and press Next
Press Install from the Installation Settings dialog box
At the start of the installation youll receive a message stating that
Microsoft has not tested the driver. Press Continue Anyway
Form the Setup Complete window deselect Register Printer and
press Finish. Exit the HP Installer by pressing Exit twice.
Set the printer as the default printer and Print a test page by going to
the properties page of the printer by selecting Start/Faxes and
Printers and right clicking on the printer.
HP 5550
Connect the printer and from the New Hardware Wizard, select install
from a list or specific location (Advanced) and press Next
Select Search removable media, insert the HP CD and press Next.
From the list of drivers, click on \enu\drivers\Win2k_xp\hpf5550k.inf
and press Next.
Print a test page.
Exit the installation and close the New hardware wizard by pressing
Finish.
L. Application Software Installation (Not installed on the recovery CD)

1. Obtain the latest Production Master Application Software CD and insert it in the CDROM drive.
2. Wait for autorun to display Lunar CD Browser menu.
3. Select product installation from Lunar CD Browser menu.
4. Press Yes to accept the EnCore Software License Agreement.
5. The Default is Install required components. Accept this and press Next to
continue.
6. The installation is in several parts. Restart the system (if prompted) after each
component is installed.
7. Press <Next > at the Product Welcome screen.
8. Press <Next> at Information screen.
9. Press <Next> at the User Information Screen.
10. Press <Next> at Install Location screen. (accept default location).
11. Press Next to continue.
12. Leave the System# and Feature Code fields blank and press <Next> to continue.
Page 9 of 16
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXPC2004
REV: G
DATE: 12/6/02
CO: L10507
15. Select Yes I want to Launch Prodigy/DPX-NT (or MD+) now and Press Finish.
As the Software opens, you will receive a few dialog boxes. (The SeaLevel COM
Port will be Auto detected.)
If Tele-D is enabled in the feature code and Outlook is not yet configured,
you will be prompted with an error message from Outlook stating there is
no default mail client followed by an application error message stating,
Enhanced messaging API is not available. These message boxes will
appear on application startup until Outlook is properly configured.
Click OK to create a New QA Database
Click OK at No Primary Calibration file is specified (Prodigy only)
Click OK at No Database Connections
Set the archive path to the appropriate drive letter, if not A: and set the
database path to D: Click OK to accept the New Database.
Remove the CD and test the SeaLevel card. Connect the PC to Test box 1
located in the PC setup room. From the main menu, select Tools/User
Options. Click in the Service Check box and enter Award (Case
Sensitive) as the password. Click OK twice.
Select Tools/Service Options. Click on the Serial tab and press Test
Communications.
The only test that should timeout (Prodigy only) is the detector test
(Waiting for ABT-TIMEOUT), all other tests should return with OK.
Exit the Software only. Do not shut down the PC at this time.
M. NIC Installation. (Network Interface Card) Note: Omni Tech PC Models

# OEM-1000D01810E, 8100D05815 and the OEM-3124D00 Halyron ESG
come with integrated Networking.
Startup the PC and from the New Hardware Wizard, select install from a
list or specific location (Advanced) and press Next
Select Search removable media, insert the OmniTech Technical Data
CD (v1.81 or higher) and press Next.
The Wizard will find the driver and install it.
Re-install Service Pack 1
N. Zip Drive Installation

Hardware - Refer to LUPC0001 (Verify latest Rev) for the drive
installation procedure.
Software - All devices are detected and installed automatically by WinXP
Drivers are not necessary but can be installed from Iomegas website or
PC Production
O.
Page 10 of 16
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXPC2004
REV: G
DATE: 12/6/02
CO: L10507
1.
2.

Next.
3.
4.
5.
6.
the system.
7.
After the system boots, insert the CD when prompted and press
OK.
Refer to DXAP2030 for Setup/Testing Procedures.
For in-house testing purposes, Webserver must be turned on (see IT admin)
Use rdtest1 for the user name and password. (both lower case)
Incoming and outgoing servers are Webserver.
E-mail address is rdtest1@lunarcorp.com
P.
Installing the WinXP Fax Component

1. Click Start\Printers and Faxes.
2. Click on Set up Faxing
3. When prompted for the WinXP CD, insert the OmniTech
Recovery CD (Packaged with each system). Click OK.
4. Click on browse and point the installation to the I386 folder on
the CD.
5. Press Ok twice and wait for the installation to finish.
6. From Printers and Faxes, click on Install a local Fax Printer.
7. Close up Faxes and Printers.
8. Install SP1
Configuring AutoMentor
1. Subject to change.)
Verify that you select WinFax as one of the available printers from
service or some other destination. AutoMentor is not enabled at
this time.
Default Boot Sequence

FDD
CD-ROM
HDD
Q.
PCI card slot assignment
The 1st blank panel is for the 2nd serial port

Page 11 of 16
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
R.
DOC ID: DXPC2004
REV: G
DATE: 12/6/02
CO: L10507
PCI Slot 3: Modem
Creating the Image
Prior to creating the Final image (this is the image of the operating system setup with
the Lunar Application software installed) verify/perform the following1. Empty the Recycle Bin.
2. Verify there are no errors from the last boot in the Event viewer (Start, Programs,
Administrative Tools, Event viewer)
3. Analyze/Defrag the HD (both drives) by going to Start, All Programs,
Accessories, System Tools, Disk Defragmenter. Run Analyze to see if Defrag
is necessary.
Note: All OmniTech PC models with on board LAN have networking installed. If
the system is not connected to the Network youll see a red X through 2 PCs,
which means the Network cable is unplugged. To stop this from being shown on
the Task bar, click the red X. Right click on the Local Area Connection and
Disable it.
Note: Prior to connecting a system to a LAN, the Connection must be re-enabled.
4. Refer to LUPC0006 to create the Image.
Page 12 of 16
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXPC2004
REV: G
DATE: 12/6/02
CO: L10507
Section 2. Duplicating Product Software

If the appropriate version of software is already loaded on the local hard disk,
proceed with Step B. This can be verified by locating the appropriate folder
named \product_X_XX_XXX on local hard drive; where product_X_XX_XXX is
the product software version to be duplicated. Note: For Adaptecs Easy CD
creator instructions, refer to DXPC2000.
A.
Creating Master Software on Duplicator PC.
B.
Insert product Master Setup CD into CD-ROM drive.

Wait for Lunar CD Browser to start.
Exit Lunar CD Browser.
Create folder named \product_X_XX_XXX on local hard drive.
Copy entire contents of product Master Setup CD into folder created
above.
Wait for copy to complete and remove the Master Setup CD from the
CD-ROM drive.
Start NERO burning software.
Press the New button.
Drag and Drop the selected files and sub-folders to the CD layout.
Select File/Compilation Info, click the Label tab and name the
Volume to match the version of software.
Select File/Save.
Create Product CD.
Insert blank CD into CD-ROM drive.

Start NERO burning software.
Press the New button.
Drag and Drop the selected files and sub-folders to the CD layout.
Click File/Write CD and then click on Write.
Press OK at the Compilation created successfully dialog.
Press Discard and remove the CD.
Validate CD layout using menu.
Apply label Disk 1 of 2 Insert Disk, wait for AutoStart, follow directions to
Application CD
Apply label Mulit-Media Disk, Disk 2 of 2 to Multi-Media CD
Page 13 of 16
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXPC2004
REV: G
DATE: 12/6/02
CO: L10507
Section 3. Configuring Application Software
Check Sales Order for System Number and Application Sites.

Get S/W Order Form FM03-4.
Start Configurator.
Enter System Number and select the options per the sales order.
Do not enable any application that does not have okay to ship status
unless approved by Regulatory Affairs. Review table below for latest
status. If Regulatory Affairs approval is granted, then enable the
application and add special Investigation label on software.
Application
DPX-MD+
Release
Status
DPX-NT
Release
Status
Prodigy Pro
Release
Status
AP Spine
Femur
Total Body
Standard
Standard
Optional
(Full-size
Only)
Optional
Optional
Standard
Standard
Optional
(Full-size
Only)
Optional
Optional
Optional
Dual Femur
Advanced Hip
Assessment
Pediatric
Spine
Pediatric
Total Body
Forearm
oneVision
Orthopedic
Lateral
HL7
Multiuser DB
Teledensitom
etry
Dicom
Lateral View
Business
Reports
(encore
composer)
Standard
Standard
Optional
(Full-size
Only)
Standard
Optional
Prodigy
Oracle
Release
Status
Standard
Standard
Standard
(Full-size
Only)
Standard
Optional
Prodigy
Vision
Release
Status
Standard
Standard
Standard
(Full-size
Only)
Standard
Standard
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Standard
Optional
Optional
Optional
Standard
Standard
Optional
Standard
Optional
Optional
Standard
Optional
Not Available
Optional
Optional
Not Available
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Page 14 of 16
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXPC2004
REV: G
DATE: 12/6/02
CO: L10507
Physician
Reports
(encore
composer)
Animal body
Optional
Optional
Optional
Standard
Standard
Not Available
Not Available
CAD
Optional
Optional
Optional.
Need
warning label
40122
Optional
Optional.
Need
warning label
40122
Optional
Optional.
Need
warning label
40122
Optional
OneScan
Hand
APVA
Absolute
Fracture Risk
All other
Software
Options
Optional
Not Available
Not Available
IRB Only
Optional
Not Available
Not Available
IRB Only
Optional
Optional
IRB Only
IRB Only
Optional
Optional
IRB Only
IRB Only
Optional
Optional
IRB Only
IRB Only
Internal use
only
Internal use
only
Internal use
only
Internal use
only
Internal use
only
Note: Compact systems do not require a configuration feature code. They are
configured in the field at the time of install using Service Options.
Serial and System numbers:
DPX-NT (DPX-MD+)
NTA Beta
NTA Production
NTB Beta
NTB Production
NTC Beta
NTC Production
First Scanner Number
First System Number
70001
70101
72001
72101
73001
73101
NT+70000
NT+70000
NT+72000
NT+72100
NT+73000
NT+73100
DPX-NT 180 (DPX-MD+ 180)

NTB-180 Beta
NTB-180 Production
NTC-180 Beta
NTC-180 Production
90001
NT-90101
91001
91101
NT-91000
NT-91100
Prodigy
Prodigy 1 Beta
Prodigy 2 Beta
Prodigy 3 Beta
60001
60101
62001
62101
63001
63101
DF+10001
DF+10001
DF+12000
DF+12100
DF+13001
DF+13101
Page 15 of 16
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXPC2004
REV: G
DATE: 12/6/02
CO: L10507
Prodigy 4 Beta
64001
64101
DF+14001
DF+14101
Prodigy Compact
80001
80101
81001
81101
DF-80001
DF-80101
DF-81001
DF-81101
Note, in each system number, the plus or minus symbol is used to denote total body
option availability. This has been for historical purposes. Configurator is not
conditionally tied to this convention.
Application
Production Release
Limited release for
user tests at early
adopter sites
DPX-MD+ Release
Status
6.70.021 on NT
hardware
DPX-NT Release
Status
6.70.021
Prodigy Release
Status
6.70.021
7.00.286
7.00.286
7.00.286
Configurator program automatically generates the feature code.

Select required printer, using menu command File|Printer Setup, to
Epson FX-880.
Print three labels.
Remove labels and place one on the S/W Production Form in the
designated area. Place the second label on the CD Diskette sleeve.
Place the third label on the PC Form.
Using Copy/Paste (Ctrl C/Ctrl V), take feature code from configuration
and paste into Filemaker DB program.
Fill out paperwork associated with software order form.
Note: Internal QA/Production software should be configured as System Number

00002 with all sites enabled.
GENERATED RECORDS
DXPC2001
FM03-4
DPX Fan PC Configuration Form

Software Order Form
Page 16 of 16
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC. ID: DXAP3031

REVISION: A
DATE: 12/27/01
WRITTEN BY: Mike Buchholz
TITLE: 230V Small Room Kit Installation Instructions
PURPOSE
This procedure describes the steps necessary to install the 230V small room kit (including
isolation transformer) at a customer's site. The isolation transformer reduces leakage
currents from the computer and peripherals.
APPLICATION
This procedure applies to all employees performing installation of a DPX-NT or Prodigy
system. The small room kit is used whenever metal surfaces of the computer or
peripherals are within 1.83 meters of the scan table (inside the patient environment).
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Verify that power is not applied to the transformer when changing or checking the fuses.
None.
DEFINITIONS
None.
PROCEDURES
1.
VERIFY PROPER INPUT VOLTAGE

A. Measure the voltage at the wall outlet (or UPS if applicable). If the voltage is less
than 180VAC, this transformer (LU8747) may not be used. If the voltage is
180VAC or more, proceed to step 2.
Page 1 of 6
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
2.
DOC ID: DXAP3031
REV: A
DATE: 12/27/01
CO: L10122
CONNECTING TRANSFORMER
A. Remove the label which covers the transformer input and discard it. If a UPS is
being used, power the transformer and scanner from the UPS. Do not power the
UPS or scanner from the transformer. This may overload the transformer.
B. The transformer may be placed on the floor, but it is best to place it on the
computer cart. It should be placed such that its metal enclosure cannot easily
come into contact with other equipment.
C. Verify that all peripherals have inputs which are suitable for voltages greater than
180VAC. Some peripherals may require that an input switch be appropriately
set.
D. Attach all peripheral inputs to the transformer outputs using the cords provided.
If an outlet strip was provided with the computer, discard it.
E. Power-up all peripherals and verify proper operation.
3.
REPLACING FUSES
A. If no peripherals will power-up, it is likely that a fuse is blown. To replace the
fuses, follow the steps below.
B. Unplug any cords from the transformer input. Using a standard screwdriver,
open the fuse lid and remove the fuse carriage. See Figures 1 and 2.
Page 2 of 6
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXAP3031
REV: A
DATE: 12/27/01
CO: L10122
Figure 1
Opening the fuse lid.
Page 3 of 6
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXAP3031
REV: A
DATE: 12/27/01
CO: L10122
Figure 2
Removing the fuse carriage.
Page 4 of 6
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXAP3031
REV: A
DATE: 12/27/01
CO: L10122
C. Replace the two fuses in the carriage with the spares taped to the transformer.
See Figure 3 for correct installation. See Figure 4 for incorrect installation.
Figure 3
Correct fuse installation.
Page 5 of 6
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXAP3031
REV: A
DATE: 12/27/01
CO: L10122
Figure 4
Fuse has slid out of holder. Reposition and try again. See Figure 3.
.
GENERATED RECORDS
None.
Page 6 of 6
6 1 Maintenance
Chapter 1:Maintenance
This chapter contains brief discussions of the Preventative

Maintenance procedure and Check Sheet as well as a discussion
on unusual sounds and a listing of change orders associated with
the Prodigy scanner.
6.0 Preventative Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-169
6.1 Unusual Sounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-170
6.0.1 QA History. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-169
6.0.2 Repacking the High Voltage Cable Connectors . 6-169
6.0.3 Wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-169
6.0.4 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-169
6.0.5 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-169
6.0.6 Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-170
6.2 Change Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-170
Maintenance6167
6-168Maintenance
6.0
Preventative Maintenance
There are a number of items to be checked, cleaned and tested during a
PM visit to a site. See the Prodigy PM / Service Call Checklist in
Appendix 6-A.
6.0.1QA History
An important aspect of the PM is checking the QA History (see section ). This
is important because when a QA is run during the PM, it should be consistent
with the past QA's. Copy the QA history file to a diskette and send to the
LUNAR Customer Service Department.
6.0.2Repacking the High Voltage Cable Connectors

The major work of a PM is the repacking of the High Voltage Cable
connectors. See procedure DXSE0000 in the chapter 5 Appenices. It is
VERY IMPORTANT that this procedure be understood completely before
performing it!
6.0.3Wear
The scanner should also be checked for signs of wear. The Shutter Assembly
especially should be inspected.
Wear on these parts can cause lead shavings to fall on the filter in the x-ray
beam. This can cause a drastic decline in Reference Counts, causing QA's to
fail.
Also check all the scanner's moving parts for signs of wear.
This would include wheels, pulleys, gears, bearings, belts, cables and
motor assemblies.
INSPECT CAREFULLY cables that enter the plastic cable track. These
cables are subjected to a good deal of motion and thus have the potential
for breakage!
Also, when performing the various tests listed below, listen for any
unusual noises that could be indications of wear.
6.0.4 Cleaning
Cleaning the scanner is important.
Remove dust and any debris from the electronics mounting chassis.
Clean the transverse and longitudinal extrusions. Small bits of debris
from the wheels may accumulate and impede motion.
Clean the Shutter Assembly and the filter, if necessary (see 6.0.3).
6.0.5 Inspection
Maintenance 6-169
Inspect the scanner internally and externally for obvious damage and
loose connections.
Check all PCB's for tight mounting screws.
6.0.6Tests
Run all other tests according to the Prodigy PM check sheet.
6.1
Unusual Sounds
A high pitched sound is normally heard when the scanner is in motion. This is
caused by the high frequency motor pulses being sent from the Centent Motor
Controller to the Transverse and Longitudinal Motors.
If the high pitched sound only occurs during motor operation, check the optical
interrupt disks and verify that they are not rubbing against the black plastic
transducer of the OMI board (see section 5.x). The disk should turn in the
middle of the transducer's slot.
For other sounds of an apparent mechanical nature, check all appropriate
gears and pulleys. Verify that the set screws are tightened and that the gears
and pulleys are not out of position. With the scanner turned off, move the
affected parts by hand to determine the exact source of the sound. Also look
for rusted or worn bearings and examine the V-wheels for wear. With age, the
longitudinal and transverse drive belts will dry out and start to cause noises.
Treating these belts with belt dressing is a short term solution until they can
be replaced.
Clicking or clunking sounds made during motor operation can be caused by
belts that are riding up on their pulleys, or by a too tight bearing support. The
bearing support is held to the carriage by a set screw from the rear. If this set
screw is so tight that the bearing and support have no play (i.e. can be rocked
1-2 mm), it can cause a clunking sound during transverse motion. If this
screw is loosened, it should be secured with Lock-Tite so it cannot work its
way loose.
Pulleys that have become defective can also cause clicking and squeaking/
squealing sounds. Try to isolate the movement of individual pulleys to locate
the defective part.
Scraping sounds can be caused by any of the moving carriages, cables or
cable track rubbing against an adjacent panel. Localize the sound and
investigate the appropriate areas.
6.2
Change Orders
As engineering changes are made to the Prodigy Scanner, they will be noted
herein future revisions of this manual.
6-170Maintenance
DOC. ID: DXSE0012

GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
REVISION: G
DATE: 2/28/02
TITLE: DEXA PM Work Instructions
PURPOSE
This procedure describes the steps necessary to do a Planned Maintenance Check on
a DEXA scanning system at a customer's site, and to assure that the system is
operating within GE-LUNAR's specifications and in compliance with applicable Federal
and State regulations.
APPLICATION
This procedure applies to all employees performing Planned Maintenance or Site
Certification of DPX Series or PRODIGY, and DPX-NT scanning systems.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
When power is applied this equipment generates ionizing radiation. Take precautions
that no part of your body passes through the x-ray beam when the equipment is
energized.
DXAP0008
DXAP2007
DXAP3002
DXQC0022
DXQC2022
DXSE0036
DXSE0038
DPX-Series Installation Test Procedures

Prodigy Hacksaw Test
DPX-NT Installation Test Procedures
Aluminum Spine Phantom Scan Procedure
enCORE software Aluminum Spine Phantom Scan Procedure
OINK Daughter board and Limit Switch Field Replacement Instructions
DEXA PM Quality record
DEFINITIONS
DPX Series scanners are all non- Prodigy, non- DPX-NT/MD+ scanners.
enCORE based systems are all PRODIGY and DPX-NT/MD+ scanners.
PRODIGY I systems are defined as PRODIGY systems with system numbers 11999
and lower.
DPX-NT (A) systems are defined as DPX NT systems with system numbers 71999 and
lower.
Page 1 of 10
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXSE0012
REV: G
DATE: 2/28/02
CO: L10173
PROCEDURE
A. QA HISTORY AND ERRORLOG.
1. Perform a Quality Assurance test to insure the system is operating.
a. Verify that all tests on the QA are passing.
2. DPX Series scanners:
The QA values needed may be found by viewing the QA database (F4
Database options F2 QA History) and / or in the Daily QA printouts in the
Customers QA binder.
a. Verify that the Detector has not lost significant resolution by checking that
the high and low energy air counts have not decreased by more than 10%
from the date of installation or the date of the last tube head or detector
change).
b. Verify that the air ratio has not changed by more than .02. from the date of
installation or last tube head or detector change (calculate from earliest
QA or lookup on QA printouts).
3. Systems with enCORE software
a. Copy the QA.mdb file to a diskette (Tools / Send Configuration / Select
Error Log and QA Database, make sure compress Files is selected and
select Span Multiple Disks if necessary).
b. Select the appropriate drive (3 floppy A: ) insert disk into drive and click
OK.
c. Label with system number and PM, the file may be mailed to Service
Engineering or email file to lunar.support@med.ge.com
NOTE: This is only to gather statistical information on enCORE based
systems performance, there will be no follow up regarding these QA histories.
4. Analysis of the QA History file
a. DPX Series
i. Verify % Spillover is between 6.3 and 9.5
ii. Check the Air Ratio it cannot deviate more than .02 since the last
detector / tube change
iii. Check the low air counts a change greater than 10% since the
date of last detector change indicates a failing detector
iv. Check the Large standard Mass should not deviate more than
2%
Page 2 of 10
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXSE0012
REV: G
DATE: 2/28/02
CO: L10173
v. If any of the above parameters are failing, call GE-Lunar Customer

Support for help diagnosing the system.
1. To aid in diagnosis, email the QA.MDB file to
lunar.sppport@med.ge.com
5. Review the error log(s).
b. DPX Series systems print from DOS prompt
i. C:\> ERRDUMP L N >PRN
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
1. See DPX Series CSB Vol 9 for DPX Series Error Log
Interpretation
enCORE based systems Tools\ Error Log add to instructions
Verify that there are no hardware subsystem failures (X-ray, Detector,
Mechanical)
Contact Lunar Service Department if any unexplained or unusual errors
are discovered in the error log.
i. Error Log may be faxed to 608-826-7107 to aid in interpretation.
Delete error log for DPX Series (C:\LUNAR> del err_320.bin or C:\LUNAR
del errlog.bin).
Start a new error log for enCORE-based systems by clicking on Initialize
Log.
B. HOST PC MAINTENANCE
1. Clean the Printer according to the manufacturers instructions
a. For Hewlett Packard Printers go to www.hp.com and search the support
pages for the customers printer model.
2. DPX series systems:
a. From a DOS prompt
i. Delete contents of C:\SCRATCH and C:\PRNTMNGR directories.
ii. Delete all *.CHK files in C:\ directory.
3. Software updates
a. DPX Series systems: all DPX-IQ densitometers may be updated to
version 4.7e software free of charge.
b. All other (non-IQ) DPX Series Densitometers should be running version
3.65 or 4.7e (if upgraded to IQ software)
c. If the customer is running a version lower than 4.7e, or 3.65 ask them if
they are interested in this free update, they may get by contacting the GELunar Apps line (USA) or you may order it from GE-Lunar at
lunar.support@med.ge.com or at 866-225-4771.
Page 3 of 10
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXSE0012
REV: G
DATE: 2/28/02
CO: L10173
d. enCORE based systems:

i. Contract and Warranty customers are entitled to free software
updates (all software versions <6.0 are updates, > 6.0 is
considered an upgrade and all customers must purchase it)
ii. Billable customers may purchase software updates by contacting
GE-Lunar at 866-225-4771.
C. SCAN TABLE MAINTENANCE

1. Remove the scanner tabletop.
a. Power down the scan table.
b. DPX Series tables unlock the end panel doors and remove the tabletop
screws.
i. DPX-IQ
ii. Non DPX-IQ
c. DPX-NT unlock the end panels and remove the tabletop screws.
i.
d. PRODIGY lift up the table pad and remove the 4 counter sunk 1/8 hex
head screws in the 4 corners of the tabletop.
2. Clean the scanner interior
a. Clean the electronics pan of dust and dirt.
b. Wipe the dust and dirt off of the rear longitudinal rail and the transverse
rail.
3. Inspect mechanical parts and cables for wear and breakage.
a. Check all cables on the cable trough for wear
b. Check the v-wheels on the rear longitudinal carriage for appropriate
tension Insert V-wheel instructions.
4. X-Ray Generator
a. Power up the scan table.
b. Ramp the scanner to the appropriate kV / mA and read the test points on
the appropriate board as indicated in the X-Ray Settings table on
DXSE0038.
i. DPX Series
1. Load the version specific diagnostic software from the Tools
disk from a DOS prompt type: A:/diags/diagnos load
c:/lunar
2. Enter the diagnostic software from a C:\LUNAR prompt
type: diags
3. Choose option 5 Static Counter
Page 4 of 10
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXSE0012
REV: G
DATE: 2/28/02
CO: L10173
ii. EnCORE based systems

1. Place the scanner in Service Mode
a. Options / User Options / check the check box for
Service Enter Password (Smile sw ver 1.0 2.05 or
Award ver 2.10 +)
2. Go to Tools / Diagnostics / Scanner X-ray
3. Enter desired kV and ma click on ramp
NOTE: Be sure to use your anti-static wrist strap when working on
or near circuit board assemblies. .
5. Wedge Test (Rollover Test DPX Series Only)
a. Select the Static Counter from the initial menu. When the static counter
screen appears, use the arrow key to move the cursor to Operating
Voltage, and enter 76.0.
b. Move the cursor to Tube Current and enter the number 150.
c. Set the "Repeat" number to 20 and the "Printer" to ON.
i. If the AGS is operating properly, the low channel counts will be
approximately 600,000 to 800,000 counts, and there will be fewer
high channel counts in the range of approximately 400,000 to
700,000. Both counts will be stable to approximately +/- 3000
counts from one sample to the next.
d. Place the aluminum wedge test tool on the top of the collimator, with the
thin edge toward the collimators larger aperture, and the thick edge away
from the aperture. Insure that the aluminum wedge is NOT in the beam.
e. Press <Esc> and the shutter will open. Allow a 7 samples to appear on
the monitor, and then slowly move the Aluminum Wedge through the
radiation beam, starting with the thin edge of the wedge.
f. Move the wedge very slowly until the beam reaches an aluminum
thickness of approximately 2 mm.
g. In the results displayed on the monitor, note the sample number where
the high channel air counts begin to be reduced. At this point the counts in
both channels should be reduced for the following samples. In other
words: both the high and low channel counts must decrease
consistently as the wedge enters the beam.
h. If the low channel counts increase at any point instead of decreasing, the
AGS is not properly adjusted or the detector is failing.
i. This may cause "bone points" or white pixels in the image around
the outside of a patient's Total Body scan and or white streaks in
femur scans.
Page 5 of 10
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
i.
DOC ID: DXSE0012
REV: G
DATE: 2/28/02
CO: L10173
Run the AGS wedge test and verify that it passes attach results to PM
Check sheet.
6. Alignment verification / Mechanical / Cabling check

a. Run Air Matrix Scan
i. Remove the tabletop if it is on.
ii. In DIAGS select F4 QUALITY ASSURANCE TESTS, select option
3 PERFORM AIR MATRIX SCAN. Choose 1 - Perform A Scan.
Change the number of lines to the maximum value, also change
the number of steps to the maximum value.
iii. Note the filename here_____________________________. This
will have to be entered to analyze the data (filename format: XM
followed by the 4-digit system number followed by MO.01A.
Subsequent scans have extensions 01B, 01C, etc.) Then Press
Esc to continue.
iv. Remove the detector collimator (non-IQ / MD systems only) and
install the Air Matrix Piece (attenuation insert) or tape a 0.25 inch
piece of aluminum over the detector (over on top of the collimator)
to reduce the intensity of the beam.
v. Press Esc to begin the scan. The scan will take approx. 30
minutes to complete.
NOTE: If anything passes through the beam during this test, IT WILL FAIL.
vi. Analyze the Air Matrix scan in DIAGS by selecting option F4
QUALITY ASSURANCE TESTS then select option 4 ANALIZE AIR
MATRIX SCAN.
vii. Enter the Air Matrix file name when prompted and press the enter
key.
viii. All categories must pass, see table 1 for Air Matrix values.
Category
Limit
Chi Squared
45
Skew
+/- 0.07
Kurtosis
+/- 0.07
Table 1: Failure Limits for the Air Matrix Test
ix. Print the overall values by answering Y (yes) when the software
prompts
x. Return the printout of the passing Air Matrix with the PM
Checksheet report (DXSE0038).
Page 6 of 10
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXSE0012
REV: G
DATE: 2/28/02
CO: L10173
xi.
If any categories fail, check the deviation image for possible

electronic or alignment problems, consult GE-Lunar OLC for
assistance.
xii. Run a Daily QA from the system software, or a Peak from the
diagnostic software, before trying the Air Matrix.
xiii. Once an acceptable Air Matrix scan is printed, delete the Air Matrix
files (these files begin with "XM" or "XP" plus the System Number,
and they are generally the only files beginning with "X" in the
C:\LUNAR subdirectory).
b. Beam Wobble scan (Prodigy systems with software version 2.20 and
greater DXAP2011) or Alignment scan (Prodigy systems with software
versions lower than 2.20 and DPX-NT/MD+ systems- DXAP3001) as
appropriate and verify that it passes (attach the results).
7. Limit Switches
a. Verify Limit Switch distances (DPX series Diags F1 Limit Switch
Diagnostics / 1 Limit to Limit Distance; enCORE systems - tools /
Diagnostics / scanner motion
b. DPX Series Only - Home the scanner
c. Mark the home position on the Home Jig
Page 7 of 10
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DPXIQ /
MD180 or
DPX
w/
4.1d or
greate
r host
DPXL
DPXIQ /
MD240 or
DPXL
w/
4.1d or
greate
r host
DPXSF
10920
10960
1078010820
1244
01248
0
1243012470
13360
13400
1328013320
1988
01992
0
10920
10960
1078010820
13360
13400
w/
3.63
host
1328013320
DPX
(4-3)
Transverse
Steps
(1-2)
Longitudina
l Steps
(3-4)
Transverse
Steps
(2-1)
Longitudina
l Steps
DOC ID: DXSE0012
REV: G
DATE: 2/28/02
CO: L10173
DPXSF w/
4.1d or
greate
r host
PRODIGY
PRODIGY
240cm
Table
180cm
Table
1092
0
1096
0
1078010820
12475
+/- 25
12475
+/- 25
12450
+/- 20
12450
+/- 20
1973019770
4225
4265
41954235
19890
+/- 35
13790
+/- 35
19605
+/- 20
13530
+/-20
1244
0
1248
0
1243012470
1092
0
1096
0
1078010820
12475
+/- 25
12475
+/- 20
12450
+/-20
12450
+/- 20
1988
0
1992
0
w/
3.63
host
1973019770
4225
4265
w/
3.63
host
41954235
19890
+/- 35
13790
+/- 35
19605
+/- 20
13530
+/- 20
DPXNT /
MD+
240c
m
Table
DPXNT/MD+
180cm
Table
8. Replace the table top and screw down.

a. DPX Series Only Insure Home position is correct by using the Home Jig
b. If necessary adjust limit switches
9. Daily QA Tests
a. DPX Series only check the peak setting on the QA last run
i. If peak is not 500 +/- 25 units adjust the peak
1. The voltage to the detector is controlled by the adjustment of
the potentiometer on the SBC board labeled HV ADJ - R43.
2. The voltage at TP18 of the SBC is equal to the detector
voltage divided by 1000. If R43 is adjusted to decrease the
voltage at TP18 by 0.001, the peak will increase by 5 units.
3. The last peak value obtained during a Quality Assurance
scan is stored in the Quality Assurance History database file.
Page 8 of 10
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXSE0012
REV: G
DATE: 2/28/02
CO: L10173
If the next peak value obtained differs from the last value
stored in the database by more than 50 units, the Quality
Assurance scan will fail. If the peak must be shifted by more
than 50 units to return it to 500 units +25, the peak must be
adjusted in steps of less than 50 units (40 unit steps are
recommended).
4. A complete QA must be run
5. between each step to update the Quality Assurance History
database file.
6. If the software peak setting corresponds to where both the
high and low channel counts are at a maximum, (see fig.
6.3) follow the steps outlined below. The graph on the QA
will look similar to the one shown in fig 6.3 with the dashed
vertical line (where the software thinks the peak is) on the
graph at a point where both the high and low energy plots
are maximized (the dashed curved lines). If the graph on the
QA is unlike fig 6.3, go to part B of this procedure.
7. select "Peak / Set AMP Gain", then select "Perform Peak"
and [Esc] to run the peak. Observe the results generated by
the QA to determine if the software has selected the
Amplifier Setting where both high and low channel counts
are at a maximum. If not go to part B.
8. 3. If the peak requires adjustment, (is not within +/- 25 units
of 500) connect a voltage meter to the SBC at TP18 (see fig
6.2). Put the meter to the VDC scale and record the voltage
reading (e.g. 0.703VDC
9. Using the voltage recorded in step 3 and the peak value
recorded in step 2 determine the appropriate voltage
adjustment for R43.
10. To determine voltage adjustment:
a. If Peak >500:
/5 * + Old VTP18
New
VTP18
= (Current Peak 500)
b. Peak <500 New VTP18 = (500 Current Peak) / 5 *

Old VTP18
c. Do not attempt to adjust the peak by more than 40
units as an adjustment without a complete passing
QA in the LUNAR software will cause a peak failure
on the QA. For Peak settings that are more than 50
units away from 500 multiple adjustments are
required.
Page 9 of 10
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXSE0012
REV: G
DATE: 2/28/02
CO: L10173
11. With your voltmeter attached to TP 18, adjust R43 (see fig
6.2) until your voltmeter reads what you determined in step
6.
12. From the main menu press F3 System Quality Assurance
and place the System Standard on the table silk-screen with
brass insert up and at head end of table. Press[Esc] and
allow the QA to run in its entirety and to print out. Verify that
QA passes.
13. If peak value is not within 25 units of 500, record peak value
from the QA that was just run and the current voltage at TP
18. Using these values repeat steps A. 3-8 until Peak is
within 25 units of 500 and a complete passing QA has been
run.
b. Run two Daily QAs and verify that they all pass (attach passing QAs).
i. Verify that all four-indicator lamps are functioning.
c. Start an additional Quality Assurance test and verify the function of the
Emergency Stop button by using it to stop the system
10. Perform an AP Spine scan of the aluminum phantom (attach results) see
DXQC0022 (DPX Series) or DXQC2022 (enCORE based systems).
a. Verify that the scanner is not Hacksawing the edges on the spine
phantom image should be straight if they are not
i. Verify that the front and rear transverse pulleys are tight
ii. Check for transverse binding
iii. If the transverse belt is loose tighten it.
iv. Prodigy Scanners Run the Hacksaw test (DXAP2007).
b. The L2-L4 result should be within the expected range for the individual
phantom.
c. % Fat result in (water based phantoms) should be within 4 to 5%.
d. Verify that the Patient Positioning Switches and the Patient Locator Laser
are functioning.
11. Run a final Daily QA
12. Re check the last session in the error log and make sure it is free of hardware
errors.
13. Make a copy of the DEXA PM Check sheet for the customer, discuss any service
concerns with the system and explain work performed.
GENERATED RECORDS
DXSE0038 DEXA PM Quality record
Page 10 of 10
DOC. ID: DXSE0038

GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
REVISION: C
DATE: 2/28/02
TITLE: DEXA PM Quality Record
DXAP0012 DEXA PM INSTRUCTIONS
CHECK LIST
SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION
SYSTEM NUMBER:
SCAN TABLE SERIAL NUMBER
PM DATE:
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
HOST PC MODEL :___________________________S/N:____________________________________

PRINTER TYPE:_____________________________________________________________________
SOFTWARE VERSION:____________________
(If Customer is a contract customer, verify that software version loaded is current if it is not order the
current version for the customer.)
TEST EQUIPMENT USED

Multimeter
TESTING
A indicates a step has been completed satisfactorily, N/A indicates not applicable.
Verify 20A Dedicated Outlet, all components ......................................................................................... _____
QA History and Error Log reviewed ......................................................................................................... _____
Mechanical Inspection Performed ........................................................................................................... _____
X-ray Settings verified (fill in table on page 2) ......................................................................................... _____
Peak Setting adjusted (DPX Series Only) ............................................................................................... _____
Detector Stability Test (Wedge) performed (DPX Series Only)............................................................... _____
Verify Limit Switch Positions.................................................................................................................... _____
3 Quality Assurance Tests Performed..................................................................................................... _____
Air Matrix or Alignment Test or Beam Wobble test performed................................................................_____
3 Aluminum Phantom Scans Performed ................................................................................................. _____
Host PC maintenance Performed............................................................................................................ _____
Printer Cleaned per OEM instructions ..................................................................................................... _____
Page 1 of 3
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXSE0038
QA History (DPX Series Only)

Installation*
REV: C
DATE: 2/28/02
% Difference
((Install-PM) /
expected * 100)
At PM
AIR HIGH
AIR LOW
LG STD MASS
CO: L10173
Pass
(Max = +/-10%)
(Max =+/- 10%)
(Max =+/- 2%)
Installation*
At PM
| Install PM|
Air Ratio
Max = +/- 0.02
Spillover
N/A
Max = 6.3 9.5
*or date of last tube head change check date of manufacture on compliance label
X-Ray Settings
Test Point
KV
XORB
cSBC
1
15
16
15
16
15
16
17
18
76
mA
(DPX-NT
/ MD+)
0.150
(DPX
series
and
PRODIG
Y)
(DPX-NT
/MD+)
0.050
0.1400.160
0.0460.054
0.750
0.38
0.74 0.76
0.370
0.390
3.0
1.5
2.97 3.03
1.490
1.510
3.76 3.84
3.76
3.84
Peak Setting (DPX Series Only)

Before Adjustment
Peak
Setting
SBC TP 18
Limits
(DPX
series
and
PRODIG
Y)
Actual
After Adjustment
Page 2 of 3
GE Medical Systems
LUNAR
DOC ID: DXSE0038
REV: C
DATE: 2/28/02
CO: L10173
Phantom Results
Phantom S/N____________
L2-L4 BMD
% Fat
1
2
3
Average (sum/3)
Expected Value
N/A
% Difference ((ave-expected) / expected *

100)
N/A
+/- 3% for Encapsulated Phantom

+/- 2% for Water Bath Phantom
PASS
N/A
(Circle One)
REPORTS PRESENT
Beam Wobble (PRODIGY) or Alignment Test (DPX-NT/MD+) or Air Matrix (DPX Series) Results ....... _____
QA History reviewed on site .................................................................................................................... _____
Phantom Scan Printouts (include Ancillary results) ................................................................................. _____
Comments on any problems, adjustments made, parts replaced, issues, etc.:

_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
Field Engineer ____________________/____________________ DATE ___/___/___
Page 3 of 3

Lunar Prodigy Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Lunar Prodigy Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PRODIGY

This page left blank intentionally.

Prodigy Service Manual

is a registered trademark of General Electric Company.

PRODIGY is a trademark of GE-LUNAR Corporation.

Copyright 2000 by GE-LUNAR Corporation.

Prodigy Service Manual

This page left blank intentionally.

Prodigy Service Manual

READ THIS FIRST

Information Requested By GE-LUNAR:

Prodigy Service Manual

Prodigy Service Manual

This chapter highlights safety devices and features a Service

PRODIGY Service Manual (Rev C - 2000)

Figure 1-6. Source (x-rays) on - Shutter open (yellow). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

PRODIGY Service Manual (Rev C - 2000)

Symbols and labels found on the PRODIGY

Attention: contains important safety information such as the

Emergency Stop Button: shows the location of the

Power Off: shows the switch position for Power Off.

Laser On: shows the location of the Laser On indicator. It is found

PRODIGY Service Manual (Rev C - 2000)

Shutter Open: shows the location of the Shutter Open indicator.

X-ray On: shows the location of the X-Ray On indicator.

Type B Equipment: shows that the scanner has Type B

1.1.2 Internal Symbols

Protective Earth: shows the location of a Protective Earth

Functional Earth: shows the location of a Functional Earth

Laser Caution Label: Shows that the scanner uses

Laser Caution Label: Canada only

PRODIGY Service Manual (Rev C - 2000)

Tube Head Assembly Label (system number

Tube Head Assembly Label (system number

System Label (system number DF+12000 and

System Label (system number DF+11999 and

PRODIGY Service Manual (Rev C - 2000)

High Voltage Power Supply: This label gives

X-ray Controller: This label shows x-ray

Collimator Assembly: This label gives

Warning Label and Radiation Symbol: The

Grounding Reliability Label: This label states that

PRODIGY Service Manual (Rev C - 2000)

Emergency Stop Button

Figure 1-1. The PRODIGY Display Panel

PRODIGY Service Manual (Rev C - 2000)

Figure 1-2. Laser Warning Label (U.S. systems only)

Figure 1-3. Laser Warning Label (Canadian Systems only)

Figure 1-4. Laser Warning Label (International systems only)

DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM while the laser is

PRODIGY Service Manual (Rev C - 2000)

Figure 1-5. Source (x-rays) off - Shutter closed (green)

Figure 1-6. Source (x-rays) on - Shutter open (yellow)

When the x-ray on / shutter open symbol appears in literature

Cautions, Warnings, and Notes

1.5.1 Caution Statements

PRODIGY Service Manual (Rev C - 2000)

1.5.2 Warning Statements

1.5.3 Note Statements

This symbol turns the reader's attention to important

PRODIGY Service Manual (Rev C - 2000)

Figure 1-7. Potential Pinch Points on the PRODIGY

1.6.2 Laser safety